Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 2133

Page 1155

Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque


TIGHTENING TORQUE

With flat seat & gasket


........................................................................................................................................................
20-30 Nm (14.7-22 ft lb) With tapered seat .........................................................................................
....................................................................... 10-20 Nm (7.4-14.8 ft lb)
Page 516
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Page 1073
Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments Checking the Air/Fuel Mixture Adjustment
California Models

NOTE:

a. Checking the idle air/fuel mixture adjustment will require the use of the on/off ratio tester (Bosch
KDJE-P 600) or equivalent. b. All tests are to be performed after engine has reached normal
operating temperature. c. All accessories must be switched off. d. The engine must be in good
mechanical working order and free from electrical misfires.

Fig. 72 Bosch On/Off Ratio Tester

Fig. 68 Diagnostic Socket Location

1. Connect the on/off ratio tester to the diagnostic socket.

2. Disconnect the purge line to the throttle valve assembly at the purge valve and plug it.
Page 1527
Relay Box: Application and ID

Fuse and Relay Block Identification and Location

Left Rear Corner of Engine Compartment

The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.

F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)

The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 626
2. Fasten rpm sensor and protective plate with hex screw to steering knuckle. Tightening torque to
72 in-lbs (8 N-m). Note: The self-locking hex socket screw may be used only once.
3. Clip cable to cover plate.

4. Fasten rpm sensor with new self-locking hex socket screws to steering knuckle. See
"Specifications" for torque specifications.

5. Clip cable to holder and pull through rubber grommet into engine compartment.

6. Replace O-ring. Connect coaxial plug.

7. Mount front wheel.

8. Complete test program.


Page 375
Air Bag Control Module: Service Precautions
Disposal of Mercury-Containing Control Units:

Mercury-containing components must not be disposed of with industrial waste or passed on to the
usual scrap disposal companies. These components must either be sent for recycling in
accordance with the regulations of the local and/or state law, or disposed of as special waste.

Mercury-Containing Components:

1. Belt Tensioner Control Unit Part No. 003 820 06 10

2. Airbag Control Unit Part No. 126 820 14 10, 124 820 51 10, 002 820 97 10

3. Airbag Control Unit Part No. 003 820 73 10, 003 820 74 10

Mercury-Free Control Units:


Page 1050

Symbols Part 1
Page 665
C. Control lamp fails to light up with running engine, oil temperature > 60 ° C and oil level below
"min", control function section "B" okay:
Electrical Specifications

Wheel Speed Sensor: Electrical Specifications

Solenoid Valves Resistance 0.7-1.7 ohms

Front Axle Speed Sensors 850-2300 ohms

Rear Axle Speed Sensor 600-1600 ohms

Speed Sensors Insulation 20,000 ohms

Greater than.
Page 70
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Engine - Long Crank Time Before Start/Misfire/Runs
Rough
Fuel Pump Relay: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Long Crank Time Before Start/Misfire/Runs
Rough
Page 1257
Damages or malfunctions resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives
are not covered by the MERCEDES-BENZ Limited Warranty.
For model year 1986, all gasoline models except 190 E 2.3 require premium unleaded gasoline. As
of model year 1987, all gasoline engines require premium unleaded gasoline

Use only premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 91 min. In the U.S., this octane number is an average of the Research
octane number (R) and the Motor octane number (M): (R + M) / 2. The octane number is also
known as the Anti-Knock Index.

CAUTION! To maintain the engine's durability and performance, only premium unleaded gasoline
is to be used. If premium unleaded is not available and low octane gasoline is used, follow these
precautions:

- Partially fill the fuel tank with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with premium unleaded
gasoline as soon as possible.

- Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration. Do not exceed an engine speed of 2000 rpm if
the vehicle has a light load (two occupants and no luggage for example). Do not exceed 2/3 of
maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous
terrain.

Model years 1975 - 1985 and model year 1986 model 190 E 2.3

Use unleaded regular gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 87 min.

Model years 1972 - 1974

Use leaded or unleaded~gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 87 min. When only unleaded gasoline is being used, check the valve
clearance on engines with mechanically adjustable valves at half the recommended interval.

Pre-model year 1972

Use premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 91 min. Check the valve clearance at half the recommended interval.

2. Diesel Engines

Use only commercially available vehicular diesel fuel number 2 or number 1 (ASTM D975 Number
2-D or Number 1-D).

For information on cold weather operation, refer to the vehicle Owner's Manual or Service
Information MBNA 00/7 (11-82).
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications
Use only Mercedes-Benz approved fluids

Standard...............................................................................................................................................
........85W-90,90 GL-5(Gear Oil, API Service GL-5)
Limited-Slip...................................................................................................................................90
GL-5*(Special Lubricant for Limited Differentials) CAPACITY, Refill: Gas engine:

1982-91 All w/V8 engines.....................................................................................................................


............................................1.3 Liters 2.8 Pints 1982-89 190E............................................................
........................................................................................................................0.7 Liters 1.4 Pints
1986-91 300 Series, except SL............................................................................................................
..............................................1.1 Liters 2.3 Pints 1987-90 260E..........................................................
..........................................................................................................................1.1 Liters 2.3 Pints
1990-91 190E.......................................................................................................................................
.............................................1.1 Liters 2.3 Pints 300SL.......................................................................
.........................................................................................................................1.3 Liters 2.8 Pints

LIMITED-SLIP IDENTIFICATION: Metal plate on rear of differential, near fill plug


Page 148

Circuit Identification
Page 877

Throttle Position Switch: Description and Operation

Fig. 20 Throttle Valve Switch

The throttle valve switch communicates the "idle" and "full load" throttle positions to the CIS-E
control unit. The throttle valve switch is mounted on the throttle body and actuated by the throttle
valve shaft. A separate contact is closed for each of the throttle valve end positions, i.e. idle and full
load.
Page 859
Oxygen Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Cuts-Out, Cannot Be Restarted
07.3-88041 Engine Cuts-Out, Cannot be Restarted All Vehicles with 4/88

Gasoline Engine

Cause: Electrical wire of 02-Sensor comes at times into contact with drive shaft causing a short in
the printed circuit board of the fuel pump relay.

Remedy Replace 02-Sensor. Make sure electrical wire is properly routed.

Replace fuel pump relay.


Page 823

Fig. 3

Fig. 4
Page 1349

Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Oils & Fluids - Factory Approved Products

REF. NO. MBNA 00/31a

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: August 1988 (supersedes MBNA 00/31, Dec. 1987)

SUBJECT: FACTORY-APPROVED SERVICE PRODUCTS ALL MODELS

NOTE:

This S.I. contains the updated information which was issued in July 1988.

This is a current listing of factory-approved service products which are presently available in the
U.S.A. it will be revised from time to time to add or delete products according to the latest
information received from the factory. Any product listed in future supplements, to the "M-B
Specifications for Service Products" microfiche that is available, in the U.S.A. is also automatically
approved for use.

We recommend that only approved service products be used in Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

Additional information on the products listed can be found in the "MB Specifications for Service
products" microfiche.

Approved Engine Oils

IMPORTANT:
Engine oils are labeled on the container with various API (American Petroleum Institute)
designations of quality. Only oils from the listings with any of the following combinations are
approved: SE/CC, SE/CD, SF/CC or SF/CD. Always refer to the "Viscosity Grade" charts in the
Owner's Manual in this S.I. for the proper viscosity grade based on ambient temperature.

NOTE:

Multi-viscosity engine oils (sheet no. 226.1) which have an API grading of SF only have not been
released by our factory and should therefore not be used (eg: some 5W30 and some 10W40
viscosity grade).

1. Single-Viscosity Engine Oils (Sheet No. 226.0)


Page 657
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair
Remove combination switch, refer to VEHICLE LIGHTING/COMPONENT R&R;
PROCEDURES/COMBINATION SWITCH. After removing combination switch, remove screw
attaching cruise control switch to combination switch and separate switches.
Locations

Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Locations

Component ID N35

Component Name

Daytime running lamp control unit

Component Location Driver's footwell, behind lower dash panel


Page 920

Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Mixture Control Unit

Component Locations

The mixture control unit is fitted to the intake manifold inlet via the throttle valve housing.
Page 1326
Damages or malfunctions resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives
are not covered by the MERCEDES-BENZ Limited Warranty.
For model year 1986, all gasoline models except 190 E 2.3 require premium unleaded gasoline. As
of model year 1987, all gasoline engines require premium unleaded gasoline

Use only premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 91 min. In the U.S., this octane number is an average of the Research
octane number (R) and the Motor octane number (M): (R + M) / 2. The octane number is also
known as the Anti-Knock Index.

CAUTION! To maintain the engine's durability and performance, only premium unleaded gasoline
is to be used. If premium unleaded is not available and low octane gasoline is used, follow these
precautions:

- Partially fill the fuel tank with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with premium unleaded
gasoline as soon as possible.

- Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration. Do not exceed an engine speed of 2000 rpm if
the vehicle has a light load (two occupants and no luggage for example). Do not exceed 2/3 of
maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous
terrain.

Model years 1975 - 1985 and model year 1986 model 190 E 2.3

Use unleaded regular gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 87 min.

Model years 1972 - 1974

Use leaded or unleaded~gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 87 min. When only unleaded gasoline is being used, check the valve
clearance on engines with mechanically adjustable valves at half the recommended interval.

Pre-model year 1972

Use premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 91 min. Check the valve clearance at half the recommended interval.

2. Diesel Engines

Use only commercially available vehicular diesel fuel number 2 or number 1 (ASTM D975 Number
2-D or Number 1-D).

For information on cold weather operation, refer to the vehicle Owner's Manual or Service
Information MBNA 00/7 (11-82).
Page 645

Circuit Identification
Page 476

Symbols Part 1
Page 542
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Page 1579
Page 1255
FLUID GREASE (NLGI Class 00)
For door lock pin and striker eye

Castrol CLS Grease Castrol, Wayne, NJ / Toronto, Canada

HIGH TEMPERATURE ROLLER BEARING GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For front wheel bearings

MB High Temperature Antifriction Bearing MB part no. 001 989 23 51 10 Grease

CHASSIS GREASE (NLGI Class 01)

For all greasing points except front wheel hubs

Shell Retinax C Shell Oil Co., Houston, TX

LONG TERM LUBRICATING GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For release bearing, release arm and splines for connecting linkage on level control valves

Molykote Longterm 2 Plus Dow Corning

MB Long Term Grease MB part no. 000 989 63 51

MULTI-PURPOSE GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For all greasing points except front wheel

3752 Almagard Vari-Purpose Lubricant Lubrication Engineers Inc., Fort Worth, TX

Castrol LM Grease Castrol, Wayne, NJ / Toronto, Canada

Exxon Multipurpose Grease Exxon Co., Houston, TX

Renolit MP Fuchs Oil Corp., Somerville, NJ

Unocal MP Automotive Grease Union Oil Company of California, Brea, CA

COMPLEX GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For sliding blocks of sliding/pop-up roof

MB Lubrication Paste MB part no. 001 989 46 51

HYDRAULIC OIL

For hydraulic system, Model 600

MB Hydraulic Oil MB part no. 100 890 O0 11

HYDRAULIC OIL

For load leveling system, hydropneumatic suspension, hydraulic soft top, 4MATIC, ASD

MB Hydraulic Oil MB part no. 000 989 91 03 10

HYDRAULIC OIL

For tandem pumps with common oil reservoir for steering and level control in Model 210.

MB Hydraulic Oil MB part no. 000 989 20 03 10


ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

MB Anti-Corrosion/Anti-freeze MB part no. Q 1 03 0002

CAUTION! The use of aluminum components in M-B engines requires that


anti-corrosion/anti-freeze specifically formulated to protect aluminum
Page 810

Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Air-Flow Position Sensor Indicator

Fig. 5 Air Flow Sensor Position Indicator

The air-flow sensor position indicator is a potentiometer which informs the CIS-E control unit of the
need for extra enrichment during cold-engine part-throttle acceleration. The potentiometer signals
how fast and how far the sensor plate moves as air flow increases. This prevents the familiar "flat
spot" that accompanies an abrupt opening of the throttle valve. The potentiometer operates with a
constant voltage of approx. 8 volts supplied by the ECU. During acceleration, the movement of the
sensor plate produces an output (voltage) signal which is transmitted to the ECU via the
potentiometer contacts. From this input, the ECU calculates the need for enrichment and sends a
compensating voltage to the electro-hydraulic actuator. For approx. 1 second, the current to the
actuator increases which allows more fuel to be injected into the cylinders. The greatest enrichment
takes place when the engine is cold; partial enrichment when the engine is cool and no enrichment
when the engine is above 175°F.
Page 499

Circuit Identification
Page 188
Audible Warning Device Control Module: Locations Warning Module
Behind I/ P, Below Radio
Page 163
Cruise Control Module: Locations Cruise Control Reference Resistor (Coding Plug)
Component ID R29

Component Name Cruise control reference resistor

Component Location Left of steering column, behind lower dash panel, attached to N4/2
Page 317

Fuel Pump Relay: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel Pump Does Not Operate
Page 1400
1. Depending on accessibility, select the appropriate service valves (Figure 5 and Figure 6) or
adapter hose (4, Figure 7) and install on the low- and high-pressure side of the A/C system (A,
Figure 2 and C, Figure 4).

Tightening torque: 7.5 + 0.5 N-m

CAUTION:

The threads of the service valves are treated with a chemical thread locker, which becomes
effective after 15 minutes. When installing the hose, make certain that the hose and service valve
do not come in contact with any moving parts. Removal of the service valve beyond this time span
is not possible.

Note:

The adapter hose (4, Figure 7) is designed for use in areas with difficult access to the service
valve. Additionally, depending on the application (high- or low-pressure side), the standard service
valve with respective protective cap (Figure 5) must be installed on the open end of the adapter
hose (circle, Figure 7).

CAUTION

Be careful not to mix up low-pressure (blue) and high-pressure (red) service valve caps when
installing the service valves into A/C lines.
Page 1336
2. Multi-Viscosity Engine oils (Sheet No 226.1) (Continued)
3. Single-Viscosity S3 Quality Engine Oils (Sheet No. 227.0)
Page 232

Fuse Identification
Page 979

Circuit Identification
Page 919

Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Air Flow Sensor Plate

Airflow Sensor Arrangement

The air flow sensor plate is located within the mixture control unit housing.
Page 1338

Automatic Transmission Fluid (Sheet No. 236.4, 236.6 & 236.7)

High Temperature Roller Bearing Grease (Sheet No. 265.1). (NLGI Class 2) for Front Wheel
Bearings

MB High Temperature Antifriction Bearing Grease

Part No. 000 989 49 51

Shell Retinax AX Shell Oil Company, NY, NY

Multi-purpose Greases (Sheet No. 267)

Product Name Supplier

3752 Almagard Vari-Purpose Lubrication Engineers, Inc. Fort Worth, TX.

Lubricant

Castrol MP Grease Castrol, Hackensack, NJ

Chevron Dura-Lith Grease EP2 Chevron USA, Inc. San Francisco, Ca


Mobilgrease MP Mobil Oil Corp., New York, NY

Renolit MP Fuchs oil Corporation, Somerville, NJ

Union MP Automotive Grease Union Oil Company of California, Brea CA

Valvoline Mehrzweck Fett Valvoline International, Lexington, KY

(Multipurpose Grease)

Engine Cooling System (Sheet No. 325.1)

MB Anticorrosion/Antifreeze MBNA Part no. Q1 03 0001

CAUTION!:

The use of aluminum components in M-B engines requires that the Anticorrosion/Antifreeze used
be specifically formulated to protect the aluminum parts. Failure to use MB Anticorrosion
/Antifreeze may result in a significantly shortened service life. While there may be a number of
products available which will provide the required protection, all such products have not been
tested for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The above new product is suitable for our engines and can be
mixed with the original Anticorrosion/Antifreeze filled in at the factory.
Engine - Idle Speed Too HIgh
Page 584
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Page 1345
Globe dimensions: 9" width X 11" height (230 mm X 280 mm)
Globe capacity: 8.5 quarts (8.0 liters)

Extractor hose length: 78 inches (1980 mm)

Fluid transfer hose length: 80 inches (2032 mm)

Activation time: 3 - 4 minutes

Oil suction operation capacity 47 56 quarts with one operation:

Air pressure Data:

Air requirement for activation: 100 psi

Air requirement for emptying: 7 - 14 psi

Additional Operational Information:

The technician activates the unit by simply connecting shop air for 3-4 minutes. (*TIP: when
depressurizing the unit, open the valve between globe and reservoir tank.) This creates a vacuum
in both the globe and the tank. Then close the valve after unit is fully charged. When extraction of
one vehicle is completed, open the dump valve and the vacuum in the tank will automatically
recharge the globe while the oil is being transferred into the holding tank. To empty the unit, close
the valve between the globe and the reservoir, then charge the unit with 7 - 5 psi of shop air, move
unit to bulk waste oil holding tank, place the hooked hose in the tank, open the exhaust valve and it
will automatically empty.

BDM (Oil Evacuation Equipment)


Page 1101

Component Locations
Page 555

Symbols Part 1
Page 1489

^ When completely refilling the system, ensure the quantity of oil and refrigerant is correct (refer to
WIS document BF83.00-Z-9999AZ). Take into consideration whether individual components or the
entire refrigerant circuit are to be replaced.

^ Always perform a leak test on the system after changing the refrigerant circuit but before filling it
with refrigerant.

Note:

The following allowable labor operations should be used when submitting a warranty claim for this
repair. This information has been generated on March 10, 2009. Please refer to Netstar --> Star
TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
Page 679
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 752

Symbols Part 1
California Models
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation California Models
PURPOSE

If a fault occurs in the engine management system, the diagnostic module (N59) will illuminate the
"CHECK ENGINE" light (A1e26), alerting the driver of an emission related malfunction, and the
control module will record the fault. The technician can extract the fault codes and use them to
diagnose the problem.

LOCATION

The check engine light is located in the instrument panel.

OPERATION

The "CHECK ENGINE" light is supplied with a voltage from the base module (N16/1). It is
grounded by the diagnostic module (N59). For a functional check, the light illuminates for up to 30
seconds after starting the engine. If no system malfunctions are present, the "CHECK ENGINE"
light goes out. If a malfunction is present, the "CHECK ENGINE" light stays illuminated until the
fault code memory is cleared.
Page 575
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 109
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 1181

Compression Check: Testing and Inspection

Test compression pressure at normal operating temperature. If minimum compression pressure is


below specification, test cylinder for leaks. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Testing and
Inspection

Unscrew all spark plugs for testing.

Pull off plug connection (X27) at wiring harness and plug adapter cable (01) with 1-pin coupling into
plug connection (terminal 50) of wiring harness

Crank engine with the starter. Connect the specified terminals for this step.

On vehicles with bolted terminal blocks, use the crocodile clamp with the 1-pin connector in place
of the adapter cable.

Separate the cable connector (terminal 16, arrow), switch off ignition to prevent ignition coil and
fuel pump being operated.
Page 1305

The RAASM # 43091 "Aspiroil" is designed to extract spent fluids through the dipstick opening.

^ The unit rolls on 2 rigid and 2 swivel steering casters, which are lockable.

^ A graduated transparent bowl (capacity of 8 liters) is mounted above the waste oil reservoir, to
show the quantity of waste oil extracted, as well as allow a visual inspection of the waste oil
extracted.

^ The unit has a 90 liter reservoir which holds the extracted waste oil, along with an oil level
indicator.

^ A removal tool tray for the placement of tools needed to perform the job.

^ Suction probes are provided for use to extract waste oil from other components such as the rear
axle assembly.
^ Extraction capacity after creating a vacuum in the reservoir: 55-60 liters of waste oil.

^ Extraction capacity with hot oil (70/80°C) and a probe diameter of 6 mm: 1.5 - 2.0 liters per
minute.

^ A full set of flexible/non-flexible suction probes to extract waste oil.

^ Extraction of waste oil from unit reservoir is air operated at approx. 7 psi.

Specifications:

Width: 25 inches (diameter)

Height: 51 inches

Weight: 80 lbs. (empty)

Reservoir capacity: 23.7 gallons (90 liters)


Page 151
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Component Locations

Oxygen Sensor: Component Locations

Component ID C3/2

Component Name Heated 02-sensor

Component Location Attached to catalytic converter


Page 613
Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheel Speed Sensors
Component ID L6/1

Component Name Left front wheel speed sensor

Component Location Left front steering knuckle

Component ID L6/2

Component Name Right front wheel speed sensor

Component Location Right front steering knuckle

Component ID L6/3

Component Name Left rear wheel speed sensor

Component Location Left side of rear axle center piece

Component ID L6/4

Component Name Right rear wheel speed sensor

Component Location Right side of rear axle center piece


Locations
Backup Lamp Switch: Locations
Component ID S16/2

Component Name Backup lamp switch

Component Location Left side of transmission


Page 1513

Fuse Identification
Page 1560

Any under top coat discoloration which occurs on vehicle wheel bolts (Figure 1) and light alloy disk
wheels (Figures 2 - 4) can indicate that the wheels have been cleaned with an acid-containing
product. Harsh, non-recommended products diffuse through the top coat and leave behind visible
run-like tracks on the wheel finish as well.

Any wheels returned with such damage will not be covered by warranty.

NOTE:

Use only the approved alkaline MB wheel cleaner in parts information below. Ensure that all
cleaning products and care systems are acid-free as well.

Parts Information
Page 135
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Engine - Break-In Oil New and Rebuilt

Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Break-In Oil New and Rebuilt

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS DATE: June 1990 REF. NO. 00/81

SUBJECT: BREAK-IN OIL

All new and rebuilt engines are distributed from the factory filled with break-in oil.

The rebuilt engines are tagged with a label (Figure 1) indicating this.

To prevent possible engine damage, check oil level and add break-in oil if necessary, before
starting-up these engines.
Page 1218

Fuel Filter: Description and Operation

Fuel Filter View

The fuel filter prevents impurities in the fuel from getting into the primary-pressure regulator, the
fuel distributor, and the injection valves. The fuel filter housing is made of metal. It is fitted into the
fuel circuit after the fuel pump. The filter contains a paper insert with a medium pore size of 4
micrometers, backed up by a fluff strainer which retains any loose paper particles. A support plate
holds the filter in place. Service life depends on the amount of dirt in the fuel and. The directional
arrow indicates proper installation.
Page 12
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Mirror Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 863
Oxygen Sensor: Mechanical Specifications
Oxygen Sensor torque..........................................................................................................................
.........................................................55 Nm (40 ft.lbs.)
Page 411
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Locations

Barometric Pressure Sensor: Locations

Component Locations

The altitude correction sensor is located behind the passenger floor panel.
Page 478
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Page 867

Oxygen Sensor: Connector Locations

Fig. 8 Catalytic Converter And Oxygen Sensor Locations

The oxygen sensor is installed in the exhaust system upstream of the catalytic converter.

Fig. 37 Oxygen Sensor Connection Location


The oxygen sensor connector is located on the passenger side underneath the carpet.
Notes Concerning the Air/Fuel Mixture
Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments Notes Concerning the Air/Fuel Mixture
The air/fuel mixture is controlled by the ECU and under normal conditions requires no adjustment.
However, when fuel injection system components have been replaced, or engine repairs have
been completed which may require readjusting the air/fuel mixture proceed with CHECKING THE
AIR/FUEL MIXTURE ADJUSTMENT and ADJUSTING THE AIR/FUEL MIXTURE.
Page 377
Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation
12-pin Control Unit, Driver Airbag

As of 09/87 or 01/88, the airbag restraint system has a new control unit with integral reserve power
source and voltage transformer. This means that the reserve power source and voltage transformer
previously accommodated in separate housings are no longer required.

Function:

The control unit processes the vehicle deceleration during a frontal collision and is rigidly coupled
on a support bracket with the transmission tunnel of the vehicle (as before). By means of an
integral safety switch which interrupts the ignition circuits for the driver airbag and belt tensioner
restraint system during normal driving, the airbag and belt tensioners can only be triggered by an
actual acceleration. This prevents any malfunctions.

An acceleration sensor installed in the control unit detects the deceleration acting on the vehicle in
the longitudinal direction and sends an appropriately conditioned signal to the trigger switches for
evaluation. If the fixed triggering thresholds of both trigger switches are exceeded, the output
stages are activated as is appropriate for the circumstances detected via the belt buckle switch
(buckle latch in/not in belt buckle) This results in triggering of the system (see table below). If the
power supply is interrupted during a collision, the driver airbag can still be triggered within 100 ms,
but not the two belt tensioners. The warning lamp lights up if the vehicle voltage is < 9.5 V for longer
than 10 s. The lamp goes out at a voltage > 10 V .

The housing and the electrical connections have been designed in such a way as to virtually
exclude malfunctions due to electrical interference in the vehicle electrical system caused by the
switching of electric consumer units on and off, and by electromagnetic radiation on public
highways.

Belt Buckle, Except Coupe

Belt Buckle, Coupe


Page 1492
Page 1133
Ignition Cable: Description and Operation
The ignition leads consist of a braided steel wire conductor covered with a thick high resistance
silicone insulation. They are fitted with a 1 kOhm suppression resistor at the spark plug end of the
lead. Ignition leads should always be installed using the proper retainers and routing.
Air Flow Sensor Position Indicator
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Air Flow Sensor Position Indicator
Component ID B2

Component Name Air flow sensor position indicator

Component Location part of B2/1, front of airflow sensor housing (Gasoline)

Component ID B2

Component Name Air flow sensor position indicator


Page 66
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Page 298
Fig. 1
Test Page 2
Page 1042
Windshield Washer Switch: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 597

Brake Pad Wear Sensor: Locations

Component ID S10/1

Component Name Left front brake pad wear sensor

Component Location In left front brake pad

Component ID S10/2

Component Name Right front brake pad wear sensor

Component Location In right front brake pad


Page 1583
Page 517
Tow Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Locations

Compressor Speed Sensor: Locations

Compressor RPM Sensor (L4)

The compressor RPM sensor is located at the rear of the compressor.


Page 1581
Page 88
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 1283

- Standard air coupling connector provided.

Equipment Ordering Information


AGA, Inc. 1041 Carriage Place Drive Bettendorf, IA 52722 USA Phone: 1-888-8AGAINC
(1-888-824-2462) Fax: (319) 332-4793
Page 772
Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation
The stop lamp switch, located on the brake pedal support bracket, provides a "BRAKE APPLIED"
input to the ECU. The signal from this switch resets the control routine if the driver pumps the brake
pedal during an ABS braking maneuver. This switch also controls conventional stop lamp
operation.
Page 134

Symbols Part 1
Page 376

Airbag Control Unit N2/2

1 Web

There is a web (1) on the top face of these airbag or belt tensioner control units. When the control
unit is installed in the vehicle, this web is accessible from outside (with the ashtray, radio or
right-hand tunnel panelling removed) and indicates that the previous mercury switch has been
replaced by a reed contact.

Control units with web need no longer be separately disposed of but may remain in the vehicle for
scrapping, be disposed of as industrial waste or passed on to the usual scrap disposal companies.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Seat Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 1261
BB00.40-P-0310-01A Coolant Specifications
Coolant specifications
Page 38

Circuit Identification
Locations
Seat Heater Control Module: Locations
Component ID N25/5

Component Name Front seat heater control unit

Component Location Below left front seat

Component ID N25/6

Component Name Rear seat heater control unit

Component Location Behind left side of rear seat


Specifications
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications
Resistance ...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................ 680 - 1200 Ohms
Page 1470

Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications

Refrigerant Type R-12


Front Wheel Alignment
Alignment: Service and Repair Front Wheel Alignment
Preliminary Check

Preliminary Check

On models equipped with electronic level controls, ensure proper system operation prior to
adjusting wheel alignment.

Front Camber & Caster

The front axle provides for combined camber and caster adjustment. Both wheel adjustments can
be made together. Adjustments are made by means of eccentric bolts at the lower control arm
bearing and brake support ball pin supporting joint. To adjust eccentric bolt on lower control arm
bearing, loosen hex nut, then tighten hex nut while applying counter hold to eccentric bolt. When
increasing camber on eccentric bolt, caster will also increase. When decreasing camber, caster will
also decrease. To adjust supporting joint ball pin, loosen clamp and turn ball pin in supporting tube
(ball pin is right hand threaded). Turning outward will increase caster, turning inward will decrease
caster. When increasing caster, camber will decrease, when decreasing caster, camber will
increase. On 300E & TE w/4MATIC camber cannot be adjusted using the control arm eccentric
bolts. Additional adjustment is available at the mounting of the strut to the steering knuckle.

Toe-In

Toe-In

Toe-in is the difference between the distance of the front end of the front wheels to the rear wheels
measured at the rim flanges. The elastic support of the control arms requires a higher toe-in value,
which is reduced to the correct size when driving. When measuring toe-in, spread wheels apart
using a suitable wheel spreading tool. This will eliminate any elasticity in steering linkage. Adjust
toe-in to specifications.
Page 26
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 680
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 55
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Air Flow Sensor Plate

Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Air Flow Sensor Plate

Air Flow Sensor Plate Adjustment

1. Remove the air cleaner assembly.

2. Remove the sensor plate stop bracket.

3. Heat the sensor plate mounting screw with a heat gun and remove the screw.

CAUTION:The sensor plate mounting screw is secured with a locking sealant. If it is not heated
prior to removal it make break!

4. Remove the sensor plate.

5. Clean the threads of the sensor plate screw bore with a (6 mm) tap.

6. Reinstall the sensor plate.

7. Adjust the sensor plate. Refer to ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES for centering and height
adjustment.

8. Reinstall the stop bracket and air cleaner assembly.


With ACC
Ventilation Switch: Testing and Inspection With ACC
Fresh/Recirculated Air Switch Location

1. Remove the ACC control unit. Refer to COMPONENT REPLACEMENT AND REPAIR
PROCEDURES.

2. Carefully pull out the switch.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the switch.

Fresh/Recirculated Air Switch Testing

4. Connect an ohmmeter between terminals 3 and 4.

Fresh Air/Recirculation Switch Testing

5. Depress the symbol side of the switch ("ON"). The resistance should be:

0 - 1 ohm

6. Release switch. The resistance should be:

Infinite resistance
Page 873
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Service Interval
Replace The Oxygen Sensor...............................................................................................................
............................................................60,000 miles [1] [1] One Time Service
Page 1365

Refer to the chart for the correct WIS document reference for the proper filling and bleeding
procedure of the power steering pump.
Page 1249

Brake Fluid: Specifications

Fluid Type MB Brake fluid (DOT 4)

DOT 5 silicone brake fluid will seriously damage Bosch ABS

2 hydraulic components
Diagram Information and Instructions
Antenna Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 725

Heater Core Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection

Heat Exchanger Temp. Sensor Location

1. Remove the ACC control unit. Refer to COMPONENT REPLACEMENT AND REPAIR
PROCEDURES.

2. Disconnect the heater sensor electrical connector.

3. Carefully pull the sensor out.

4. Place the sensor next to an accurate temperature gauge (thermometer) and allow enough time
for the sensor and the gauge to adjust to the ambient temperature.

5. With a suitable ohmmeter, check the resistance of the sensor.


Temp. Sensor Resistance Values

6. Compare the readings with the temperature chart.

If the resistance is not within the specified range, replace the evaporator (cooling) temperature
sensor.
Mechanical Specifications
EGR Temperature Sensor: Mechanical Specifications
EGR Temperature Sensor torque.........................................................................................................
.................................................................60-67 in. lbs
Page 816
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mixture Control Unit
Mixture Control Unit Assembly

1. Disconnect the NEG. battery terminal and insulate.

2. Remove the air cleaner assembly.

3. Remove the fuel and injection lines from the fuel distributor, fuel injectors and the fuel pressure
regulator.

4. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the electro-hydraulic actuator and the air flow sensor
position indicator.

5. Loosen the large hose clamp at the air guide housing.

6. Remove the mounting nuts for the mixture control unit.

7. Lift off the mixture control unit (detach the idle air hose).

8. Reinstall in the reverse manner.

9. Run the engine and check for fuel leaks.

Fig. 5 Air Flow Sensor Position Indicator

CAUTION:Screws of different lengths are used to fasten the air guide housing to the air flow sensor
housing. If replacing either component, make

sure that the screw below the air flow sensor position indicator is reinstalled correctly. If a longer
screw is used the air flow sensor position indicator will be damaged.
Page 463

Circuit Identification
Page 1132
Ignition Cable: Specifications
IGNITION CABLES

With Spark Plug Connectors ...............................................................................................................


................................................. 700-1300 ohms
Diagram Information and Instructions
Oil Pressure Sender: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 1264

5. Overview

Which coolant additive, what change interval for which engines?


Page 327
Fuel Pump Relay: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel Pump Does Not Run
07.3-84012 Fuel Pump Does Not Run Engines 102, 110, 1/84

116,117

Cause: Fuel pump relay defect.

Remedy: Before replacing the fuel pump relay, check current draw of fuel pump.

Nominal Values:

Engines 110, 116, 117

Model Year 1981 and earlier = approx. 11.2A Model Year 1982 and later = approx. 7.5A

Engine 102.96 = approx. 8A

If the current draw is above 15A, or 10A respectively and on engine 102.98 above 7A, the fuel
pump must be replaced.

Measuring Points:

Remove fuel pump relay and check with ammeter on fuel pump relay plug between terminal 87 and
terminal 30.

Model Year 1981 and earlier: Terminal 1 and 2.

Model Year 1982 and later: Terminal 7 and 8.


Page 1453
FLUID GREASE (NLGI Class 00)
For door lock pin and striker eye

Castrol CLS Grease Castrol, Wayne, NJ / Toronto, Canada

HIGH TEMPERATURE ROLLER BEARING GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For front wheel bearings

MB High Temperature Antifriction Bearing MB part no. 001 989 23 51 10 Grease

CHASSIS GREASE (NLGI Class 01)

For all greasing points except front wheel hubs

Shell Retinax C Shell Oil Co., Houston, TX

LONG TERM LUBRICATING GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For release bearing, release arm and splines for connecting linkage on level control valves

Molykote Longterm 2 Plus Dow Corning

MB Long Term Grease MB part no. 000 989 63 51

MULTI-PURPOSE GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For all greasing points except front wheel

3752 Almagard Vari-Purpose Lubricant Lubrication Engineers Inc., Fort Worth, TX

Castrol LM Grease Castrol, Wayne, NJ / Toronto, Canada

Exxon Multipurpose Grease Exxon Co., Houston, TX

Renolit MP Fuchs Oil Corp., Somerville, NJ

Unocal MP Automotive Grease Union Oil Company of California, Brea, CA

COMPLEX GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For sliding blocks of sliding/pop-up roof

MB Lubrication Paste MB part no. 001 989 46 51

HYDRAULIC OIL

For hydraulic system, Model 600

MB Hydraulic Oil MB part no. 100 890 O0 11

HYDRAULIC OIL

For load leveling system, hydropneumatic suspension, hydraulic soft top, 4MATIC, ASD

MB Hydraulic Oil MB part no. 000 989 91 03 10

HYDRAULIC OIL

For tandem pumps with common oil reservoir for steering and level control in Model 210.

MB Hydraulic Oil MB part no. 000 989 20 03 10


ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

MB Anti-Corrosion/Anti-freeze MB part no. Q 1 03 0002

CAUTION! The use of aluminum components in M-B engines requires that


anti-corrosion/anti-freeze specifically formulated to protect aluminum
Service and Repair
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair
Brake fluid: Use specified brake fluid only.

Important note: handle brake fluid with care. Fill brake fluid only into container from which the fluid
cannot be consumed by mistake (fatal dose 100 cc). Even slight traces of mineral oil will lead to
failure of brake system. When brake fluid is from colourless up to yellow, particular attention is
required since in such a case the risk of making a mistake is the highest. If mineral oil is found in
brake system or if the presence of mineral oil is suspected, thoroughly flush entire brake system
with brake fluid. Also renew main cylinder. Do not permit brake fluid to come into contact with paint
work of vehicle, since the fluid contains constituents, which act as solvents for the paint work.
Brake fluid is highly hygroscopic, that is, fluid will take up moisture from the air, so that the boiling
point will be reduced. For this reason, store brake fluid in well sealed storage containers only.

Note. During its service life the boiling point of the brake fluid will go down as a result of constant
absorption of moisture from the atmosphere. When the brakes are sharply applied, there is a
possibility of vapor lock in brake system. For this reason, change the brake fluid once a year, if
possible in spring. To facilitate inspections, attach a new sticker to brake unit following each
change of brake fluid, indicating year and month of next change.

Attention: The 4.piston fixed caliper, installed starting September 1985, has one vent screw each
inside and outside. For venting brake system, or for replacing brake fluid, remove front wheels so
that the outer pressure chamber can also be vented.

Bleeding 1. When using a bleeding unit, observe operating instructions of pertinent manufacturer.
To remove all air bubbles from tandem main cylinder, be

sure to step down fully on brake pedal at least 3 times while bleeding, with bleed screws of brake
pedal opened,

2. When bleeding by "pumping" the brake pedal, close the respective bleeder plug each time prior
to releasing the brake pedal, so that no air will

enter through the threads of the bleeder plug.

Note: Slowly retract brake pedal, so that enough brake fluid is drawn from expansion tank during
piston return stroke.

3. Stop bleeding when clear brake fluid, free of bubbles, emerges from bleeding hose.

Attention: Do not use the pumped-out brake fluid again, since it may contain foreign bodies, which
will then again enter the brake system.

4. Fill expansion tank with brake fluid up to "maximum" mark.

Renewing (changing) the brake fluid 5. Pump empty or draw fluid out of expansion tank down to a
fluid level of approx. 10 mm.

Attention: Do not empty expansion tank completely, so that no air can enter the brake system.
Renewing (changing) the brake fluid with bleeding unit: Permit approx. 80 cc of brake fluid to flow
out at each brake caliper, so that the lines and the pressure cylinders of the brake calipers will also
be filled with fresh brake fluid. Renewing (changing) the brake fluid without bleeding unit: Fill
expansion tank with fresh brake fluid up to "maximum" mark. Pump used brake fluid out of each
brake caliper with approx. 10 pump strokes each. Top up brake fluid,

Note: For both kinds of renewal, brake fluid should flow out through vent hose clear and free of
bubbles.
Locations
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations

Fuse and Relay Block Identification and Location

Left Rear Corner of Engine Compartment

The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.

F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)

The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 1521

Fuse Identification
Page 830
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Fig. 33 Crankshaft Position Sensor

The crankshaft position sensor registers the crankshaft position and engine speed. The position
sensor is mounted to the crankcase above the starter flange.

Fig. 26 Crankshaft Position Sensor Location

The sensor body projects through the crankcase very near to the segments on the flywheel/drive
plate. There is no contact between the segments and the position sensor.

Fig. 28 Ring Gear Position Segments

With the engine running, the four segments which are positioned 90° apart pass by the position
sensor. Due to induction, an alternating voltage is generated in the position sensor. The peak
voltage is approx. 1.5 volts at starting speed. The voltage rises with increasing speed to approx. 3
volts at 1200 rpm.
Page 336
Test Page 2
Page 314
Locations
Windshield Washer Relay: Locations

Fuse and Relay Block Identification and Location

Left Rear Corner of Engine Compartment

The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.

F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)

The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Seat Belt Warning Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 1346

The BDM oil extraction equipment is designed to extract waste oil via the oil dipstick of the engine,
BDM's MB adapter (Pat. Pending) with collet lock for 8 mm (5/16") adapter hoses.

^ The unit consists of BDM Engineering's Stainless Steel Oil Recovery Unit of five gallon capacity.

^ Several adaptor hoses are included.

^ Fluid level indicator.

^ The unit can extract 4 to 11 quarts of warm waste oil in two to five minutes.

^ All replacement parts are sold separately with the exception of the Vacuum Generator. BDM
offers a tandem unit: oil-coolant.

Accessories:
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
1. Place ignition switch in "0" position. 2. Disconnect and shield battery ground cable. 3. Disconnect
10-pin SRS electrical connector below passenger foot rest. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag
Systems/Air Bag Safety

Switch/Connector/Locations

4. Wait 10 minutes before performing any repairs. 5. Reconnect battery and electrical connector to
rearm airbag system.
Page 126

Traction Control Module: Locations ASD Control Unit

Component ID N30/2

Component Name ASD control unit

Component Location Left side of component compartment, next to K1/2


Cruise Control Inoperative After Amplifier Replacement
Page 649
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Left Door Switch (Entrance/Exit Lamp, Dome Lamp)

Dome Lamp Switch: Locations Left Door Switch (Entrance/Exit Lamp, Dome Lamp)

Component ID S17/13

Component Name Left door switch (entrance/exit lamp, dome lamp)

Component Location In left door jamb


Page 369

Symbols Part 1
Page 468
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 1360
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
FLUID SPECIFICATION ..............................................................................................................
SF/CC, SF/CD (Motor Oil, API Service SF, CC, CD)

VISCOSITY

All temperatures...................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................5W-50 Above 32°F(0°C),............................................
.............................................................................................................................................20W-40,
20W-50 Above 5°F(-15°C)...................................................................................................................
......................................................................15W-40, 15W-50 Above-4°F(-20°C)...............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...........10W-40 -4° to 50°F(-20° to 10°C)..............................................................................................
...............................................................................................10W-30 Below 14°F(-10°C)...................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.......................5W-30

Use only Mercedes-Benz approved fluids

KEY TO LUBRICATION ABBREVIATIONS

NOTE: Some manufacturer lubricant names may differ from the following list. If the manufacturer
does not recommend a specific lubricant, use the following.

AF Dexron(R)-III Automatic Transmission Fluid

AP ATF-PLUS(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid

BJ Suspension Lubricant

BL Brake Lubricant

CC Motor Oil, API Service CC

CD Motor Oil, API Service CD

CE Motor Oil, API Service CE

CF-4 Motor Oil, API Service CF-4

DC Distributor Cam Lubricant

EC Ethylene Glycol Coolant

EP Extreme Pressure Gear Oil

FA Automatic Transmission Fluid, Type F

GC

Wheel Bearing Grease, NLGI Classification GC

GF-1 Motor Oil, API Service GF-1 (Starburst)

GL-1 Gear Oil, API Service GL-1

GL-4 Gear Oil, API Service GL-4

GL-5 Gear Oil, API Service GL-5

GL-5* GL-5 Gear Oil for Limited Slip Differentials


GLS Gear Lubricant, Special

HB Hydraulic Brake Fluid, SAE J1703, DOT-3 or 4

HBH Hydraulic Brake Fluid, Extra Heavy Duty

HG High Temperature Grease

HP Hypoid Gear Oil

HP* Hypoid Gear Oil for Limited Slip or Traction-Lok Differentials

LB

Chassis Grease, NLGI Classification LB

LL Steering Linkage Lubricant

LM Lithium Multipurpose Grease

MA Mercon(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid

MH Manifold Heat Riser Solvent

MO Motor Oil, Any API Service Classification

PC Carburetor Cleaner

PS Power Steering Fluid

SF Motor Oil, API service SF

SG Motor Oil, API service SG

SH Motor Oil, API service SH

SLF Special Lubricant - Fluid

SLS Special Lubricant - Spray

WB

Wheel Bearing Grease


Page 489
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Page 868
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
Oxygen Sensor (Three-Wire Type)

Oxygen Sensor With Internal Heater

An oxygen (Lambda) sensor located in the exhaust system upstream of the catalytic converter is
used to provide more precise control of air/fuel mixtures. This system operates by measuring
oxygen content in exhaust gases, as the amount of oxygen remaining in the exhaust gas is directly
proportional to the air/fuel ratio of mixtures entering the engine. The sensor, mounted in the
exhaust stream, reacts to the oxygen remaining in the exhaust gases and produces a variable
voltage signal (0.4 - 1.0 vdc) depending upon the oxygen content.
Procedures
Air Bag Control Module: Procedures
Disposal of Mercury-Containing Control Units:

Mercury-containing components must not be disposed of with industrial waste or passed on to the
usual scrap disposal companies. These components must either be sent for recycling in
accordance with the regulations of the local and/or state law, or disposed of as special waste.

Mercury-Containing Components:

1. Belt Tensioner Control Unit Part No. 003 820 06 10

2. Airbag Control Unit Part No. 126 820 14 10, 124 820 51 10, 002 820 97 10

3. Airbag Control Unit Part No. 003 820 73 10, 003 820 74 10

Mercury-Free Control Units:


Page 1192

Belt Routing
Page 21

Symbols Part 1
Page 1158
Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection

Spark Plug Chart

1. Inspect the spark plugs for:

^ Improper gap (refer to SPECIFICATIONS)

^ Carbon deposits

^ Cracked center electrode insulator

^ Burned or worn electrodes (may be caused by):

^ Excessive mileage ^ Lean air/fuel mixture ^ Advanced ignition timing ^ Loose spark plug ^ Plug
heat range too high ^ Insufficient Cooling
Locations
Turn Signal Relay: Locations

Fuse and Relay Block Identification and Location

Left Rear Corner of Engine Compartment

The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.

F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)

The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 1256
parts be used. Failure to use MB Anti-corrosion/Anti-freeze may result in a significantly shortened
service life. While there may be a number of products available which will provide the required
protection, all such products have not been tested for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The above product
is suitable for our engines and can be mixed with the original anti-corrosion/anti-freeze filled in at
the factory.

BRAKE FLUID

MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4 Plus) MB part no. 000 989 08 07 10 (0.75 liter container) MB part no. 000
989 08 07 11 (5.0 liter container)

BRAKE PAD PASTE

MB Brake Pad Paste MB part no. 001 989 10 51

REFRIGERANT R 134a

MB refrigerant R134a MB part no. Q 4 83 0190 (30 lb. container) MB part no. Q 4 83 0191 (15 lb.
container)

COMPRESSOR OILS (R134a)

MB compressor oil for R134a ONLY MB part no. 001 989 08 03

WINDSHIELD WASHER CONCENTRATE

MB Summerwash Formula VR9422 MBNA part no. 001 986 44 71 10 (40 ml)

Suggested Mixing Ratio (1:100) of MB Summerwash Formula VR9422

Temperature MB Summerwash + Water Solvent*

Summer use 40 ml + 1.0 gallon --

(above freezing)

Winter use 40 ml + -- 1.0 gallon

(below freezing)

* Pre-mixed windshield washer solvent (commercially available blue concentrate in 1 gallon


container)

1. Gasoline Engines

Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as Ethanol,
TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided that the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10 percent. MTBE may be added up to 15 percent. The
ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional co-solvents.

Mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol must not be used. Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and
90% unleaded gasoline, can also be used. These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.

Gasoline Additives

A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline.


MERCEDES-BENZ recommends to use only quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the
build up of carbon deposits.

After an extended period of using fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can build up,
especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance
problems such as:

- warm-up hesitation,

- unstable idle,

- knocking pinging.

- misfire,

- power loss.

DO NOT blend other fuel additives with the fuel. These additional additives only result in
unnecessary cost and may be harmful to engine operation.
Page 20

Circuit Identification
Exterior Lamp Failure Monitoring Unit
Exterior Lighting Module: Locations Exterior Lamp Failure Monitoring Unit
Component ID N7

Component Name Exterior lamp failure monitoring unit

Component Location Rear of fuse/relay box, position A


Page 1586
Locations

Oil Level Sensor: Locations

Component ID S43

Component Name Oil level switch

Component Location Right side of oil pan


Page 834

NOTE: With the cylinder head removed, attach a dial gauge holder to the crankcase and position
dial gauge pin on the piston crown.

5 Turn crankshaft with the tool combination until the adjusting pin has reached its highest position.

The piston is then at TDC.


Page 1325
parts be used. Failure to use MB Anti-corrosion/Anti-freeze may result in a significantly shortened
service life. While there may be a number of products available which will provide the required
protection, all such products have not been tested for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The above product
is suitable for our engines and can be mixed with the original anti-corrosion/anti-freeze filled in at
the factory.

BRAKE FLUID

MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4 Plus) MB part no. 000 989 08 07 10 (0.75 liter container) MB part no. 000
989 08 07 11 (5.0 liter container)

BRAKE PAD PASTE

MB Brake Pad Paste MB part no. 001 989 10 51

REFRIGERANT R 134a

MB refrigerant R134a MB part no. Q 4 83 0190 (30 lb. container) MB part no. Q 4 83 0191 (15 lb.
container)

COMPRESSOR OILS (R134a)

MB compressor oil for R134a ONLY MB part no. 001 989 08 03

WINDSHIELD WASHER CONCENTRATE

MB Summerwash Formula VR9422 MBNA part no. 001 986 44 71 10 (40 ml)

Suggested Mixing Ratio (1:100) of MB Summerwash Formula VR9422

Temperature MB Summerwash + Water Solvent*

Summer use 40 ml + 1.0 gallon --

(above freezing)

Winter use 40 ml + -- 1.0 gallon

(below freezing)

* Pre-mixed windshield washer solvent (commercially available blue concentrate in 1 gallon


container)

1. Gasoline Engines

Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as Ethanol,
TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided that the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10 percent. MTBE may be added up to 15 percent. The
ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional co-solvents.

Mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol must not be used. Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and
90% unleaded gasoline, can also be used. These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.

Gasoline Additives

A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline.


MERCEDES-BENZ recommends to use only quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the
build up of carbon deposits.

After an extended period of using fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can build up,
especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance
problems such as:

- warm-up hesitation,

- unstable idle,

- knocking pinging.

- misfire,

- power loss.

DO NOT blend other fuel additives with the fuel. These additional additives only result in
unnecessary cost and may be harmful to engine operation.
Spark Plug Pliers - AST Tool # H 1849

Spark Plug: Tools and Equipment Spark Plug Pliers - AST Tool # H 1849

Spark Plug Pliers

AST tool# H 1849

Used for the R and R of spark plug connectors and specifically for those with anti-heat terminals.
These Pliers are applicable to Mercedes models 190 E and 300 E, and VW/Audi.

- Spark Plug Pliers

- Applicable to Mercedes, VW and Audi

- Steel Construction and Easy-Grip Handle

Contact AST for pricing.

Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1-800-525-2943


Page 320
Fuel Pump Relay: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Hesitates/Cuts Out/Quits/Difficult to Start
Page 454
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 392
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Page 86
Seat Heater Relay: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 465
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Page 1159
^ Fouled plug (may be caused by):
^ Rich air/fuel mixture ^ Retarded ignition timing ^ Oil in combustion chamber ^ Incorrect spark plug
gap ^ Plug heat range too low ^ Excessive idling/low speed running ^ Clogged air cleaner element
^ Deteriorated ignition coil, coil wire or ignition wires

2. Replace the plug if the center electrode is rounded.


Diagram Information and Instructions
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 699
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation
Outside Temperature Sensor

PURPOSE

The outside temperature sensor, which is located on the windshield wiper bracket, sends outside
temperature information to the push-button control unit for calculation of necessary adjustments.

CONSTRUCTION

The outside temperature sensor is a negative temperature coefficient (NTC) type resistor. As the
surrounding temperature increases the resistance decreases.

OPERATION

The outside air produces a resistance value in the sensor circuit. The resulting current flow in the
sensor circuit is recognized by the ACC control unit as a measurement of the outside air
temperature.
Page 1344

The RAASM # 43091 "Aspiroil" is designed to extract spent fluids through the dipstick opening.

^ The unit rolls on 2 rigid and 2 swivel steering casters, which are lockable.

^ A graduated transparent bowl (capacity of 8 liters) is mounted above the waste oil reservoir, to
show the quantity of waste oil extracted, as well as allow a visual inspection of the waste oil
extracted.

^ The unit has a 90 liter reservoir which holds the extracted waste oil, along with an oil level
indicator.

^ A removal tool tray for the placement of tools needed to perform the job.

^ Suction probes are provided for use to extract waste oil from other components such as the rear
axle assembly.
^ Extraction capacity after creating a vacuum in the reservoir: 55-60 liters of waste oil.

^ Extraction capacity with hot oil (70/80°C) and a probe diameter of 6 mm: 1.5 - 2.0 liters per
minute.

^ A full set of flexible/non-flexible suction probes to extract waste oil.

^ Extraction of waste oil from unit reservoir is air operated at approx. 7 psi.

Specifications:

Width: 25 inches (diameter)

Height: 51 inches

Weight: 80 lbs. (empty)

Reservoir capacity: 23.7 gallons (90 liters)


Specifications

Drive Belt: Specifications

V-belt (see image) Location Tension (New) Tension (Used)

A Coolant Pump - Power Steering Pump* 30 kgf 20 - 25 kgf

* Double V-belt.

B Alternator 35 kgf 30 - 35 kgf

C A/C Compressor 50 kgf 40 - 45 kgf


D Air Pump 30 kgf 20 - 25 kgf
Page 1113
Fuel Filter: Testing and Inspection
Refer to FUEL PRESSURE AND DELIVERY VOLUME test.
Page 316
Page 554

Circuit Identification
Page 1089

Idle Speed: Locations

Idle Speed Control Unit

Component ID: N8 Location: Front passenger footwell, behind kick panel


Page 527

Circuit Identification
Page 1183
1 Unscrew all spark plugs.
2 Crank engine several times to expel residues and soot (selector lever in position N or P).

3 Push compression pressure recorder into spark plug hole of the respective cylinder.

4 For testing, crank engine about 8 revolutions with throttle valve open.

Test all the cylinders in this way. Move test sheet into the relevant position in compression
pressure recorder before testing each cylinder.
Page 1306
Globe dimensions: 9" width X 11" height (230 mm X 280 mm)
Globe capacity: 8.5 quarts (8.0 liters)

Extractor hose length: 78 inches (1980 mm)

Fluid transfer hose length: 80 inches (2032 mm)

Activation time: 3 - 4 minutes

Oil suction operation capacity 47 56 quarts with one operation:

Air pressure Data:

Air requirement for activation: 100 psi

Air requirement for emptying: 7 - 14 psi

Additional Operational Information:

The technician activates the unit by simply connecting shop air for 3-4 minutes. (*TIP: when
depressurizing the unit, open the valve between globe and reservoir tank.) This creates a vacuum
in both the globe and the tank. Then close the valve after unit is fully charged. When extraction of
one vehicle is completed, open the dump valve and the vacuum in the tank will automatically
recharge the globe while the oil is being transferred into the holding tank. To empty the unit, close
the valve between the globe and the reservoir, then charge the unit with 7 - 5 psi of shop air, move
unit to bulk waste oil holding tank, place the hooked hose in the tank, open the exhaust valve and it
will automatically empty.

BDM (Oil Evacuation Equipment)


Page 291

On the above mentioned vehicles a 4-pole, 5-pole or 7-pole overvoltage protection relay may be
installed depending on vehicle model (Figures 1-3).

Note:

The 4-pole relay is no longer available, and when necessary, is to be replaced with the 5-pole
relay.

The overvoltage protection relay protects the control unit(s) of various electronic systems (e.g.
CIS-E, ABS, etc.).

Note:

A 9-pole relay is in use on European version vehicles equipped with 4MATIC, ASD or ASR. The
9-pole relay will be available on U.S. vehicles with the introduction of one of these systems.

On 4 and 5-pole relays battery voltage is continuously supplied via circuit 30. On the 7 and 9-pole
relays, the voltage is additionally supplied to circuit 30a via the 10A relay fuse.

In steering lock position 2, voltage is applied to circuit 15 and the relay closes the circuit. Voltage is
supplied to circuit 87 (5-pole relay) or circuits 87E and 87L (7 and 9-pole relays).

When the main power supply exceeds 22 volts, the Z-diode (zener diode) directs the voltage to
ground, causing the fuse to blow.

In case of a voltage overload occuring through the overvoltage relay, the electrical circuit is
interrupted by the 10A relay fuse.

Note:
The 9-pole relay is separately fused on circuit 87E and 87L, whereby in case of an open circuit
(blown fuse) on 87E, circuit 87L will also switch off (see Figure 4).

Testing the Z-diode in the Relay

a. 4- and 5-pole relay

Perform the test with the ABS test adapter 126 589 09 21 00 and the intermediate plug 126 589 15
63 according to test step 12.

b. 7- and 9- Relay
Page 1342
Price List
1.0 Orders can be placed via the MBUSA Standard Service Equipment Program (SSEP), by calling
1-888-458-4040

2.0 All equipment is delivered and serviced by:

AGA, Inc. 1041 Carriage Place Drive Bettendorf, IA 52722 Phone Toll-Free: 1-888-824-2462

FLACO (Oil Evacuation Equipment)

The FLACO oil extraction equipment is designed to extract waste oil via the oil dipstick of the
engine, using the special M-B adapter.

^ Suction probes are provided for use to extract waste oil from other components such as the rear
axle assembly.

^ The unit has a 15 gallon reservoir which holds the extracted waste oil, along with an oil level
indicator.

^ With a flip of the control handle, the pump is converted to pump out the used oil into a used oil
holding tank.
Page 1454
parts be used. Failure to use MB Anti-corrosion/Anti-freeze may result in a significantly shortened
service life. While there may be a number of products available which will provide the required
protection, all such products have not been tested for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The above product
is suitable for our engines and can be mixed with the original anti-corrosion/anti-freeze filled in at
the factory.

BRAKE FLUID

MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4 Plus) MB part no. 000 989 08 07 10 (0.75 liter container) MB part no. 000
989 08 07 11 (5.0 liter container)

BRAKE PAD PASTE

MB Brake Pad Paste MB part no. 001 989 10 51

REFRIGERANT R 134a

MB refrigerant R134a MB part no. Q 4 83 0190 (30 lb. container) MB part no. Q 4 83 0191 (15 lb.
container)

COMPRESSOR OILS (R134a)

MB compressor oil for R134a ONLY MB part no. 001 989 08 03

WINDSHIELD WASHER CONCENTRATE

MB Summerwash Formula VR9422 MBNA part no. 001 986 44 71 10 (40 ml)

Suggested Mixing Ratio (1:100) of MB Summerwash Formula VR9422

Temperature MB Summerwash + Water Solvent*

Summer use 40 ml + 1.0 gallon --

(above freezing)

Winter use 40 ml + -- 1.0 gallon

(below freezing)

* Pre-mixed windshield washer solvent (commercially available blue concentrate in 1 gallon


container)

1. Gasoline Engines

Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as Ethanol,
TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided that the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10 percent. MTBE may be added up to 15 percent. The
ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional co-solvents.

Mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol must not be used. Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and
90% unleaded gasoline, can also be used. These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.

Gasoline Additives

A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline.


MERCEDES-BENZ recommends to use only quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the
build up of carbon deposits.

After an extended period of using fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can build up,
especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance
problems such as:

- warm-up hesitation,

- unstable idle,

- knocking pinging.

- misfire,

- power loss.

DO NOT blend other fuel additives with the fuel. These additional additives only result in
unnecessary cost and may be harmful to engine operation.
Page 355

Ignition Control Module: Locations Reference Resistor (EZL)

Component ID R16/1

Component Name Reference resistor (EZL)

Component Location Left side of component compartment, next to fuse/relay box


Page 1367

- Standard air coupling connector provided.

Equipment Ordering Information


AGA, Inc. 1041 Carriage Place Drive Bettendorf, IA 52722 USA Phone: 1-888-8AGAINC
(1-888-824-2462) Fax: (319) 332-4793
Page 1029
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 1431
Page 556
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Locations
Trunk Lamp Switch: Locations
Component ID S17/8

Component Name Trunk lamp switch

Component Location Left underside of trunk lid


A/C Input

Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation A/C Input

Hall Sensor Location

PURPOSE

The Hall sensor provides vehicle speed information to the ACC control unit.

LOCATION

The Hall sensor is located behind the speedometer.

OPERATION

With all functions of the blower switch, except when the system has switched to 100% recirculated
air, the control voltages are influenced by the driving speed of the vehicle by the Hall sensor. Up to
a speed of 124 mph (200km/h), the voltage is continuously reduced (0.6 volt maximum reduction).
Page 503
Radio Switch: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
A/C - Updated Leak Detector for R12 and R134a
Refrigerant: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Updated Leak Detector for R12 and R134a
REF.NO.: MBNA 58/60, 83/4

DATE: February 1993

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

SUBJECT: BEAR ELECTRONIC REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTOR FOR R12 AND R134a

Via the Mercedes-Benz Standard Equipment Program, Bear Automotive has sold an electronic
refrigerant leak detector which is applicable for use with both R12 and R134a automotive
refrigerant. These units were sold under model number HI-134a, and were sold together with
extension probe model HI-135.

Some early-version units (identified by a yellow colored case) of this model may have displayed
either a lack of sensitivity or what were interpreted as false signals. These conditions were due to
the extreme sensitivity of this unit to proper adjustment by the operator. Consequently, the
manufacturer has redesigned the unit to eliminate this over-sensitivity to adjustment, thereby
enhancing its effectiveness/accuracy. This redesigned unit can be identified by its black colored
case.

Presently, the manufacturer is making a one-time offer to exchange the earlier version units (yellow
colored case) for the later version units (black colored case) at no charge to any Mercedes-Benz
dealer.

NOTE:

This offer is only valid through April 1, 1993.

The extension probe, model HI-135, should he included with the returned leak detector. It will be
tested and returned together with the new version leak detector.

The subject leak detector should be sent prepaid/insured to:

Hitech Instruments 40 McLean Road Brevard, NC 28712-9989

Attn: Customer Service Department

Mercedes-Benz Desk

Please allow three weeks for delivery.


Page 477
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Page 412
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 711

15 Install in-car temperature sensor (1) through opening of interior lamp and slip-on vent hose.

16 Plug-on 2-pole coupler on sensor.

17 Clip cover on in-car temperature sensor.

18 Install interior lamp front in roof frame.

19 Check automatic heater for function.


Page 518
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 1409
parts be used. Failure to use MB Anti-corrosion/Anti-freeze may result in a significantly shortened
service life. While there may be a number of products available which will provide the required
protection, all such products have not been tested for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The above product
is suitable for our engines and can be mixed with the original anti-corrosion/anti-freeze filled in at
the factory.

BRAKE FLUID

MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4 Plus) MB part no. 000 989 08 07 10 (0.75 liter container) MB part no. 000
989 08 07 11 (5.0 liter container)

BRAKE PAD PASTE

MB Brake Pad Paste MB part no. 001 989 10 51

REFRIGERANT R 134a

MB refrigerant R134a MB part no. Q 4 83 0190 (30 lb. container) MB part no. Q 4 83 0191 (15 lb.
container)

COMPRESSOR OILS (R134a)

MB compressor oil for R134a ONLY MB part no. 001 989 08 03

WINDSHIELD WASHER CONCENTRATE

MB Summerwash Formula VR9422 MBNA part no. 001 986 44 71 10 (40 ml)

Suggested Mixing Ratio (1:100) of MB Summerwash Formula VR9422

Temperature MB Summerwash + Water Solvent*

Summer use 40 ml + 1.0 gallon --

(above freezing)

Winter use 40 ml + -- 1.0 gallon

(below freezing)

* Pre-mixed windshield washer solvent (commercially available blue concentrate in 1 gallon


container)

1. Gasoline Engines

Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as Ethanol,
TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided that the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10 percent. MTBE may be added up to 15 percent. The
ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional co-solvents.

Mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol must not be used. Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and
90% unleaded gasoline, can also be used. These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.

Gasoline Additives

A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline.


MERCEDES-BENZ recommends to use only quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the
build up of carbon deposits.

After an extended period of using fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can build up,
especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance
problems such as:

- warm-up hesitation,

- unstable idle,

- knocking pinging.

- misfire,

- power loss.

DO NOT blend other fuel additives with the fuel. These additional additives only result in
unnecessary cost and may be harmful to engine operation.
Brakes - General System Precautions
Brake Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - General System Precautions
TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: October 1990

SUBJECT: BRAKE SYSTEM GENERAL PRECAUTIONS A.

CLEANING AND FLUSHING

B. DUST SHIELDS

REF. NO. MBNA 42/7 A.

Cleaning and Flushing It has come to our attention that in numerous instances the cleaning and
flushing of hydraulic brake systems are not handled correctly. Many products are on the market
which were neither tested nor approved by us. Use of these products could lead to damage of the
brake system.

As published in our S.I. 42/89, January 1985, you should use only Mercedes-Benz approved brake
fluid for cleaning or flushing the reservoir, hydraulic lines and brake cylinders.

When working on the brake system, use only the following approved products:

^ Original Mercedes-Benz brake fluid (part no. 000 989 08 07 10) for topping up and annual
replacement (see SMS repair instructions 42-010 and product label, regarding handling of brake
fluid).

^ Mercedes-Benz brake pad paste (part no. 001 989 10 51) for coating the edges of the brake pad
backing plate.

To ensure safe operation and to prevent corrosion, we request that you use only these
factory-approved products (see also M-B Specifications for Service Products, pages 331.0 and
332).

Note: Cleaning of brake system components with alcohol as suggested in S.I. MBNA 42/2,
November 1983, is no longer valid as indicated in S.I. 42/89.

B. Dust Shields The automotive aftermarket is offering disc brake dust shields designed to prevent
deposits of brake dust on the light alloy wheels. This is to advise you that the information published
in our S.I. 42/69, April 1981, is still valid. MBNA disapproves the use of such shields for the
following reasons:

The shields are installed between brake disc and wheel and may affect the ventilation of the brake
discs. The resulting buildup of heat in the brake disc and caliper could lead to the formation of
vapor in the brake fluid. Since vapor is a gas and thus compressible, this may lead to reduced
brake efficiency and possible brake failure. In addition, some of the installation instructions for the
shields contain, in part, recommendations to rework brake calipers by removing material from them
if it is found that dust shields scrape against calipers. For safety reasons, such reworking of brake
calipers should never be attempted.

Dust shields can also cause brake squeal.


Diagram Information and Instructions
Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 1512

Fuse & Relay Box Layout / Relay Identification


Description and Operation

Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation

EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR:

Evaporator Temperature Sensor (B10/6)

The air conditioner temperature sensor is located in the air stream after the evaporator. Its
resistance is relative to the temperature at the evaporator, and the sensor sends this value to the
control unit This temperature sensor causes the compressor to switch off and on more frequently
during cooling operation. In this way, the outlet temperature at the nozzles displays only slight
variation. It also prevents the evaporator icing up.
Page 1509

Fuse & Relay Box Layout / Relay Identification


Page 110
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 44
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 500

Symbols Part 1
Page 315
Locations

Firing Order and Cylinder Numbering


Electronic Ignition Control Unit (EZL)

Engine Control Module: Locations Electronic Ignition Control Unit (EZL)

Component ID N1/2

Component Name Electronic ignition control unit (EZL)

Component Location Left side of engine compartment


Diagram Information and Instructions
Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 488

Symbols Part 1
A/C - No Or Low A/C Cooling Performance
Refrigerant: Customer Interest A/C - No Or Low A/C Cooling Performance
Date: March 10, 2009

Order No.: S-B-83.55/118

Supersedes:

Group: 83.55

SUBJECT: All Passenger and Light Truck Models

Defective Refrigeration Circuit / Refrigerant Compressor

If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles related to "no or low AC cooling
performance", it may be due to a locked refrigerant compressor, a broken torque limiter on the
refrigerant compressor, the refrigeration circuit blocked or an electrical defect in the refrigerant
compressor. To remedy any of these issues please proceed with the following.

Note:

This document is intended as a supplement to the SDS function test "Refrigerant circuit test". Only
perform repair and replacement work on the refrigerant circuit if the SDS refrigerant circuit test was
unsuccessful and you have received appropriate instructions in the SDS function test.

Prerequisites:

1. Before parts can be replaced, the exact quantity of the refrigerant in the refrigeration circuit must
be determined by evacuating the system. When returning parts be sure to indicate the exact
amount of refrigerant in the circuit and any other findings by the technician. If the filling capacity is
not indicated, warranty claims may be rejected.

2. If the fill level of the refrigerant circuit is too low, parts should only be replaced if the torque
limiter is broken.

3. If the fill level of the refrigerant circuit is too low and the torque limiter is damaged, the leak test
(Test 6 "Leak in refrigeration circuit") must be performed using the "Technology Guide Vehicle
Climate Control" located in SDS SDMedia first and then the system must be refilled and checked. If
the amount of refrigerant in the circuit is less than 80% of the normal level, it is too low. Inadequate
fill levels may be the cause of the air conditioning shutting down or malfunctioning.

Remedy A - Broken Torque Limiter:

1. Ensure the alternator freewheel (when applicable) is not damaged and that the belt pulley of the
refrigerant compressor rotates in the belt drive.

2. If the alternator freewheel is blocked, replace the alternator freewheel. For refrigerant
compressors with a replaceable belt pulley, replace the belt pulley only, otherwise replace the
refrigerant compressor. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.

3. If the alternator freewheel is not blocked and black refrigerant/oil is evacuated from the system,
replace the AC compressor. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.

Remedy B - Blockage in the Refrigeration Circuit

1. Identify through SDS function test "Refrigeration circuit test" that the refrigerant circuit has not
been underfilled or overfilled.

2. Inspect along the AC lines to check for blockage at the points with marked temperature
differences.
3. Identify and replace the blocked components in the refrigeration circuit. Refer to EPCNet for
applicable part number.

Remedy C - Electrical Defect in Refrigerant Compressor

1. Identify through SDS function test "Refrigeration circuit test" that the refrigerant circuit has not
been underfilled or overfilled.

2. After ruling out a short circuit in the actuation and ground wiring, replace the refrigerant
compressor only. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.

Note:

^ Always empty the oil from the new refrigerant compressor before installing.
Locations
Neutral Safety Switch: Locations
LH Side Of Transmission
Page 304

Fuse & Relay Box Layout / Relay Identification


Page 891
Vehicle Speed Sensor
Page 1219
Fuel Filter: Testing and Inspection
Refer to FUEL PRESSURE AND DELIVERY VOLUME test.
Page 466
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Page 955
9 Loosen adjusting slide (arrow) and slide until the pin engages in the locating tool.
10 Tighten adjusting slide (arrow) and remove locating fixture.

11 Insert TDC transmitter and secure (arrow).

12 Remove dial gauge.


Maintenance - Factory Approved Service Products

Technical Service Bulletin # 00_053 Date: 931001

Maintenance - Factory Approved Service Products

NOTE: Technical Service Bulletin 00_053, dated 10/93 was superseded by the Factory Approved
Service Products Sheet (OE Part Number S-0473-98L) dated 12/98. The information contained
within this bulletin (00_053) reflects the changes made by the 12/98 Factory Approved Service
Products Sheet.

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: October 1993 (supersedes 5.1. MBNA 00/47. Oct. 1992)

REF. NO. MBNA 00/53

Revision: Approved automatic transmission fluids, and R134a part numbers.

General Information

SUBJECT: FACTORY APPROVED SERVICE PRODUCTS

Attached is a current listing (as of Jan. 2000) of factory-approved service products which are
presently available in the U.S.A or Canada. It will be revised periodically to add or delete products
according to the latest information received from the factory.

We recommend that only approved service products be used in Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

Engine Oil

APPROVED ENGINE OILS

IMPORTANT:

Engine oils are labeled on the container with various ACEA (Association des Constructeurs
Europeens d'Automobiles) and/or API (American Petroleum Institute) designations of quality.
Mercedes Benz recommends the use of engine oils which meet ACEA or API classifications. If an
ACEA quality engine oil is not available, then an API quality engine oil should be used. Only engine
oils (including synthetic and/or recycled engine oil) with any of the following classification grade, or
combinations thereof, are approved:
Engine ACEA classification API classification

Gasoline A2 SH

A3 SJ

Diesel B2 CF-4

B3 CG-4

Always refer to the viscosity grade charts in the Owner's Manual or below for the proper viscosity
grade based on ambient temperature.

Note: The chart (see image) supersedes ALL previously published viscosity charts.

Select oil viscocity according to the lowest air temperature expected before the next oil change
using the chart below (image).

Viscosity Grades For Motor Oils

For additional information, please refer to the vehicle Owner's Manual.

Other Lubricants and Fluids

HYPOID GEAR OIL


Locations

Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations

Component ID B5

Component Name Oil pressure sensor

Component Location At base of oil filter housing


Page 1445
1. Depending on accessibility, select the appropriate service valves (Figure 5 and Figure 6) or
adapter hose (4, Figure 7) and install on the low- and high-pressure side of the A/C system (A,
Figure 2 and C, Figure 4).

Tightening torque: 7.5 + 0.5 N-m

CAUTION:

The threads of the service valves are treated with a chemical thread locker, which becomes
effective after 15 minutes. When installing the hose, make certain that the hose and service valve
do not come in contact with any moving parts. Removal of the service valve beyond this time span
is not possible.

Note:

The adapter hose (4, Figure 7) is designed for use in areas with difficult access to the service
valve. Additionally, depending on the application (high- or low-pressure side), the standard service
valve with respective protective cap (Figure 5) must be installed on the open end of the adapter
hose (circle, Figure 7).

CAUTION

Be careful not to mix up low-pressure (blue) and high-pressure (red) service valve caps when
installing the service valves into A/C lines.
Page 572
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Page 897
EGR Temperature Sensor: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
Oxygen Sensor Operating Temperature
...................................................................................................................................... 660 - 1560°F
(350 - 850°C)

EGR Temperature Sensor Fault Signal [1]...........................................................................................


.............................................................248°F (120°C)

. [1] At normal operating temperatures, the CIS-E control unit will

recognize an EGR temperature < 248°F as a fault.


Page 677
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Locations
Door Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations
Component ID S62/1

Component Name front door switch (ATA) (left)

Component Location In left front door handle

Component ID S62/2

Component Name

front door switch (ATA) (right)

Component Location In right front door handle


Throttle Valve Switch Function Test
Throttle Position Switch: Testing and Inspection Throttle Valve Switch Function Test

Special Tools

Test Page 1
Page 258

Symbols Part 1
Page 1193
Page 76
Seat Heater Relay: Locations LH Front Seat Heater Relay
Below LH Front Seat, On Air Duct
Page 550
Power Seat Switch: Locations Rear Bench Seat Adjustment Switch
Component ID S53

Component Name Rear bench seat adjustment switch (left door)

Component Location In left rear door panel

Component ID

S54

Component Name Rear bench seat adjustment switch (right door)

Component Location In right rear door pane


Page 324
Page 368

Circuit Identification
Service Procedure
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Service Procedure
Fig. 37 Oxygen Sensor Connection Location

Fig. 8 Catalytic Converter And Oxygen Sensor Locations

Fig. 7 Catalytic Converter And Oxygen Sensor Locations

NOTE: Do not attempt to remove the oxygen sensor without allowing adequate time for cooling.
Times may vary due to outside air temperature and engine operating conditions. Be sure to use
approved eye protection.

Removal

1. Disconnect the oxygen sensor wiring harness connectors which are located under the carpet on
the right side of the tunnel.

NOTE: Observe the oxygen sensor harness routing and be sure to reinstall it in the same manner.

2. Turn the oxygen sensor counterclockwise to remove it from the exhaust system.

Installation

1. Clean the exhaust system threads for the oxygen sensor.

2. Apply an appropriate Anti-Seize paste to the oxygen sensor threads. Do not let the Anti-Seize
paste enter the slots of the oxygen sensor, it will render the Oxygen Sensor ineffective.
Page 24
Antenna Relay: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 396
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 1100
Fig. 1
Component Locations
Page 618
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Page 996
3 On 1st version with steel joints (standard up to March 1971) remove respective locking clip (7b)
and pull off ball pin. Provide ball sockets with grease. Replace damaged sealing washers (7c) or
worn-out ball joints.

Attention! Do not pull ball pin of plastic-mounted ball joints out of ball socket.

Installation

4 Attach connecting rod lever to lever of level controller and to lever of torsion bar. Make sure that
lever (6) of torsion bar is in alignment with connecting rod.
Page 1040
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Ignition - Caution about Spark Plug Wrenches

Spark Plug: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition - Caution about Spark Plug Wrenches

REF.NO.: 15/51a, 58/53

DATE: June 1992

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS


SUBJECT: ALL MODELS

CHECKING 5/8 IN. (15.8 MM) SPARK PLUG WRENCH SPECIAL TOOL NO. 102 589 02 09 00

Use only spark plug wrench 102 589 02 09 00 with the chamfered-lip retainer magnet (arrow) for
removing or installing spark plugs.

The magnet on wrenches delivered before 5/88 do not have a chamfer. Using this wrench can
cause damage at the ceramic insulator of the spark plugs. We recommend complete replacement
of this spark plug wrench.

Note:

Spark plug wrench part no. 120 589 02 09 00 cannot be used on engines 102 and 103.

There is a 1/2 in drive socket on the top of the spark plug wrench for attaching a torque wrench
when torqueing the spark plugs (20 - 30 N-m).
Page 510
Tow Sensor: Locations
Component ID N27

Component Name Anti-towing sensor

Component Location Left front corner of trunk (up to chassis end number A73146)
Page 1114

Fuel Filter: Service and Repair

REPLACING FUEL FILTER

- Remove protective cover by removing mounting bolts (arrows).

- Disconnect fuel line and fuel hose.

- Loosen mounting screws (arrow) pivot holder down and remove filter.

- Install new fuel filter and plastic sleeve in flow direction.


- Sleeve should project on both sides of the holder since contact corrosion may occur if there is
direct contact with the holder.

- Replace plastic sleeve, if necessary.

- Reinstall protective cover.


Page 335

Fig. 1
Fig. 2

Fig. 3
Service and Repair

Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair

Removal and Installation of Lock Cylinder

1. Turn lock cylinder (5) to position "1". Press release wire (040) into hole (5a) to stop until retaining
catch is released.

2. Screw cover (2) off with sleeve (041) 126 589 07 14 00, screw on, remove from steering wheel
lock together with lock cylinder (5). Pull release

wire (040) out of lock cylinder (5) and turn ignition key to position "0", remove. When installing
position steering wheel lock (1) so that high spot on lock cylinder (5) engages in groove (1a) in
steering wheel lock (1).

3. Remove lock cylinder (5), when installing insert into cover (2) so that safety catch (6) engages in
groove in cover (2). Insert ignition key and turn

to position "1", push release wire (040) into hole (5a) and release retaining catch.

4. Check lock cylinder (5) for proper function.


Page 1248
Damages or malfunctions resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives
are not covered by the MERCEDES-BENZ Limited Warranty.
For model year 1986, all gasoline models except 190 E 2.3 require premium unleaded gasoline. As
of model year 1987, all gasoline engines require premium unleaded gasoline

Use only premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 91 min. In the U.S., this octane number is an average of the Research
octane number (R) and the Motor octane number (M): (R + M) / 2. The octane number is also
known as the Anti-Knock Index.

CAUTION! To maintain the engine's durability and performance, only premium unleaded gasoline
is to be used. If premium unleaded is not available and low octane gasoline is used, follow these
precautions:

- Partially fill the fuel tank with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with premium unleaded
gasoline as soon as possible.

- Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration. Do not exceed an engine speed of 2000 rpm if
the vehicle has a light load (two occupants and no luggage for example). Do not exceed 2/3 of
maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous
terrain.

Model years 1975 - 1985 and model year 1986 model 190 E 2.3

Use unleaded regular gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 87 min.

Model years 1972 - 1974

Use leaded or unleaded~gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 87 min. When only unleaded gasoline is being used, check the valve
clearance on engines with mechanically adjustable valves at half the recommended interval.

Pre-model year 1972

Use premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 91 min. Check the valve clearance at half the recommended interval.

2. Diesel Engines

Use only commercially available vehicular diesel fuel number 2 or number 1 (ASTM D975 Number
2-D or Number 1-D).

For information on cold weather operation, refer to the vehicle Owner's Manual or Service
Information MBNA 00/7 (11-82).
Page 1082
1. Return spring fastened incorrectly to linkage. 2. Idle contact of throttle valve switch (S29/2) not
switched.
Remedy: 1. Fasten return spring correctly to linkage. 2. Check idle contact at throttle valve switch.

B. Engines 116, 117 as of MY. '86

Cause: Idle contact of throttle valve switch (S29/2) not switched.

Remedy: Check idle contact at throttle valve switch, replace throttle valve switch (S29/2) or
complete throttle valve assembly if necessary.

Damage Code: 07311 73


Diagram Information and Instructions
Voltage Protection Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 1038

Circuit Identification
Page 646

Symbols Part 1
Page 1314

- Standard air coupling connector provided.

Equipment Ordering Information


AGA, Inc. 1041 Carriage Place Drive Bettendorf, IA 52722 USA Phone: 1-888-8AGAINC
(1-888-824-2462) Fax: (319) 332-4793
Page 1026
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Service and Repair

Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair

Removal and Installation of Lock Cylinder

1. Turn lock cylinder (5) to position "1". Press release wire (040) into hole (5a) to stop until retaining
catch is released.

2. Screw cover (2) off with sleeve (041) 126 589 07 14 00, screw on, remove from steering wheel
lock together with lock cylinder (5). Pull release

wire (040) out of lock cylinder (5) and turn ignition key to position "0", remove. When installing
position steering wheel lock (1) so that high spot on lock cylinder (5) engages in groove (1a) in
steering wheel lock (1).

3. Remove lock cylinder (5), when installing insert into cover (2) so that safety catch (6) engages in
groove in cover (2). Insert ignition key and turn

to position "1", push release wire (040) into hole (5a) and release retaining catch.

4. Check lock cylinder (5) for proper function.


Page 1482
Page 1289
parts be used. Failure to use MB Anti-corrosion/Anti-freeze may result in a significantly shortened
service life. While there may be a number of products available which will provide the required
protection, all such products have not been tested for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The above product
is suitable for our engines and can be mixed with the original anti-corrosion/anti-freeze filled in at
the factory.

BRAKE FLUID

MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4 Plus) MB part no. 000 989 08 07 10 (0.75 liter container) MB part no. 000
989 08 07 11 (5.0 liter container)

BRAKE PAD PASTE

MB Brake Pad Paste MB part no. 001 989 10 51

REFRIGERANT R 134a

MB refrigerant R134a MB part no. Q 4 83 0190 (30 lb. container) MB part no. Q 4 83 0191 (15 lb.
container)

COMPRESSOR OILS (R134a)

MB compressor oil for R134a ONLY MB part no. 001 989 08 03

WINDSHIELD WASHER CONCENTRATE

MB Summerwash Formula VR9422 MBNA part no. 001 986 44 71 10 (40 ml)

Suggested Mixing Ratio (1:100) of MB Summerwash Formula VR9422

Temperature MB Summerwash + Water Solvent*

Summer use 40 ml + 1.0 gallon --

(above freezing)

Winter use 40 ml + -- 1.0 gallon

(below freezing)

* Pre-mixed windshield washer solvent (commercially available blue concentrate in 1 gallon


container)

1. Gasoline Engines

Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as Ethanol,
TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided that the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10 percent. MTBE may be added up to 15 percent. The
ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional co-solvents.

Mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol must not be used. Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and
90% unleaded gasoline, can also be used. These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.

Gasoline Additives

A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline.


MERCEDES-BENZ recommends to use only quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the
build up of carbon deposits.

After an extended period of using fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can build up,
especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance
problems such as:

- warm-up hesitation,

- unstable idle,

- knocking pinging.

- misfire,

- power loss.

DO NOT blend other fuel additives with the fuel. These additional additives only result in
unnecessary cost and may be harmful to engine operation.
Page 225

Fuse & Relay Box Layout / Relay Identification


Page 924

Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Mixture Control Unit

Mixture Control Unit

The mixture control unit consists of the air-flow sensor, CIS-E fuel distributor and the air guide
housing. Incoming air deflects the plate of the air-flow sensor which actuates the plunger within the
CIS-E fuel distributor. The position of the plunger determines the quantity of fuel required. The air
guide housing directs the measured air through the throttle valve housing and to the intake system.
Page 832

Crankshaft Position Sensor: Adjustments

Checking and Correcting Setting of TDC Sensor:

NOTE: With the crankshaft at 20 ° after TDC, the TDC transmitter must be positioned exactly
above the pin in the vibration damper (arrow).

The adjustment of the TDC transmitter must be checked and corrected

a) when renewing the TDC transmitter adjusting slide b) when renewing the crankshaft with hub
and vibration damper c) when renewing the timing case cover d) when completing partly
assembled engines.

Checking

1 Loosen power steering pump, remove V-belt, swing power steering pump to the inside.

2 On vehicles with air conditioning or automatic climate control, remove refrigerant compressor with
carrier.
Page 1340

Use only premium, leaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number (posted at
the pump) must be at least 91 min. It is an average of both the research (R) octane number and the
Motor (M) octane number: (R+M)/2. This is also known as, the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.

CAUTION!:

To maintain the engine's durability and performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If
premium unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used, follow these precautions:

^ Have the fuel tank filled only partially with unleaded regular and fill up with premium unleaded as
soon as possible.

^ Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration.

^ Do not exceed an engine speed of 2,000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a light load, such as two
persons and no luggage.

^ Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded, towing a
trailer or operating in mountainous terrain.

Model years 1975-1985 and M.Y. 1986 model 190E 2.3

Use regular unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number (posted at the
pump) must be at least 87 min (premium unleaded may also be used).

Model years 1972-1974

Use leaded or unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number (posted at
the pump) must be at least 87 min. When only unleaded gasoline is being used, check valve
clearance at half the recommended interval.

Pre-model year 1972

Use premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number (posted at the
pump) must be at least 91 min. Check valve clearance at half the recommended interval.

2. Diesel Engines
Use only commercially available vehicular diesel fuels No. 2 or No. 1 (ASTM D975 No. 2-D or No.
1-D).

For information on cold weather operation, refer to the respective Owner's Manual or Service
Information MBNA 00/07, November 1982.

3. Approved Additives - For Diesel Fuel

CAUTION!:

If non-approved fuel additives are used in vehicles with a Trap Oxidizer, the Trap Oxidizer could be
damaged, resulting in severe engine power loss and expensive repairs not covered under the new
vehicle warranty.
Page 105

Symbols Part 1
Page 1054
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Specifications
Hose/Line HVAC: Specifications
REFRIGERANT SYSTEM

R 12 .....................................................................................................................................................
..................................................... 2.90 lbs. (1.3kg)

COMPRESSOR

Oil Capacity .........................................................................................................................................


.................................................................... 120 cc Loss Of Oil Due To Sudden Discharge Add
..............................................................................................................................................................
40 cc

CONDENSER

Oil Capacity during component replacement


.............................................................................................................................................................
20 cc

EVAPORATOR

Oil Capacity during component replacement


.............................................................................................................................................................
40 cc

RECEIVER DRIER

Oil Capacity during component replacement


.............................................................................................................................................................
10 cc

HIGH PRESSURE LINE

Oil Capacity during component replacement


.............................................................................................................................................................
10 cc

LOW PRESSURE LINE

Oil Capacity during component replacement


.............................................................................................................................................................
10 cc
Page 445

Fuse & Relay Box Layout / Relay Identification


Page 1573
Page 1225
Oil Filter: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Filter Precaution For O-Ring/Gasket
TO: OUR MERCEDES BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: June 1990

SUBJECT: OIL FILTER O-RING SEAL/GASKET ALL ENGINES

REF. NO. MBNA 18/10 To prevent oil loss related engine damage, caused by blow-out of the oil
filter O-ring/gasket, make certain that the O-ring/gasket is properly seated.

When replacing a spin-on oil filter on M102 and M103 engines, ensure that the old filter gasket is
completely removed from the base before installing the new filter, and that the gasket on the new
filter is properly and securely seated in the groove of the filter and a film of oil is applied to the
gasket.

On all other engines which utilize a housing and cover, make certain that the old O-ring gasket is
removed from the filter housing or cover before installing a new one. Also ensure that the new
gasket is properly seated and pressed into the groove in the filter housing/cover. Failure to do so in
either case may result in a blow-out of the filter gasket and subsequent loss of engine oil, which will
lead to engine damage.

Engine damage caused by blow-out of tbe oil filter O-ring/gasket attributable to improper
installation, is not covered under warranty.
Page 364
When disconnection the 10-pole plug connection (X29/9), pins 3, 5, 6, 7, 8 are short-circuited on
the lower half of the plug.
When disconnecting the connection for the ETR squibs (R12/1, R12/2) and the airbag squib
(R12/3), they are short-circuited.
Page 715

Compressor Speed Sensor: Description and Operation

Compressor RPM Sensor (L4)

PURPOSE

The RPM sensor which is located at the rear of the refrigerant compressor, measures the speed of
the compressor.

CONSTRUCTION

The RPM sensor consists of a magnetic core and a coil.

OPERATION

When the A/C system is engaged, compressor rotation causes an alternating voltage to be induced
in the coils of the RPM sensor. The frequency produced by the alternating voltage informs the
compressor cut-out control unit of the compressor speed. If the compressor speed differs more
than 30% from that of engine speed, the compressor cut-out control unit considers the compressor
to be jammed (overcharged or internally damaged parts) and current to the electro-magnetic clutch
will be disengaged to protect the common engine drive belt and accessories.
Page 178
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Page 136
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Page 399

the reserve power source and voltage transformer previously accommodated in separate housings
are no longer required.

Function:
The control unit processes the vehicle deceleration during a frontal collision and is rigidly coupled
on a support bracket with the transmission tunnel of the vehicle (as before). By means of an
integral safety switch which interrupts the ignition circuits for the driver airbag and belt tensioner
restraint system during normal driving, the airbag and belt tensioners can only be triggered by an
actual acceleration. This prevents any malfunctions.

An acceleration sensor installed in the control unit detects the deceleration acting on the vehicle in
the longitudinal direction and sends an appropriately conditioned signal to the trigger switches for
evaluation. If the fixed triggering thresholds of both trigger switches are exceeded, the output
stages are activated as is appropriate for the circumstances detected via the belt buckle switch
(buckle latch in/not in belt buckle) This results in triggering of the system (see table below). If the
power supply is interrupted during a collision, the driver airbag can still be triggered within 100 ms,
but not the two belt tensioners. The warning lamp lights up if the vehicle voltage is < 9.5 V for longer
than 10 s. The lamp goes out at a voltage > 10 V .

The housing and the electrical connections have been designed in such a way as to virtually
exclude malfunctions due to electrical interference in the vehicle electrical system caused by the
switching of electric consumer units on and off, and by electromagnetic radiation on public
highways.

Belt Buckle, Except Coupe

Belt Buckle, Coupe

In order to detect whether the buckle latches are inserted in the belt buckles or not, new belt
buckles with separate switches and resistors were necessary. This results in the triggering logic
listed below.

Release Logic, Driver's Airbag and Belt Tensioner

Explanation:
Specifications

Alignment: Specifications

With Steel Suspension

Vehicle Alignment

Vehicle Level
Front Axle

+31 mm (-15 / +10)

Rear Axle

with Level Control +37 ± 10 mm

NOTE: -

Use measuring device (01) 201 589 00 21 00 for front axle.

- Use measuring device (02) 201 589 01 21 00 for rear axle.

Front Toe-in 0°25'±10'

Front Camber 0°00' ±20'

Front Caster 10°15'±30'

Rear Toe-in 0°25' (-15' / +10')

Rear Camber [not adjustable]

(at vehicle level) +60 mm 1°15'±30'

+50 mm 0°45'±30'

+40 mm 0°15'±30'

+30 mm -0°15'±30'

+20 mm -0°45'±30'

+10 mm -1°15'±30'

0 mm -1°45'±30'
Page 925

Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Adjustments

Airflow Sensor Arrangement

1. Activate the fuel pumps for 5 seconds in order to zero the sensor plate position.
2. Slip a (0.002in.) feeler gauge between the sensor plate and the cylindrical part of the air funnel.

^ The feeler gauge should be able to be slipped freely around the sensor plate. Recenter the plate
if necessary.

^ The air-flow sensor plate should not bind even under slight, lateral pressure.

3. Push down on the sensor plate slightly.

4. Release the sensor plate.

^ The sensor plate should not bind when released and audibly touch the sensor plate stop bracket.

Air Flow Sensor Plate Position

5. With the engine (OFF) visually inspect the air-flow sensor plate position (vertical) within the air
funnel.

^ The air-flow sensor plate upper edge must stand flush with the upper edge of the cylindrical part
of the air funnel. Adjust the zero point if necessary. A higher position of up to 0.008 in. (0.2mm) is
permissible.

ZERO POINT EXCESSIVELY HIGH


Capacity Specifications

Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications

Total Capacity 1300 g


Page 1373
FLUID GREASE (NLGI Class 00)
For door lock pin and striker eye

Castrol CLS Grease Castrol, Wayne, NJ / Toronto, Canada

HIGH TEMPERATURE ROLLER BEARING GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For front wheel bearings

MB High Temperature Antifriction Bearing MB part no. 001 989 23 51 10 Grease

CHASSIS GREASE (NLGI Class 01)

For all greasing points except front wheel hubs

Shell Retinax C Shell Oil Co., Houston, TX

LONG TERM LUBRICATING GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For release bearing, release arm and splines for connecting linkage on level control valves

Molykote Longterm 2 Plus Dow Corning

MB Long Term Grease MB part no. 000 989 63 51

MULTI-PURPOSE GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For all greasing points except front wheel

3752 Almagard Vari-Purpose Lubricant Lubrication Engineers Inc., Fort Worth, TX

Castrol LM Grease Castrol, Wayne, NJ / Toronto, Canada

Exxon Multipurpose Grease Exxon Co., Houston, TX

Renolit MP Fuchs Oil Corp., Somerville, NJ

Unocal MP Automotive Grease Union Oil Company of California, Brea, CA

COMPLEX GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For sliding blocks of sliding/pop-up roof

MB Lubrication Paste MB part no. 001 989 46 51

HYDRAULIC OIL

For hydraulic system, Model 600

MB Hydraulic Oil MB part no. 100 890 O0 11

HYDRAULIC OIL

For load leveling system, hydropneumatic suspension, hydraulic soft top, 4MATIC, ASD

MB Hydraulic Oil MB part no. 000 989 91 03 10

HYDRAULIC OIL

For tandem pumps with common oil reservoir for steering and level control in Model 210.

MB Hydraulic Oil MB part no. 000 989 20 03 10


ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

MB Anti-Corrosion/Anti-freeze MB part no. Q 1 03 0002

CAUTION! The use of aluminum components in M-B engines requires that


anti-corrosion/anti-freeze specifically formulated to protect aluminum
Locations
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations

Fuse and Relay Block Identification and Location

Left Rear Corner of Engine Compartment

The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.

F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)

The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 84
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Page 356

Ignition Control Module: Description and Operation

Fig. 55 EZL Control Unit

The EZL ignition control unit contains a microcomputer, pressure sensor and the power output
stage for control of the ignition coil. It is fitted to the left wheelhouse and is installed with heat
conducting paste. The control unit receives information concerning engine speed (crankshaft
position), intake manifold vacuum (load condition), engine temperature (coolant), and full load
(throttle valve switch).
Ignition Map

The EZL control unit compares information from these inputs with ignition maps for typical load and
speed ranges which are stored in the microcomputer. The optimal ignition timing for each operating
condition is instantaneously determined from the stored maps and the power output stage switches
the primary current of the ignition coil between terminals 16 and 31 of the control unit. Furthermore,
a TD (top dead center) reference signal is provided to the CIS-E control unit, tachometer, fuel
pump relay, and diagnostic socket. During cranking and up to approx. 450 RPM, the ignition timing
is controlled via the segment edges (fixed) of the flywheel. After approx. 460 RPM has been
attained a transition from the fixed ignition timing to dynamic ignition timing (instantaneous, ignition
map comparison) is made. Various ignition characteristic curves are inhibited in the warm-up range
depending on the coolant temperature in order to reach the normal operating temperature as
rapidly as possible. When a full load signal is received from the throttle valve switch the control unit
adapts a fixed full load ignition map characteristic. At temperatures above approx. 203°F the
ignition will be retarded to counter any further rise in temperature.
Page 1385
Locations
Wiper Relay: Locations

Fuse and Relay Block Identification and Location

Left Rear Corner of Engine Compartment

The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.

F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)

The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 137
Voltage Protection Relay: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 986

Neutral Safety Switch: Adjustments

Plug of starter lockout switch (8)

Turn locking device upwards and press off carefully using two screwdrivers (items 1 and 2).

Shift rod (9)

Take off after removing locking clip (item 3).

Range selector lever (52)

Remove after unscrewing hexagon bolt (51). When installing, ensure that driver (54) engages in
range selector lever (item 4).

Starter lockout switch (55)

To remove, unscrew hexagon bolts (55). When installing, insert drift (4 mm dia.) through drive (54)
and locating bore in shift housing and locate starter lockout switch (Item 5).
Page 261
Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 623
Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
Fig. 3 Wheel Speed Sensor

Fig. 4 Rear Wheel Speed Sensor

The sensor sends wheel speed information to the ECU where the speed signals are used to
determine when anti-lock control is required. Each wheel speed sensor consists of a magnet
surrounded by a coil of wire. Mounted next to each sensor is a toothed ring that rotates along with
the brake disc.

As each tooth passes, the magnetic field in the wheel sensor is strengthened momentarily. This
field strength change, repeated as each tooth passes the sensor, induces voltage in the wheel
speed sensor coil and coaxial cable. The ECU compares the frequency of the AC signals from the
wheel speed sensors to detect rapid wheel deceleration, indicating possible wheel locking.

NOTE: Tire size determines the number of teeth on the front reluctor ring. It's therefore important
that the vehicle be equipped with the original equipment tire sizes. Changing tire size could affect
system function.

NOTE: Always route these cables in exactly the same position as original manufacture. Electronic
noise from improper cable routing can cause improper signals to be sent to the ECU.
Page 858
Oxygen Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins On-Off Ratio Won't Adjust After Repair, MIL on
07.3-89043 On-Off Ratio Can Not be Adjusted after ALL CIS-E Engines Revised 4/90 4/89

Repair Work - Check Engine Light ON

Note

Intake and exhaust system must be tight.

Tighten all negative electrical connections as well as exhaust manifold and flange, and loosen and
tighten 02 sensor. (Negative electrical connection through engine and exhaust).

Cause:

1. Intermittent or continuous malfunction of 02-sensor while driving vehicle.

2. Coaxial-cable between 02-sensor plug (G3/2x2) and CIS-E control unit pin 8 has short to
ground.

3. Loose connection or intermittent interruption at connector sleeve Z (solder joint in harness) in


CIS-E control unit plug.

Remedy:

1. Check on-off ratio while driving (tester needle must oscillate). If the needle of the on-off ratio
tester moves slowly to the right end stop of the dial (02-sensor at operating temperature), the
02-sensor must be replaced.

2. Unplug CIS-E control unit and check resistance between socket 7 and socket 8. Nominal value:
Ohm (above 10 k Ohm).

If resistance is below 1 Ohm, replace engine wiring harness.

3. Open CIS-E control unit plug and resolder connector sleeve Z (solder joint in harness) on socket
7.
Page 249

Engine Control Module: Locations

Electronic Ignition Control Unit (EZL)

Component ID N1/2

Component Name Electronic ignition control unit (EZL)

Component Location Left side of engine compartment

Reference Resistor (CIS-E)

Component ID R17/1

Component Name Reference resistor (CIS-E)


Component Location Right side of component compartment, in harness

Reference Resistor (EZL)


Page 985
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 1276
parts be used. Failure to use MB Anti-corrosion/Anti-freeze may result in a significantly shortened
service life. While there may be a number of products available which will provide the required
protection, all such products have not been tested for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The above product
is suitable for our engines and can be mixed with the original anti-corrosion/anti-freeze filled in at
the factory.

BRAKE FLUID

MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4 Plus) MB part no. 000 989 08 07 10 (0.75 liter container) MB part no. 000
989 08 07 11 (5.0 liter container)

BRAKE PAD PASTE

MB Brake Pad Paste MB part no. 001 989 10 51

REFRIGERANT R 134a

MB refrigerant R134a MB part no. Q 4 83 0190 (30 lb. container) MB part no. Q 4 83 0191 (15 lb.
container)

COMPRESSOR OILS (R134a)

MB compressor oil for R134a ONLY MB part no. 001 989 08 03

WINDSHIELD WASHER CONCENTRATE

MB Summerwash Formula VR9422 MBNA part no. 001 986 44 71 10 (40 ml)

Suggested Mixing Ratio (1:100) of MB Summerwash Formula VR9422

Temperature MB Summerwash + Water Solvent*

Summer use 40 ml + 1.0 gallon --

(above freezing)

Winter use 40 ml + -- 1.0 gallon

(below freezing)

* Pre-mixed windshield washer solvent (commercially available blue concentrate in 1 gallon


container)

1. Gasoline Engines

Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as Ethanol,
TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided that the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10 percent. MTBE may be added up to 15 percent. The
ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional co-solvents.

Mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol must not be used. Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and
90% unleaded gasoline, can also be used. These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.

Gasoline Additives

A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline.


MERCEDES-BENZ recommends to use only quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the
build up of carbon deposits.

After an extended period of using fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can build up,
especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance
problems such as:

- warm-up hesitation,

- unstable idle,

- knocking pinging.

- misfire,

- power loss.

DO NOT blend other fuel additives with the fuel. These additional additives only result in
unnecessary cost and may be harmful to engine operation.
Page 1386
Page 429

Fuse & Relay Box Layout / Relay Identification


Page 1001

5 Attach level controller to bracket, connect oil lines.

6 Check ball joints of connecting rod for easy operation and wear.

On version with steel joints, remove safety clip (7b) and pull off ball pin. Provide ball sockets with
grease. Renew damaged sealing washers (7c) or worn ball joints.

Plastics-mounted joints require no service.

7 Attach connecting rod to lever of level controller. If required, hold ball pin with angular screwdriver
or 10 mm fork wrench.

8 Check vehicle level.

9 Check adjustment of headlights, if vehicle level has been changed.


Page 449

Circuit Identification
Page 606
Figure 3
Observe the following during repair work:

Only the modified version will be available as a replacement part once the inventory of the previous
version is depleted. When replacing the speed sensor on vehicles manufactured prior to the
effective chassis end number, the bracket (29 and 32) and the ABS cable (57) must also be
replaced (Figure 2).

To replace the bracket (29) on model 126 vehicles, the brake line (5, Figure 3) first be removed
from the bracket. Upon installation of the new bracket, ensure that the proper brake line
connections are made and the front brakes are bled (42-010).

Parts Information In Case of Warranty:

Time Allowance

02-3324 Front wheel speed sensor - left, Repl.

0.7 hr. | 25/80

(from previous to modified version) 0.8 hr. | 40


Page 297
Overvoltage Protection Relay: Testing and Inspection
Special Tools

Equipment

Multimeter -- e.g. SUN DMM-5


Page 305

Fuse Identification
Diagram Information and Instructions
Neutral Safety Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 1576
Page 475

Circuit Identification
Page 1180

Compression Check: Specifications BE01.00-P-1000-02Z Cylinder Leaktightness

BE01.00-P-1000-02Z Cylinder Leaktightness

Cylinder Leaktightness
Page 1274
For rear axle differential (For limited slip see below), and for refilling 4MATIC front differential.
MB Hypoid Gear Oil MB part no. 000 989 28 03

HYPOID GEAR OIL

For limited slip differential and rear axle with ASD, 4MATIC

MB Limited Slip Differential Oil MB part no. 000 583 09 04

HYPOID GEAR OIL

For initial (new) fill of 4MATIC front differential

MB Life-long hypoid gear oil MB part no. 001 989 05 03

MANUAL TRANSMISSION FLUID

For MB manual transmission

MB Manual Transmission Fluid MB part no. 000 989 26 03

STEERING GEAR LUBRICANT

For power steering

MB Power Steering Fluid MB part no. 000 989 88 33

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

For MB automatic transmission (not including MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6),
transfer case (4MATIC), and MB manual transmission (except GL76/30-5 and GL275E) use:

Castrol Dexron-III/Mercon ATF F-30341 Castrol Transmax M-22257 / 22096 Chevron ATF Dexron
III F-30108 / 30159 Citgo Multi-Purpose ATF D-21571 Exxon Superflo ATF Dexron-III F-30111
Havoline ATF Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Pennzoil, ATF D-21380 Pennzoil, ATF F-30110 Quaker
State Dexron-III/Mercon F-30161 Sunoco ATF Dexron-III/Mercon F-30176 Texaco ATF
Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Unocal Multi-Purpose ATF D-22413 / 22431 Valvoline ATF Type D

Supplier Information: Castrol, Piscataway, NJ / Toronto, Canada Chevron Products Co., San
Francisco CA Citgo Petroleum Corp., Tulsa, OK Exxon Company USA, Houston, TX Texaco
Lubricants Co., Houston, TX Pennzoil Products Co., Houston, TX Quaker State, Seneca, PA Sun
Co., Philadelphia, PA Unocal Science and Technology Div., Brea, CA Valvoline International,
Lexington, KY

For MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6 and Model 163 transfer case use:

MB Automatic Transmission Fluid MB part no. 001 989 21 03 10

SUPERCHARGER OIL

MB Supercharger Oil MB part no. 000 989 6201


Diagram Information and Instructions
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 1374
parts be used. Failure to use MB Anti-corrosion/Anti-freeze may result in a significantly shortened
service life. While there may be a number of products available which will provide the required
protection, all such products have not been tested for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The above product
is suitable for our engines and can be mixed with the original anti-corrosion/anti-freeze filled in at
the factory.

BRAKE FLUID

MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4 Plus) MB part no. 000 989 08 07 10 (0.75 liter container) MB part no. 000
989 08 07 11 (5.0 liter container)

BRAKE PAD PASTE

MB Brake Pad Paste MB part no. 001 989 10 51

REFRIGERANT R 134a

MB refrigerant R134a MB part no. Q 4 83 0190 (30 lb. container) MB part no. Q 4 83 0191 (15 lb.
container)

COMPRESSOR OILS (R134a)

MB compressor oil for R134a ONLY MB part no. 001 989 08 03

WINDSHIELD WASHER CONCENTRATE

MB Summerwash Formula VR9422 MBNA part no. 001 986 44 71 10 (40 ml)

Suggested Mixing Ratio (1:100) of MB Summerwash Formula VR9422

Temperature MB Summerwash + Water Solvent*

Summer use 40 ml + 1.0 gallon --

(above freezing)

Winter use 40 ml + -- 1.0 gallon

(below freezing)

* Pre-mixed windshield washer solvent (commercially available blue concentrate in 1 gallon


container)

1. Gasoline Engines

Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as Ethanol,
TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided that the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10 percent. MTBE may be added up to 15 percent. The
ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional co-solvents.

Mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol must not be used. Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and
90% unleaded gasoline, can also be used. These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.

Gasoline Additives

A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline.


MERCEDES-BENZ recommends to use only quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the
build up of carbon deposits.

After an extended period of using fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can build up,
especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance
problems such as:

- warm-up hesitation,

- unstable idle,

- knocking pinging.

- misfire,

- power loss.

DO NOT blend other fuel additives with the fuel. These additional additives only result in
unnecessary cost and may be harmful to engine operation.
Page 319
Page 180
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Seat Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 226

Fuse Identification
Locations
Radio Switch: Locations
On Radio Bracket
Page 491
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 1452
For rear axle differential (For limited slip see below), and for refilling 4MATIC front differential.
MB Hypoid Gear Oil MB part no. 000 989 28 03

HYPOID GEAR OIL

For limited slip differential and rear axle with ASD, 4MATIC

MB Limited Slip Differential Oil MB part no. 000 583 09 04

HYPOID GEAR OIL

For initial (new) fill of 4MATIC front differential

MB Life-long hypoid gear oil MB part no. 001 989 05 03

MANUAL TRANSMISSION FLUID

For MB manual transmission

MB Manual Transmission Fluid MB part no. 000 989 26 03

STEERING GEAR LUBRICANT

For power steering

MB Power Steering Fluid MB part no. 000 989 88 33

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

For MB automatic transmission (not including MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6),
transfer case (4MATIC), and MB manual transmission (except GL76/30-5 and GL275E) use:

Castrol Dexron-III/Mercon ATF F-30341 Castrol Transmax M-22257 / 22096 Chevron ATF Dexron
III F-30108 / 30159 Citgo Multi-Purpose ATF D-21571 Exxon Superflo ATF Dexron-III F-30111
Havoline ATF Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Pennzoil, ATF D-21380 Pennzoil, ATF F-30110 Quaker
State Dexron-III/Mercon F-30161 Sunoco ATF Dexron-III/Mercon F-30176 Texaco ATF
Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Unocal Multi-Purpose ATF D-22413 / 22431 Valvoline ATF Type D

Supplier Information: Castrol, Piscataway, NJ / Toronto, Canada Chevron Products Co., San
Francisco CA Citgo Petroleum Corp., Tulsa, OK Exxon Company USA, Houston, TX Texaco
Lubricants Co., Houston, TX Pennzoil Products Co., Houston, TX Quaker State, Seneca, PA Sun
Co., Philadelphia, PA Unocal Science and Technology Div., Brea, CA Valvoline International,
Lexington, KY

For MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6 and Model 163 transfer case use:

MB Automatic Transmission Fluid MB part no. 001 989 21 03 10

SUPERCHARGER OIL

MB Supercharger Oil MB part no. 000 989 6201


Page 622
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 737

Ventilation Switch: Service and Repair

SWITCH FOR AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM AND SWITCH FOR FRESH AIR-RECIRCULATING


AIR (STARTING 07/81)

Removal:

1. Unclip springs at bottom and top on switch by means of a flat, wedge shaped tool and pull out
switch. 2. Pull coupling from switch.

Installation:

3. Press coupling on switch and insert switch into cover.


Page 1352

4. Multi-Viscosity S3 Quality Engine Oils (Sheet No. 227.1)

5. Break-In Oil (Sheet No. 225.3)

Viscosity Grades for Motor Oils

Adhering precisely to the SAE grades in accordance with the ambient temperature would result in
frequent oil changes. Consequently, the temperature ranges shown are merely guidelines, which
can be exceeded in the upper or lower limits for brief periods.

1. Gasoline Engines and 2. Diesel Engines

Diesel Engines 601, 602, 603. Except 601, 602, 603

1. SAE 4O may be used if ambient temperatures instantly exceed 30°C (86°F).

2. Except turbodiesel engine 617.95.


NOTE:

For additional information, please refer to an Owner's Manual or the "MB specifications for Service
Products" microfiche.

Rear Axle Differential (Sheet No. 235) D-A Lubricant Co., Inc.

D-A Gear Guard SAE 90 1340 West 29th Street

Available in either 35, 120 or 400 Indianapolis, IN 46208

pound containers.

MB Hypoid Gear Oil Part No. 000 989 28 03

Limited Slip Differential (Sheet No. 235.3)

MB Limited Slip Differential Oil Part No. 000 583 09 04

Manual Transmission (Sheet No. 236.2)

Fuchs Renofluid TF 10 MBNA Part No. Q2 09 0004

15 gallon containers only

Power Steering (Sheet No. 236.3)

MB Power Steering Fluid Part No. 000 989 88 03


Page 401
Block Diagram - Overall Function Of SRS System
Page 436

Fuse Identification
Page 370
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Page 1584
Approved Tires, Wheels and Hubcaps
All Models, 1986-1999
Page 812

Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Adjustments

Airflow Sensor Arrangement

1. Activate the fuel pumps for 5 seconds in order to zero the sensor plate position.
2. Slip a (0.002in.) feeler gauge between the sensor plate and the cylindrical part of the air funnel.

^ The feeler gauge should be able to be slipped freely around the sensor plate. Recenter the plate
if necessary.

^ The air-flow sensor plate should not bind even under slight, lateral pressure.

3. Push down on the sensor plate slightly.

4. Release the sensor plate.

^ The sensor plate should not bind when released and audibly touch the sensor plate stop bracket.

Air Flow Sensor Plate Position

5. With the engine (OFF) visually inspect the air-flow sensor plate position (vertical) within the air
funnel.

^ The air-flow sensor plate upper edge must stand flush with the upper edge of the cylindrical part
of the air funnel. Adjust the zero point if necessary. A higher position of up to 0.008 in. (0.2mm) is
permissible.

ZERO POINT EXCESSIVELY HIGH


Page 822
Test Page 2
Fig. 2
Page 1571
Page 929
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mixture Control Unit
Mixture Control Unit Assembly

1. Disconnect the NEG. battery terminal and insulate.

2. Remove the air cleaner assembly.

3. Remove the fuel and injection lines from the fuel distributor, fuel injectors and the fuel pressure
regulator.

4. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the electro-hydraulic actuator and the air flow sensor
position indicator.

5. Loosen the large hose clamp at the air guide housing.

6. Remove the mounting nuts for the mixture control unit.

7. Lift off the mixture control unit (detach the idle air hose).

8. Reinstall in the reverse manner.

9. Run the engine and check for fuel leaks.

Fig. 5 Air Flow Sensor Position Indicator

CAUTION:Screws of different lengths are used to fasten the air guide housing to the air flow sensor
housing. If replacing either component, make

sure that the screw below the air flow sensor position indicator is reinstalled correctly. If a longer
screw is used the air flow sensor position indicator will be damaged.
Page 1442

2. If A/C compressor binding is not present. fill A/C system with fresh recycled refrigerant and
perform refrigerant leak test. (Figure 1).

CAUTION:

Observe specifications on Fill Capacity Label.

3. Check for proper operation of A/C system.

Models 124, 129 If parts require replacement, only R134a-type components are to be installed.

Models 107, 126, 201 If the A/C lines, condenser or evaporator require replacement, please
continue with "C. Removal of Mineral Oil from A/C System".

Note:

If replacing the A/C compressor, use a compressor designed for refrigerant R134a if available. If a
R134a compressor is not available as a spare part, be certain to drain the mineral oil from the new
R12 compressor prior to installation.

CAUTION:

In this case, do not refill A/C system with R12, please continue with "D. Replacing Receiver Drier".

C. Removal of Mineral Oil from A/C System

Note:

During the conversion to R134a refrigerant, it is important to remove as much mineral oil from the
A/C system as possible.
Page 501
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Page 778
Combination Switch: Service and Repair
Fig. 5 Combination Switch Replacement

560SL

The steering wheel does not have to be removed to replace the combination switch.

1. Disable airbag system, refer to MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES/AIRBAG ARMING &


DISARMING.

2. Remove rubber sleeve from combination switch.

3. Remove two combination switch attaching screws.

4. Pull combination switch out slightly, then disconnect the two screw type electrical connectors,
then pull cable outward, Fig. 5.

5. Remove lower instrument panel cover attaching screws, then remove.

6. Disconnect plug type electrical connector, then remove switch.

7. Reverse procedure to install.

Fig. 4 Combination Switch Replacement

EXCEPT 560SL

1. Disable airbag system, refer to MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES/AIRBAG ARMING &


DISARMING.

2. Remove steering wheel, refer to Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Wheel/Service and


Repair.

3. Remove instrument panel lower cover.

4. Remove three combination switch attaching screws, Fig. 4.

5. Disconnect electrical connector under instrument panel.

6. Remove combination switch from vehicle.

7. Reverse procedure to install.


Locations

Cruise Control Relay: Locations

Component ID K12/1

Component Name Cruise control/engine overload protection relay

Component Location Rear of fuse box, location E


Page 371
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Page 515
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Page 211
Exterior Lighting Module: Locations Exterior Lamp Switch Illumination
Component ID E20

Component Name Exterior lamp switch illumination


Locations

Throttle Position Switch: Locations

Fig. 20 Throttle Valve Switch

The throttle valve switch is installed on the throttle valve housing.


Testing and Inspection
Air Conditioning Switch: Testing and Inspection
TESTING OF SWITCH FOR AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM AND SWITCH (STARTING 07/81)

- Connect ohmmeter to terminal 1 and 3.

Switch 13 Nominal value

Push symbol (arrow. top) = 0 to 1 Ohm

Position 0 = Infinite Ohms

Push symbol (arrow, bottom) = 0 to 1 Ohm

- Connect ohmmeter to terminal 2 and 7.

Switch 13 Nominal value

Push symbol (arrow, top) = 0 to 1 Ohm

Position 0 = Infinite Ohms


Page 940

Throttle Position Switch: Adjustments

Throttle Valve Switch

1. Disconnect the throttle valve switch electrical connector S 29/2x1. Connect an ohmmeter
between pin 1 and pin 2 of throttle valve side of the connector. Close the idle valve fully (against
the idle stop).

^ The resistance reading should be 0 ohms.

2. Open the throttle valve slightly and place a .009 in. feeler gauge between the throttle valve lever
and the throttle valve stop. Push the throttle valve lever against the feeler gauge.

^ The resistance reading should be infinite ohms.

3. If the resistance reading is incorrect loosen the throttle switch mounting screws.

4. With the .009 in. feeler gauge in place rotate the throttle switch slowly in a clockwise direction
until the ohmmeter reads infinite resistance. Retighten the mounting screws.
Conversion Tables

Compression Check: Specifications Conversion Tables

Fig. 13 Conversion Table, Centigrade To Fahrenheit

Cubic Centimeters to Cubic Inches


Fig. 7 Conversion Table, Cubic Centimeters To Cubic Inches

The conversion formula to go from cubic centimeters (cc) to cubic inches is to take the cubic
centimeters and divide by 16.387

For example: 4998 cc / 16.387 = 305 cubic inches.

Some common conversions can be found in the chart.

Cubic Inches to Cubic Centimeters


Page 23
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Page 1541
Test program
Page 1593

The studs on the flange plate (Figure 2, arrow) adapter only apply pressure and contact the wheel
where the wheel lugs would normally make contact. This eliminates the possibility of physical or
cosmetic damage to the wheel.

Special Tools
Page 1580
Page 997
5 Check fastening clip (6a) for tight seat on torsion bar.
Version Up to 8/85

Attention! Starting December 1972 a level controller with a larger lever has been installed. This
lever has two bores for attaching connecting rod. The bores for the connecting rod for the various
models are shown in table.

6 Checking and adjusting vehicle level on rear axle under load.

See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Adjustments


Page 181
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Locations
Timing Component Alignment Marks: Locations
Timing Component Alignment Marks

Set engine to ignition TDC at No.1 cylinder.

If the markings (arrow) are not accurately lined up, check camshaft timing.
Page 1517

Fuse & Relay Box Layout / Relay Identification


Locations

Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations

Component ID R25

Component Name Accelerator pedal position sensor

Component Location Top rear center of engine , beneath accelerator linkage


Page 333

Wiring Diagram, Models 107, 126 With Engines 116, 117 For Engine Rpm Controlled Kick-down

E12 Shift pattern illumination

N16/4 Fuel pump relays

L2 Vehicle speed sensor


S16/1 Starter lock-out/backup lamp switch

S30/1 Kick-down switch

S60 "B" position shift lever switch

X6 Terminal block circuit 56d

X26 Connection engine wiring harness (The black/white wire from connector X49/2 is connected to
terminal 7)

X49/2 Connection starter lock-out/backup lamp switch

Y3 Kick-down solenoid

a Speedometer

b Model 107 W1 Main ground, right footwell Model 126 W1 Main ground, behind instrument cluster

c Fuse circuit 15

d Backup lamp exterior lamp failure monitoring unit

e Ignition Starter switch

f Starter
Page 1076
Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments Adjusting the Air/Fuel Mixture
NOTE:a. Refer to NOTES CONCERNING THE AIR/FUEL MIXTURE and CHECKING THE
AIR/FUEL MIXTURE ADJUSTMENT for tester connection locations and procedures prior to
adjusting the idle air/fuel mixture.

b. Adjustment procedure will require the use of on/off ratio tester (Bosch KDJE-P 600) or
equivalent.

c. Adjustments are to be performed after the engine has reached normal operating temperature.

d. All accessories must be switched off.

e. Engine must be in good mechanical working order and be free from electrical misfires.

f. If after completing the adjustment procedures the correct On/Off Ratio can not be obtained refer
to technical service bulletin #07318 in TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS. Information concerning
the possibility of internal fuel leakage within the CIS-E fuel distributor may lead to the remedy for
the problem.

Fig. 70 Adjustment Tower Location

1. Remove the air cleaner and drill a hole approximately 6 - 8 mm (15/64-5/16 in.) deep with a 2.5
mm (3/32 in.) twist drill in each of the break away bolts on the adjustment tower.

CAUTION: Do Not Drill Through The Bolts As The Metal Chips May Cause Engine Damage.
Thoroughly Remove The Metal Chips With A Cleaning Rag.

2. Unscrew the break away bolts with a left hand twist drill or a screw extractor and remove the
adjustment tower.

3. Install a new adjustment tower kit.

4. Reinstall the air cleaner and start the engine.


Page 379
Block Diagram - Overall Function Of SRS System
Page 69
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Description and Operation
Braking Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
The stop lamp switch, located on the brake pedal support bracket, provides a "BRAKE APPLIED"
input to the ECU. The signal from this switch resets the control routine if the driver pumps the brake
pedal during an ABS braking maneuver. This switch also controls conventional stop lamp
operation.
Specifications

Power Steering Line/Hose: Specifications

Power Steering Pressure Hose To Steering Gear 19-22 ft.lb

Power Steering Return Hose To Steering Gear 26-30 ft.lb


Page 1572
Page 987
Neutral Safety Switch: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing

1 Release locking device for starter lockout switch plug (8) by turning white plastic ring (arrow)
upwards in direction of arrow.

2 Carefully press off plug using two screwdrivers at the cable output and the tab.

3 Unhook shift rod (9) after removing the retaining clip.

4 Unscrew hexagon bolt (51) and pull off range selector lever (52).

Installation Note

Attach range selector lever in such a way that the driver (54) engages in the lever.

5 Unscrew both bolts (55) and remove starter lockout switch (53).
Page 560
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Engine - Oil Level Checking Procedure Revised

Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Level Checking Procedure Revised

REF. NO. MBNA 00/57A

TO: ALL MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: November 1995 (Supercedes S.I. MBNA 00/57 October 1994)

Revision: Revised checking/correcting oil level procedure

SUBJECT: ALL MODELS ENGINE OIL LEVEL

It has recently come to our attention that some Mercedes-Benz vehicles are being operated with
too much engine oil. Additionally, it is important that the oil dipstick remain fully inserted in the oil
dipstick tube for a minimum of 3 seconds before rechecking the oil level again. Removing the oil
dipstick immediately after insertion, will result in an erroneous indication of the oil quantity within
the engine.

Excess engine oil affects the engine's driveability and performance, and may lead to engine
damage.

Dealers are reminded to fill the engine with the exact amount of engine oil specified for that engine
(e.g. if specified quantity is 8.5 quarts, do not fill with 9.0 quarts or 9.0 liters of engine oil). The MAX
mark on the oil dipstick must not be exceeded (upper arrow, Figure 1).

Also, please remind your customers of the proper procedure for checking/correcting the engine oil
level. Emphasizing that the engine should be at normal operating temperature (80°C) and that the
vehicle is parked on a level surface The engine must not have run for approx. 2 minutes, to allow
the engine oil to drain into the oil pan.

Then after removing and wiping off and reinserting the oil dipstick, allow the oil dipstick to remain
fully Inserted in the oil dipstick tube for a minimum of 3 seconds before rechecking the oil level
again

Ideally, the engine oil level should be around halfway between the MAX and MIN marks on the oil
dipstick.

Also, the customer should refrain from frequently "topping off" the engine oil level.

Never add engine oil above the MAX mark on the oil dipstick (upper arrow, Figure 1).

For approved engine oil classifications and correct viscosity grades, refer to the latest edition of the
Factory Approved Service Products sheet.
Page 1150

It is also possible to replace only the lower part of the spark plug wrench with a conversion kit
consisting of a spark plug socket, spring and pan-head screw.

After modification, change the part number of the spark plug wrench to 120 589 02 09 00.
Page 983
Neutral Safety Switch: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 385

Connection Diagram - Pulse Display/Meter

013 Pulse meter

G1 Battery

X92 Test coupling for diagnosis, 8-pin (flashing code)

There is a diagnosis program integrated in the control unit to test the control unit and the electrical
components of the airbag system. When a fault is detected, the warning lamp (A1e15) does not go
out after 4 s or it will come on while driving. The faults detected are stored and may be called up in
the form of a pulse display by means of the warning lamp (A1e15) or digitally by means of a pulse
meter.

Note on Pulse Display: The digits 1 - 10 appear on the display of the pulse meter. A 1 signifies that
no fault is stored in the system. All other numbers are assigned to a certain group of faults. If there
are several faults in the system the fault with the lowest pulse number is displayed first.

- If the light-emitting diode "U-Batt" lights up after connection, the pulse meter and power supply for
the pulse meter are in order.

- When the first number reappears during the test after at least two or more pulse outputs
(numbers) all faults have been read.
Diagnosis With Pulse Display: -

Connect pulse meter in accordance with the connection diagram.

NOTE: The light-emitting diode "U-Batt" in the display must light up.

- Switch on ignition.

- Press the start button for between 2 and 4 s.

- Display 1 means no fault in the system. If another number appears, rectify the fault in accordance
with the fault-finding flow diagram. See: Restraint Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics
Page 748
Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations
Top Of Fuel Tank
Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
For information regarding B, C, P, U and Manufacturer Code Descriptions -
Page 839
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Fig. 33 Crankshaft Position Sensor

Fig. 55 EZL Control Unit

1. With the ignition "OFF" detach the crankshaft position sensor from the EZL control unit.

Fig. 26 Crankshaft Position Sensor Location

2. Remove the sensor hold-down bolt.

3. Carefully lift out the sensor and cable. Take of note of proper cable routing for reinstallation.

4. Reinstall in reverse manner.


Page 642
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Locations
Top Of Engine

Applicable to: 380SE/SEL/SEC & 420, 500 & 560SEL/SEC


Page 1569

CAUTION!

All tires on the vehicle must be in the same speed rating category. Clients should be made aware
of the maximum speed ratings (refer to table). This is especially important if winter tires are
installed which have a lower speed rating than the summer tires normally used.

^ In case of a wheel change (e.g., light alloy wheels for steel wheels), be certain that the proper
spare lug bolts are kept conspicuously near the spare wheel. Ensure the proper bolts are used with
each set of wheels.

^ Retightening of the lug bolts after approx. 100-500 miles as previously specified is no longer
necessary.

^ Before mounting the wheels, clean all dirt and corrosion from the contact surfaces of the wheels
and axle flanges.

^ Some tires have a direction of rotation embossed in the sidewall. Please be certain to mount the
tire on the wheel rim in the proper direction of rotation as required by the direction indication of the
arrow.

^ Asymmetric tires will have the word "Outer"and may have an arrow embossed in the sidewall.
Please be certain to mount the tire on the wheel rim with the correct side out and in the correct
direction of rotation.

^ On models equipped with COMAND, the navigation system must be calibrated each time new
tires are installed on the vehicle.

^ In general, use only tires and wheels with tire/wheel match points when replacing tires. Match
points are designed to cancel out tire/wheel out-of-round dimensions.

Match point identification regarding winter tires


^ Tires with color dot on outside sidewall

^ Steel wheels via a color dot or center punch mark on the outside wheel rim.

^ Light-alloy wheels via valve stem hole in wheel. Additionally on Model 140 use of color dot or
notch in the tire bead area of the wheel rim.

Note:

Due to improved wheel and tire manufacturing tolerances, the match point marks were phased out
on original equipment alloy wheels during model year 1994 (except on model 140). As a result,
some model year 1994 vehicles already have the tires mounted with no regard for the match point
that is present on the wheel. This condition is not considered a production error.

Mercedes-Benz clip on wheel weights cannot be installed on the outside of some Mercedes-Benz
and AMG accessory wheels light alloy wheels. These wheels require stick on wheel weights (43c,
Figure 2), part no. B 6 6 40 8121.

CAUTION!

Non-Mercedes Benz stick-on wheel weights must not be used for clearance reasons. Contact with
brake/suspension components may result, causing the wheel to go out of balance. As previously
indicated, clip-on wheel weights (43a) can be installed on the inside of the accessory wheel.
Page 332

Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection

Test Data

- Cut-out speed of relay 6,000 ± 50 rpm


Special Tools

Equipment

- Multimeter -- e.g. SUN DMM-5

- Engine analyzer -- SUN EMT-1019/Master 3 or MCM-2110, All-Test 361 0-MB (Available through
the MBNA Standard Equipment Program)

Test Condition

- Battery voltage at least 11.5 Volts.

Wiring Diagram, Fuel Pump Relay

M3/1 Fuel pump 1

M3/2 Fuel pump 2

N6 A/C compressor control unit

N16/4 Fuel pump relay

W10 Ground, battery

W11 Ground, engine

W12 Ground, center console

X35 Terminal block circuits 30/61

X36 Connector, fuel pump wiring harness


Page 988

Installation Note

Move range selector lever to position "N". Insert splint or drill bit (4 mm dia.) through driver (54) into
locating bore in shift housing, then tighten retaining bolts (55). Pull out locating pin (arrow).

6 Install in the reverse sequence.


Page 543
Power Mirror Switch: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 671
Oil Pressure Sender: Locations
At Oil Filter
Page 250
Component ID R16/1
Component Name Reference resistor (EZL)

Component Location Left side of component compartment, next to fuse/relay box

CIS-E Control Unit

Component ID N3

Component Name CIS-E control unit

Component Location Front passenger footwell, behind right kick panel

Engine Systems Control Unit (MAS)


Page 701

Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair

Outside Temperature Sensor

As of 09/87

Cover to left air intake -

remove.

2-pin plug Connection (arrow) -

separate.

Outside temperature sensor (B 10/5) -

pull out,

- press out rubber grommet,

- check and replace where necessary. See: Testing and Inspection


In reverse sequence -

install.

Air conditioning/automatic temperature control -

check ("Function Test"). See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Testing and Inspection
Page 840
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Tools and Equipment
Checking and Correcting Setting of TDC Sensor

Special tools

Measuring pin for TDC and 20° ATDC position of the engine on 1st cylinder

115 589 17 21 00

Locating tool for adjusting slide 102 589 03 21 00

Socket insert 27 mm, 1/2" drive 001 589 65 09 00

1/2" drive insert, 80 mm long, for rotating the engine

617 589 00 16 00
Page 910
Page 558
Power Seat Switch: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 1286

Technical Service Bulletin # 00_053 Date: 931001

Maintenance - Factory Approved Service Products

NOTE: Technical Service Bulletin 00_053, dated 10/93 was superseded by the Factory Approved
Service Products Sheet (OE Part Number S-0473-98L) dated 12/98. The information contained
within this bulletin (00_053) reflects the changes made by the 12/98 Factory Approved Service
Products Sheet.

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: October 1993 (supersedes 5.1. MBNA 00/47. Oct. 1992)

REF. NO. MBNA 00/53

Revision: Approved automatic transmission fluids, and R134a part numbers.

General Information

SUBJECT: FACTORY APPROVED SERVICE PRODUCTS

Attached is a current listing (as of Jan. 2000) of factory-approved service products which are
presently available in the U.S.A or Canada. It will be revised periodically to add or delete products
according to the latest information received from the factory.

We recommend that only approved service products be used in Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

Engine Oil

APPROVED ENGINE OILS

IMPORTANT:

Engine oils are labeled on the container with various ACEA (Association des Constructeurs
Europeens d'Automobiles) and/or API (American Petroleum Institute) designations of quality.
Mercedes Benz recommends the use of engine oils which meet ACEA or API classifications. If an
ACEA quality engine oil is not available, then an API quality engine oil should be used. Only engine
oils (including synthetic and/or recycled engine oil) with any of the following classification grade, or
combinations thereof, are approved:
Engine ACEA classification API classification

Gasoline A2 SH

A3 SJ

Diesel B2 CF-4

B3 CG-4

Always refer to the viscosity grade charts in the Owner's Manual or below for the proper viscosity
grade based on ambient temperature.

Note: The chart (see image) supersedes ALL previously published viscosity charts.

Select oil viscocity according to the lowest air temperature expected before the next oil change
using the chart below (image).

Viscosity Grades For Motor Oils

For additional information, please refer to the vehicle Owner's Manual.

Other Lubricants and Fluids

HYPOID GEAR OIL


Page 557
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Capacity Specifications

Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications

Total Refrigerant Oil Capacity 120 cc


Page 1074
Fig. 61 Diagnostic Connector
3. Turn the ignition switch to the run (on) position and press the push button #2 on the Self
Diagnostic test connector for 2 - 4 seconds.

^ The LED should blink once, indicating that no codes are stored in the memory. If a fault code is
present perform the necessary repairs and clear the memory before attempting to adjust the idle
air/fuel mixture.

4. Press the push button #2 again for 2 - 4 seconds.

^ The LED should stay on indicating that the control unit has been switched over to on/off ratio
output.

5. Start the engine and run at idle speed.

6. Press the IR 100% button on the tester.

7. Run the engine at approximately 2500 RPM and record the average on/off ratio reading.

NOTE: If the On/Off ratio tester has a constant value refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
PROCEDURES in COMPUTERIZED ENGINE CONTROLS.

8. Let the engine return to idle speed and wait a few moments for it to stabilize. Now record the
average on/off ratio reading at idle.

^ The difference between the two readings should not vary by more than +10 on the tester. If the
difference is greater than +10 refer to ADJUSTING THE AIR/FUEL MIXTURE. If the difference is
not greater than +10 the fuel mixture is adjusted correctly.

Federal Models

NOTE:

a. Checking the idle air/fuel mixture adjustment will require the use of the on/off ratio tester (Bosch
KDJE-P 600) or equivalent. b. All tests are to be performed after engine has reached normal
operating temperature. c. All accessories must be switched off. d. Engine must be in good
mechanical working order and be free from electrical misfires.

Fig. 72 Bosch On/Off Ratio Tester


Page 144

Fuse & Relay Box Layout / Relay Identification


Page 139
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 1025
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Specifications
Engine Control Module: Specifications
CIS-E Control Unit Operating Voltage..................................................................................................
.................................................................11-14 volts Crankshaft Position Sensor (terminal 7 and 31
d).............................................................................................................................................680-120
0 ohms Crankshaft Position Sensor (terminal 7 and Ground)..............................................................
................................................................................>199 ohms Coolant Temperature Sensor
resistance
..........................................................................................................................................2.2-2.8k
ohms (at 68F °F) Decel Cutoff Speed [1].............................................................................................
.............................................................................................>1100 RPM EZL Reference Resistor......
..............................................................................................................................................................
.........................750 ohms Electro-Hydraulic Actuator [2].....................................................................
...................................................................................................Approx. 75 mA Idle Control Valve
Current Range [3].................................................................................................................................
................................700-1000 mA Maximum Engine Speed Cutout....................................................
............................................................................................................................6000 ±50 Oxygen
Sensor Heater Resistance....................................................................................................................
............................3 ohms (cold) 13 ohms (hot) Oxygen Sensor Operating Voltage (engine
running)...........................................................................................................................................0.4
- 1.0 volts Oxygen Sensor Heating Element current draw....................................................................
.....................................................................................0.5 - 1.3 A Air/Fuel Mixture (On/Off Ratio) [4].
.........................................................................................................................................................Re
adout oscillating

[1] Road speed >12.5 mph, throttle valve idle contact closed. [2] Engine not running, ignition "ON"
[3] In P or N, idling at operating temperature. [4] At Diagnostic socket, with on/off ratio tester, and
O2 sensor

connected. Reading should be within +10 of value at 2500 RPM.


560 SL

Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation 560 SL

Component Locations

The fuel pump relay controls various functions of the CIS-E system such as fuel pump operation,
maximum engine speed limitation, oxygen sensor heater supply voltage, cold start valve activation,
transmission (automatic) kickdown cutoff, and fuel pump cutoff in the event of an interruption of the
ignition signal (TD) to the fuel pump relay. An input from the ignition control unit provides a TD
signal which energizes the fuel pump relay during starting or with the engine running. The fuel
pump relay is also activated briefly when the ignition is turned to the run (ON) position. If no TD
signal is received or the engine reaches maximum RPM limits the fuel pump relay will then switch
the pumps off. Cold start valve activation depends on coolant temperature and cranking speed
signal. Voltage supply is via the fuel pump relay. The length of time during which the starting valve
injects fuel is dependent on the coolant temperature. If the engine starts before the cold start valve
completes its cycle, cold start injection is cancelled. If the fuel pump relay receives a certain
frequency signal corresponding to the maximum engine RPM, the contact between circuit 30 and
87 is interrupted and the fuel pumps are turned off. Activation for the A/T kickdown solenoid valve
is routed via the fuel pump relay. The circuit to the kickdown solenoid valve is interrupted approx.
200 RPM prior to maximum engine RPM cut-out and the transmission shifts to the next gear. This
will assure that shifting occurs prior to maximum engine RPM cutout.
Locations
Dome Lamp Relay: Locations
Center Of Windshield Header
Page 764

Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Locations

Component ID B14

Component Name Outside temperature indicator

Component Location Front of car, on license plate bracket


Page 610

Wheel Speed Sensor: Mechanical Specifications

Rear Axle Rpm Sensor Hex Screw 8 Nm

Front Wheel Sensor Hex Screw 22 Nm

Brake Lines To Hydraulic Modulator Connections 14 Nm

Wheel Lug Bolts 110 Nm


Page 744

Brake Pad Wear Sensor: Locations

Component ID S10/1

Component Name Left front brake pad wear sensor

Component Location In left front brake pad

Component ID S10/2

Component Name Right front brake pad wear sensor

Component Location In right front brake pad


Page 162

Cruise Control Module: Locations Cruise Control Amplifier With Reference Resistor

Component ID N4/2

Component Name Cruise control amplifier with reference resistor

Component Location Left of steering column, behind lower dash panel


Specifications
Temperature Sensor Chart
Page 1525

Fuse & Relay Box Layout / Relay Identification


Page 1410
Damages or malfunctions resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives
are not covered by the MERCEDES-BENZ Limited Warranty.
For model year 1986, all gasoline models except 190 E 2.3 require premium unleaded gasoline. As
of model year 1987, all gasoline engines require premium unleaded gasoline

Use only premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 91 min. In the U.S., this octane number is an average of the Research
octane number (R) and the Motor octane number (M): (R + M) / 2. The octane number is also
known as the Anti-Knock Index.

CAUTION! To maintain the engine's durability and performance, only premium unleaded gasoline
is to be used. If premium unleaded is not available and low octane gasoline is used, follow these
precautions:

- Partially fill the fuel tank with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with premium unleaded
gasoline as soon as possible.

- Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration. Do not exceed an engine speed of 2000 rpm if
the vehicle has a light load (two occupants and no luggage for example). Do not exceed 2/3 of
maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous
terrain.

Model years 1975 - 1985 and model year 1986 model 190 E 2.3

Use unleaded regular gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 87 min.

Model years 1972 - 1974

Use leaded or unleaded~gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 87 min. When only unleaded gasoline is being used, check the valve
clearance on engines with mechanically adjustable valves at half the recommended interval.

Pre-model year 1972

Use premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 91 min. Check the valve clearance at half the recommended interval.

2. Diesel Engines

Use only commercially available vehicular diesel fuel number 2 or number 1 (ASTM D975 Number
2-D or Number 1-D).

For information on cold weather operation, refer to the vehicle Owner's Manual or Service
Information MBNA 00/7 (11-82).
Page 48

Fuse & Relay Box Layout / Relay Identification


Locations

Fuel Filter: Locations

Fuel Pump/Fuel Accumulator/Fuel Filter Assembly

The fuel filter is located with the fuel pump assembly under the vehicle, near the right axle shaft.
Procedures
Spark Plug: Procedures
EVERY 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM)

Spark Plugs .........................................................................................................................................


....................................................................... Replace
Air Flow Sensor

Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Air Flow Sensor

Airflow Sensor Arrangement

The air flow sensor is mounted in the intake air stream between the air cleaner and throttle plate
valve. The unit consists of an air flow sensor plate, venturi funnel, and a sensor plate position
sensor. The air flow sensor plate is mechanically connected to the control plunger in the fuel
distributor, causing the plunger to rise and fall in direct relation to the amount of air entering the
engine.

Air Flow Funnel Principle

Air/fuel mixtures are also tailored to engine operating conditions by the venturi shape of the cone in
which the air flow sensor plate operates. At idle, when air flow volume is relatively low, the cone
shape increases pressure above the sensor plate, providing additional force to richen air/fuel
mixtures. At part throttle the cone design causes the sensor plate to float higher than air flow
through a straight sided cone would dictate, providing leaner mixtures for improved economy.
During full throttle operation the venturi shape increases air velocity, providing additional force on
the sensor plate and richer air/fuel mixtures for maximum power output.
Page 296

Overvoltage Protection Relay: Description and Operation 560 SL

Component Locations

The overvoltage protection relay prevents damage to the CIS-E control unit from excessive voltage
which may occur when vehicle components are switched on and off or in the event of an
overcharge to the vehicle battery.
Page 210
Exterior Lighting Module: Locations Exterior Lamp Switch
Component ID S1

Component Name Exterior lamp switch

Component Location Left side of dashboard, left of steering column


Page 246
Engine Control Module: Locations Reference Resistor (CIS-E)
Component ID R17/1

Component Name Reference resistor (CIS-E)

Component Location Right side of component compartment, in harness


Page 1493

In Case of Warranty, use the tables above.


Locations
Glove Box Lamp Switch: Locations
Component ID E13/2

Component Name Glove box lamp with switch

Component Location Top left of inside of glove box


Diagram Information and Instructions
Antenna Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 676
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Spark Plug Connector - Special Pliers

Ignition Cable: Technical Service Bulletins Spark Plug Connector - Special Pliers

REF. No. 15/43, 58/78

To: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: June 1990

SUBJECT: SPARK PLUG CONNECTOR REMOVAL PLIERS ALL GASOLINE MODELS

A special pair of pliers for removing the straight-type spark plug connectors from the spark plugs is
available as a special tool (Figure 1). The use of this tool will prevent damage to the spark plug
connectors and ignition cables when removing the spark plugs. The spark plug connectors on
4-valve engines (104, 119) with 90° offset can easily be removed by hand and therefore do not
require the use of this tool.

Special Tool Information


Locations

Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations

Component ID S62

Component Name Hood switch (ATA)

Component Location Right side of component compartment, left of battery


Page 1044
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 1151

Spark Plug: Technical Service Bulletins Spark Plug Wrench - Application and Update

REF. NO. 15/51a, 58/53

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: June 1992


Revision: This SI includes additional information in the chart on p. 2. The second copy should be
filed under Group 58.

SUBJECT: ALL MODELS CHECKING 5/8 IN. (15.8 MM) SPARK PLUG WRENCH SPECIAL
TOOL NO. 102 589 02 09 00

Use only spark plug wrench 102 589 02 09 00 with the chamfered-lip retainer magnet (arrow) for
removing or installing spark plugs. The magnet on wrenches delivered before 5/88 do not have a
chamfer. Using this wrench can cause damage at the ceramic insulator of the spark plugs. We
recommend complete replacement of this spark plug wrench.

Note:

Spark plug wrench part no. 120 589 02 09 00 cannot be used on engines 102 and 103.

There is a 1/2 in drive socket on the top of the spark plug wrench for attaching a torque wrench
when torqueing the spark plugs (20 - 30 N-m).

It is also possible to replace only the lower part of the spark plug wrench with a conversion kit
consisting of a spark plug socket, spring and pan-head screw. After the modification, change the
part number of the spark plug wrench to 120 589 02 09 00.

Special tool

Description Part Number

Spark plug wrench 120 589 02 09 00

Conversion kit for spark plug wrench 102 589 02 09 00 120 589 02 09 07
Page 166
Cruise Control Module: Service and Repair Coding Plug
The coding plug is connected to the control unit. On 190D and E models, the control unit is
attached to a plate located in the right hand front foot well. On all other models, the control unit is
located under the left hand side of the instrument panel. While compressing coding plug locking
lugs, disconnect coding plug from control unit.
Page 451
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Page 67
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Page 313
560 SEL/SEC

Overvoltage Protection Relay: Description and Operation 560 SEL/SEC

Fig. 4 CIS-E System Components

The overvoltage protection relay prevents damage to the CIS-E control unit from excessive voltage
which may occur when vehicle components are switched on and off or in the event of an
overcharge to the vehicle battery.
Page 1188
For further information refer to Camshaft, Engine : Adjustments See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Adjustments and Timing Chain :
Service and Repair See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Timing Components/Timing
Chain/Service and Repair
Page 957
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Fig. 33 Crankshaft Position Sensor

Fig. 55 EZL Control Unit

1. With the ignition "OFF" detach the crankshaft position sensor from the EZL control unit.

Fig. 26 Crankshaft Position Sensor Location

2. Remove the sensor hold-down bolt.

3. Carefully lift out the sensor and cable. Take of note of proper cable routing for reinstallation.

4. Reinstall in reverse manner.


Page 514

Symbols Part 1
Page 1598

The studs on the flange plate (Figure 2, arrow) adapter only apply pressure and contact the wheel
where the wheel lugs would normally make contact. This eliminates the possibility of physical or
cosmetic damage to the wheel.

Special Tools
Page 707

Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair

In-Car Temperature Sensor

Data

Resistance at room temperature 15 °C 15.7 k Ohms ± 0.5 k Ohms

25 °C 10 k Ohms ± 0.5 k Ohms

35 °C 6.5 k Ohms ± 0.5 k Ohms

A. Up to 06/81

Removal

Layout up to 06/81

1 Remove glove-box

2 Disconnect 2-pole coupling from interior temperature sensor (1 I.


3 Pull off vent hose.
Page 890
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation CIS-E Control
The vehicle speed sensor which is located in the instrument cluster transmits a vehicle speed
signal to the CIS-E control unit and the idle speed control unit. The idle speed control unit switches
engine idle speed control over to air flow control above a vehicle speed of approx. 0.9 mph. This
process improves vehicle driveability at slow stop-and-go speeds (prevents possible bucking). The
engine idle speed control is activated once again at vehicle speeds below 0.9 mph.
Locations

Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations

Component ID N30

Component Name ABS control unit

Component Location Center of component compartment

Component ID N30/1

Component Name ABS/ASR control unit

Component Location Center of component compartment


A/C - Warning Against Refrigerant Alaskankool R176
Refrigerant: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Warning Against Refrigerant Alaskankool R176
REF. NO. MBNA 83/37

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: July 1991

SUBJECT: WARNING AGAINST USE OF "ALASKANKOOL R 176" REFRIGERANT

This service information is to serve as a warning against the use of an air conditioning refrigerant R
12 substitute known as "AlaskanKool R 176".

This product is promoted as being a CFC replacement refrigerant, and is claimed to have superior
qualities as compared to R 12 refrigerant.

Initial findings of the Technical Committee of the Association of International Automobile


Manufacturers indicate that the use of this R 176 refrigerant causes serious damage to air
conditioning systems, including Mercedes-Benz. Therefore, its use in any form in the servicing of
our air conditioning systems is strictly not authorized.

It is requested that you ensure that this refrigerant is not used in any manner in the repair and
servicing of Mercedes-Benz vehicles in your service department.
Page 408
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Diagram Information and Instructions
Compressor Clutch Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 407

Symbols Part 1
Page 1407
For rear axle differential (For limited slip see below), and for refilling 4MATIC front differential.
MB Hypoid Gear Oil MB part no. 000 989 28 03

HYPOID GEAR OIL

For limited slip differential and rear axle with ASD, 4MATIC

MB Limited Slip Differential Oil MB part no. 000 583 09 04

HYPOID GEAR OIL

For initial (new) fill of 4MATIC front differential

MB Life-long hypoid gear oil MB part no. 001 989 05 03

MANUAL TRANSMISSION FLUID

For MB manual transmission

MB Manual Transmission Fluid MB part no. 000 989 26 03

STEERING GEAR LUBRICANT

For power steering

MB Power Steering Fluid MB part no. 000 989 88 33

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

For MB automatic transmission (not including MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6),
transfer case (4MATIC), and MB manual transmission (except GL76/30-5 and GL275E) use:

Castrol Dexron-III/Mercon ATF F-30341 Castrol Transmax M-22257 / 22096 Chevron ATF Dexron
III F-30108 / 30159 Citgo Multi-Purpose ATF D-21571 Exxon Superflo ATF Dexron-III F-30111
Havoline ATF Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Pennzoil, ATF D-21380 Pennzoil, ATF F-30110 Quaker
State Dexron-III/Mercon F-30161 Sunoco ATF Dexron-III/Mercon F-30176 Texaco ATF
Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Unocal Multi-Purpose ATF D-22413 / 22431 Valvoline ATF Type D

Supplier Information: Castrol, Piscataway, NJ / Toronto, Canada Chevron Products Co., San
Francisco CA Citgo Petroleum Corp., Tulsa, OK Exxon Company USA, Houston, TX Texaco
Lubricants Co., Houston, TX Pennzoil Products Co., Houston, TX Quaker State, Seneca, PA Sun
Co., Philadelphia, PA Unocal Science and Technology Div., Brea, CA Valvoline International,
Lexington, KY

For MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6 and Model 163 transfer case use:

MB Automatic Transmission Fluid MB part no. 001 989 21 03 10

SUPERCHARGER OIL

MB Supercharger Oil MB part no. 000 989 6201


Wheel - Balancer Adapters and Flange Plate

Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheel - Balancer Adapters and Flange Plate

Date: August 1998

Order No.: S-SI-MBNA-40/26A, 58/82A

Supersedes: S-SI-MBNA-40/26, 58/82, July 1995

Group: 40, 58

Revision: Updated to include information for winter steel wheels

SUBJECT: ALL MODELS WITH LIGHT ALLOY WHEELS, STEEL WHEELS FOR WINTER TIRES
CENTERING ADAPTERS FOR WHEEL BALANCERS DUO-EXPERT AND FLANGE PLATE

Suspension systems have become more complex, wheel/tire combinations more unique and
therefore, more sensitive to wheel/tire imbalance. Repeatability in off-vehicle wheel balancing has
always been an important factor. With most any wheel balancer, a technician can mount and
balance a wheel to zero, given weights in 1 gram increments. While a wheel may seem perfectly
balanced, the true test is to rotate the wheel on the balancer shaft 90, 180 and 270 degrees and
have the wheel balance out to zero each time. when this is possible, then perfect balance can be
assured. To accomplish this, accurate centering of the wheel on the balancer shaft is necessary.

For off-vehicle wheel balancing MBNA strongly recommends that all original equipment, light alloy
wheels and steel wheels for winter tires mounted on Mercedes-Benz vehicles, be balanced using
balancing equipment as recommended in the MB Standard Service Equipment Program catalog.
Additionally, it is required that Mercedes-Benz dealers equip balancing equipment with MB special
centering tools, the DUO-EXPERT centering adapter and corresponding flange plate adapter. By
replacing the previously used backcone and pressure cup with these centering tools, an accurate
location of the wheel/tire assembly onto the wheel balancer shaft of the wheel balancer is
consistently assured. This will determine the repeatability and ultimate quality of the balancing
operation. By using the DUO-EXPERT adapter and flange plate adapter as a set, near perfect
repeatability can be achieved.

The DUO-EXPERT adapter (Figure 1, arrow) is a two piece, hub-centric, expanding inner and outer
collet system. The two machined collets are held together with a flat elastic band.

The DUO-EXPERT adapter is first slipped onto the balancer shaft. Then the wheel/tire assembly is
slipped onto the balancer shaft, seating the wheel hub securely against the DUO-EXPERT adapter.
The flange plate adapter along with the wing nut are tightened against the wheel/tire assembly. The
collets of the DUO-EXPERT adapter expand against each other to secure the adapter to the shalt
and the wheel to the adapter.
Locations
Seat Heater Switch: Locations
Component ID S51/1

Component Name Left front seat heater switch

Component Location Center console

Component ID S51/2

Component Name

Right front seat heater switch

Component Location Center console


Page 743
123 (as of M.Y. 1981) 000 420 95 20 05 Jurid 226 not asbestos free
126.043/044 001 420 80 20 Textar 424

129 001 420 98 20 Jurid 524

124.051

201 (except .034) 002 420 02 20 Pagid 525 Replacement pad for 001 420 81 20 05 Production pad
as of 2/90

Rear Brake Pads

Model Part Number Material Comments

107 001 420 06 20 Textar 422

126 optional with

123 (as of M.Y. 1981) 001 420 93 20 Jurid 525

124.026/030/050 000 420 98 20 Textar 460

124.128/133/230 201.034

124.051/090/193/290 001 420 95 20 Textar 401

129

201 (except .034) 001 420 01 20 Textar 421 Production pad

001 420 01 20 05 Textar 421 (40T) Replacement pad (up to 2/90 production) for "Brake squealing
while backing up" complaints

ONLY.

Rear Brake Pads (ASR)

Model Part Number Material Comments

124.0 002 420 01 20 Textar 460

126.0 001 420 73 20 Textar 422

201.029 002 420 00 20 Textar 421

Brake Shoes, Parking Brake

Model Part Number

107,123,126 126 420 01 20

124,129,201 124 420 05 20


Page 395
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 41
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Page 75

Component ID N25/4

Component Name Right rear seat heater relay

Component Location Behind right side of rear seat


Page 397

Seat Belt Control Module: Description and Operation

Vehicles up to 09/87:
The control unit, also referred to as the triggering unit or crash sensor, is responsible for
determining the severity of a collision and, if necessary, triggering the restraint system at the
correct time.

General:

Two integrated circuits are accommodated together with an acceleration sensor in a common
housing.

The housing and the electrical connections have been designed in such a way as to virtually
exclude any malfunctions due to electrical interference in the vehicle electrical system caused by
the switching of various electrical consumer components on and off, and by electromagnetic
interference on public highways.

Function

The electronic control unit processes the deceleration of the vehicle during a frontal collision and
must therefore be rigidly coupled with the vehicle.

Incorrect triggerings are avoided by means of an integral mercury switch which interrupts the
ignition circuits of the airbag and belt tensioner restraint system during normal driving, and by a
predetermined deceleration threshold (as).

The acceleration sensor (1) in the control unit records the deceleration or acceleration acting on the
vehicle on the longitudinal direction. and generates a signal. This signal is sent via the high-pass
filter (2) to the amplifier (3) which adapts the signal strength to the following processing stages. The
acceleration signal is restricted in the limiter (4) and is reduced by a constant acceleration
threshold (as) in a subtractor circuit (5).

The integrator (6) then integrates the signal produced and passes it on to the trigger switch (7) for
evaluation. If the fixed triggering speed V is exceeded, the output stages (20) are activated. This
effects triggering of the driver's airbag and the belt tensioners by means of the detonators (19)
when the test cycle is complete. An additional precaution against incorrect triggering is a mercury
switch (18) installed in the control unit. The control unit also contains a further circuit to monitor the
ignition circuits and to perform its own function check. Malfunctions are indicated by the warning
lamp (21).
Page 52

Circuit Identification
Control Unit
Cruise Control Module: Service and Repair Control Unit
1. Disable airbag system, refer to MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES/AIRBAG ARMING &
DISARMING.

2. Remove left hand side instrument panel undercover, if equipped.

3. Disconnect electrical connector from control unit.

4. Remove control unit to pedal bracket attaching screws, then remove control unit.

5. Reverse procedure to install.


Page 1028
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 452
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Diagram Information and Instructions
Seat Belt Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Specifications
Oil Pressure Sender: Specifications
Oil Pressure Sending Unit

Pressure (bar) Resistance (ohm)

0 approx. 10

1 approx. 69

2 approx. 129

3 approx. 184

Resistance values of pressure transmitter in dependance of prevailing pressure.


Page 811

Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Mixture Control Unit

Mixture Control Unit

The mixture control unit consists of the air-flow sensor, CIS-E fuel distributor and the air guide
housing. Incoming air deflects the plate of the air-flow sensor which actuates the plunger within the
CIS-E fuel distributor. The position of the plunger determines the quantity of fuel required. The air
guide housing directs the measured air through the throttle valve housing and to the intake system.
Seat Heater Relay

Seat Heater Relay: Locations Seat Heater Relay

Component ID N25/1

Component Name Left front seat heater relay

Component Location Below left front seat

Component ID N25/2

Component Name Right front seat heater relay

Component Location

Below right front seat


Component ID N25/3

Component Name Left rear seat heater relay

Component Location Behind left side of rear seat


Page 1202

The plate (stop) with enlarged adjustment a = 43.5 mm, previously 40.5 mm. facilitates fitting the
V-belt to the air pump.

Production breakpoint: June 1990


Capacity Specifications

Coolant: Capacity Specifications

Total Capacity of Cooling System with Heater 13.5 L

Percentage of anticorrosion/antifreeze for protection down to: -30 deg C 50 %

6.75 liters antifreeze/6.75 liters water

-45 deg C 55 %

Approximately 7.5 liters antifreeze/6 liters water


Page 1023

Circuit Identification
Page 617

Symbols Part 1
Page 268
Fig. 57 CIS-E I/O Diagram
The CIS-E control unit evaluates information provided by various sensors concerning the engine
operating conditions,

Fig. 9 CIS-E Control Unit


Page 1182
Connect the terminals identified with arrows.
Testing
Page 1481
Page 1246
FLUID GREASE (NLGI Class 00)
For door lock pin and striker eye

Castrol CLS Grease Castrol, Wayne, NJ / Toronto, Canada

HIGH TEMPERATURE ROLLER BEARING GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For front wheel bearings

MB High Temperature Antifriction Bearing MB part no. 001 989 23 51 10 Grease

CHASSIS GREASE (NLGI Class 01)

For all greasing points except front wheel hubs

Shell Retinax C Shell Oil Co., Houston, TX

LONG TERM LUBRICATING GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For release bearing, release arm and splines for connecting linkage on level control valves

Molykote Longterm 2 Plus Dow Corning

MB Long Term Grease MB part no. 000 989 63 51

MULTI-PURPOSE GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For all greasing points except front wheel

3752 Almagard Vari-Purpose Lubricant Lubrication Engineers Inc., Fort Worth, TX

Castrol LM Grease Castrol, Wayne, NJ / Toronto, Canada

Exxon Multipurpose Grease Exxon Co., Houston, TX

Renolit MP Fuchs Oil Corp., Somerville, NJ

Unocal MP Automotive Grease Union Oil Company of California, Brea, CA

COMPLEX GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For sliding blocks of sliding/pop-up roof

MB Lubrication Paste MB part no. 001 989 46 51

HYDRAULIC OIL

For hydraulic system, Model 600

MB Hydraulic Oil MB part no. 100 890 O0 11

HYDRAULIC OIL

For load leveling system, hydropneumatic suspension, hydraulic soft top, 4MATIC, ASD

MB Hydraulic Oil MB part no. 000 989 91 03 10

HYDRAULIC OIL

For tandem pumps with common oil reservoir for steering and level control in Model 210.

MB Hydraulic Oil MB part no. 000 989 20 03 10


ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

MB Anti-Corrosion/Anti-freeze MB part no. Q 1 03 0002

CAUTION! The use of aluminum components in M-B engines requires that


anti-corrosion/anti-freeze specifically formulated to protect aluminum
Page 293

B. Engine Wiring Harness

Models 107, 124, 126, 201

Engine wiring harnesses will now only be available with a 7-pole connection for the overvoltage
protection relay.

When installing a new engine harness with a 7-pole connection into a vehicle with either a 4- or
5-pole connection, it is necessary to also replace the overvoltage protection relay and the bracket
for the control units.

Note:

On models with ABS, connect the voltage supply line for the ABS control unit to terminal 7 of the
separate 3-pole connector of the overvoltage protection relay connector (Figure 6).

The cable connector of the removed bracket for the control units is to be replaced with a new cable
connector and secured with cable straps to other cables in the component compartment behind the
battery (Figure 7)
Parts Information
Page 951
3 Unscrew hex, head nut (arrow) and pull out TDC transmitter.
4 Screw adapter into the spark plug bore of No. 1 cylinder.

Insert adjusting pin (1) into the adapter and push down fully.
Page 528

Symbols Part 1
Air Flow Sensor Plate

Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Air Flow Sensor Plate

Air Flow Sensor Plate Adjustment

1. Remove the air cleaner assembly.

2. Remove the sensor plate stop bracket.

3. Heat the sensor plate mounting screw with a heat gun and remove the screw.

CAUTION:The sensor plate mounting screw is secured with a locking sealant. If it is not heated
prior to removal it make break!

4. Remove the sensor plate.

5. Clean the threads of the sensor plate screw bore with a (6 mm) tap.

6. Reinstall the sensor plate.

7. Adjust the sensor plate. Refer to ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES for centering and height
adjustment.

8. Reinstall the stop bracket and air cleaner assembly.


Page 267
Fig. 9 CIS-E Control Unit
and from the information generates a control signal for the electro-hydraulic actuator. The
electro-hydraulic actuator regulates pressure in the lower chambers of the CIS-E fuel distributor
which provides for the optimal fuel quantity required by the engine. Furthermore, the CIS-E control
unit provides an output signal for operation of the fuel pump relay, air injection relay, diagnostic
socket (air/fuel mixture information), "CHECK ENGINE" light operation, and the on-board
diagnostic system. The control unit also incorporates a malfunction memory. All exhaust emission
relevant components of the CIS-E injection system and of the EGR system are monitored by the
CIS-E control unit.

Fig. 61 Diagnostic Connector

Malfunctions resulting from open or short circuits or failure of one of these components is stored in
control unit memory and is indicated by the "CHECK ENGINE" light at the instrument cluster.
Recall of the fault memory is accomplished by use of the on-board diagnostic test connector. See
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING PROCEDURES.

Federal Models
Page 1198
V-belt A Coolant Pump - Power Steering Pump
1 Loosen nuts (1,2 and 3 [pivot point]), on power steering pump bracket.

2 Tension V-belt with tension screw (arrow)

3 Tighten nuts(1,2 and 3).

V-belt B Alternator
Page 616

Circuit Identification
Page 1443
Steps 1 - 8
Page 607
1.0 hr. | 50/70
02-3325 Front wheel speed sensor - right, Repl.

0.7 hr. | 25/80

(from previous to modified version) 0.8 hr. | 40

1.0 hr. | 50/70

Damage Code

43123 .. Speed sensor, front axle (ABS)

Please select proper damage type coding from topic 42.04 of microfiche

S.I. 33/27a
Page 948
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Fig. 33 Crankshaft Position Sensor

The crankshaft position sensor registers the crankshaft position and engine speed. The position
sensor is mounted to the crankcase above the starter flange.

Fig. 26 Crankshaft Position Sensor Location

The sensor body projects through the crankcase very near to the segments on the flywheel/drive
plate. There is no contact between the segments and the position sensor.

Fig. 28 Ring Gear Position Segments

With the engine running, the four segments which are positioned 90° apart pass by the position
sensor. Due to induction, an alternating voltage is generated in the position sensor. The peak
voltage is approx. 1.5 volts at starting speed. The voltage rises with increasing speed to approx. 3
volts at 1200 rpm.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 581

Circuit Identification
Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
Electronic Brake Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
Bosch - ABS2

35 Position ECU Plug

For Terminal ID refer to "Brakes and Traction Control : Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction
Control : Electronic Brake Control Module : Diagrams".

Voltage Measurements

Grounds

Ignition Switch

Overvoltage Protection Relay

Alternator Monitor Input

Pump Motor Relay


Page 1491
Page 82

Circuit Identification
Electrical Specifications
Oxygen Sensor: Electrical Specifications
Oxygen Sensor Heater Resistance......................................................................................................
..........................................3 ohms (cold) 13 ohms (hot) Oxygen Sensor Operating Voltage (engine
running)...........................................................................................................................................0.4
- 1.0 volts Oxygen Sensor Heating Element current draw....................................................................
.....................................................................................0.5 - 1.3 A

Tune-up Specifications

Firing Order..........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................1-5-4-8-6-3-7-2 Idle Speed........................................................
............................................................................................................................................500-600
RPM [1] Timing.....................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................5 ±2° BTDC [2] Air/fuel Mixture.....................................
...............................................................................................................................................Readout
oscillating [3]

[1] Automatic Transmission in Drive [2] Reference figure at cranking speed only, not adjustable [3]
At Diagnostic socket, with on/off ratio tester, and O2 sensor connected
Page 1245
For rear axle differential (For limited slip see below), and for refilling 4MATIC front differential.
MB Hypoid Gear Oil MB part no. 000 989 28 03

HYPOID GEAR OIL

For limited slip differential and rear axle with ASD, 4MATIC

MB Limited Slip Differential Oil MB part no. 000 583 09 04

HYPOID GEAR OIL

For initial (new) fill of 4MATIC front differential

MB Life-long hypoid gear oil MB part no. 001 989 05 03

MANUAL TRANSMISSION FLUID

For MB manual transmission

MB Manual Transmission Fluid MB part no. 000 989 26 03

STEERING GEAR LUBRICANT

For power steering

MB Power Steering Fluid MB part no. 000 989 88 33

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

For MB automatic transmission (not including MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6),
transfer case (4MATIC), and MB manual transmission (except GL76/30-5 and GL275E) use:

Castrol Dexron-III/Mercon ATF F-30341 Castrol Transmax M-22257 / 22096 Chevron ATF Dexron
III F-30108 / 30159 Citgo Multi-Purpose ATF D-21571 Exxon Superflo ATF Dexron-III F-30111
Havoline ATF Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Pennzoil, ATF D-21380 Pennzoil, ATF F-30110 Quaker
State Dexron-III/Mercon F-30161 Sunoco ATF Dexron-III/Mercon F-30176 Texaco ATF
Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Unocal Multi-Purpose ATF D-22413 / 22431 Valvoline ATF Type D

Supplier Information: Castrol, Piscataway, NJ / Toronto, Canada Chevron Products Co., San
Francisco CA Citgo Petroleum Corp., Tulsa, OK Exxon Company USA, Houston, TX Texaco
Lubricants Co., Houston, TX Pennzoil Products Co., Houston, TX Quaker State, Seneca, PA Sun
Co., Philadelphia, PA Unocal Science and Technology Div., Brea, CA Valvoline International,
Lexington, KY

For MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6 and Model 163 transfer case use:

MB Automatic Transmission Fluid MB part no. 001 989 21 03 10

SUPERCHARGER OIL

MB Supercharger Oil MB part no. 000 989 6201


Page 150
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Page 326
Page 1096
Test Steps 6.0 - 7.1
Note: Distributor line for idle air

Modified shape of distributor line with additional longitudinal rib on inside (arrow) for distributing idle
air.
Page 307
Air Injection Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection
See TESTING PROCEDURES in EMISSION CONTROLS.
Page 864
Oxygen Sensor: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
Oxygen Sensor Operating Temperature
...................................................................................................................................... 660 - 1560°F
(350 - 850°C)

EGR Temperature Sensor Fault Signal [1]...........................................................................................


.............................................................248°F (120°C)

. [1] At normal operating temperatures, the CIS-E control unit will

recognize an EGR temperature < 248°F as a fault.


Airbag - Production Modification SRS Control Unit

Air Bag Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Airbag - Production Modification SRS Control
Unit

REF. NO. 91/43

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: April 1990

SUBJECT: A.

MODIFIED SRS CONTROL UNIT

B. SRS CONTROL UNIT PARTS PROCUREMENT

C. REVISED SRS TEST CARD

MODELS 107, 124, 126, 129, AND 201

A. Modified Control Unit

As of July 1989, only SRS control units with a reed contact switch, instead of the previous mercury
switch, are installed. (The mercury switch or reed switch functions as a mechanical "safing sensor"
and must close before the electronic sensing system can trigger a deployment).

The modified control units are recognizable by the raised oval on the control unit housing (1, Figure
1).

Important Note:
Defective control units with the raised oval which are out-of-warranty may be discarded without
further precautions.

Defective control units without the raised oval (mercury switch) must be returned to MBNA,
Warranty Inspection regardless of whether or not warranty is still in effect. Federal law prohibits the
disposal of any mercury product (except as a toxic waste), even in such small quantities as
contained in the control unit's mercury switch. MBNA will assume the responsibility of toxic waste
disposal after the mercury has been recovered from the control units. In-warranty units will be
requested for return by MBNA via the Parts Return Request form. Dealers should collect
out-of-warranty warranty units and periodically ship them to MBNA, Warranty Receiving
Department.

Control units with the raised oval which are under warranty shall be returned in the usual manner.

B. SRS Control Unit Parts Procurement


Page 114
Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation
This solid-state component evaluates wheel speed signals, and calculates allowable wheel slip for
optimum braking. In order to determine optimum wheel slip precentages the ECU monitors inputs
from the wheel speed sensors, brake switch, pump relay, and hydraulic modulator solenoids. After
making this calculation, it controls wheel circuit hydraulic pressure. When a wheel sensor signals
excessive wheel deceleration (imminent lockup), the ECU first sends a signal that tells the
hydraulic modulator to isolate that hydraulic wheel circuit. If excessive wheel deceleration
continues, the ECU signals the hydraulic modulator to reduce the hydraulic pressure in that wheel
circuit. After reducing pressure, the wheel accelerates; when acceleration reaches a preset level,
the ECU signals the hydraulic modulator to increase wheel circuit pressure. This action again
causes wheel deceleration, and the control cycle begins over. In addition to being the "brain" of the
ABS, the ECU tests and monitors itself and the anti-lock system using a defined program.
Page 541
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
ASD Valve

Traction Control Module: Locations ASD Valve

Component ID Y38

Component Name ASD valve

Component Location Rear underside of car, next to fuel pump


Page 299

Test Connections

Schematic
Page 1397

2. If A/C compressor binding is not present. fill A/C system with fresh recycled refrigerant and
perform refrigerant leak test. (Figure 1).

CAUTION:

Observe specifications on Fill Capacity Label.

3. Check for proper operation of A/C system.

Models 124, 129 If parts require replacement, only R134a-type components are to be installed.

Models 107, 126, 201 If the A/C lines, condenser or evaporator require replacement, please
continue with "C. Removal of Mineral Oil from A/C System".

Note:

If replacing the A/C compressor, use a compressor designed for refrigerant R134a if available. If a
R134a compressor is not available as a spare part, be certain to drain the mineral oil from the new
R12 compressor prior to installation.

CAUTION:

In this case, do not refill A/C system with R12, please continue with "D. Replacing Receiver Drier".

C. Removal of Mineral Oil from A/C System

Note:

During the conversion to R134a refrigerant, it is important to remove as much mineral oil from the
A/C system as possible.
Locations
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations
Component ID B17/2

Component Name Intake air temperature sensor (CIS-E)

Component Location Left side of air filter intake


Page 688

Air Conditioning Switch: Service and Repair

SWITCH FOR AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM (STARTING 07/81)

Removal:

1. Unclip springs at bottom and top on switch by means of a flat, wedge shaped tool and pull out
switch. 2. Pull coupling from switch.

Installation:

3. Press coupling on switch and insert switch into cover.


Page 1051
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Locations
A/C - Bear R12/R134a Leak Detector Modified
Refrigerant: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Bear R12/R134a Leak Detector Modified
REF.NO.: MBNA 58/60, 83/4

DATE: February 1993

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

SUBJECT: BEAR ELECTRONIC REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTOR FOR R12 AND R134a

Via the Mercedes-Benz Standard Equipment Program, Bear Automotive has sold an electronic
refrigerant leak detector which is applicable for use with both R12 and R134a automotive
refrigerant. These units were sold under model number HI-134a, and were sold together with
extension probe model HI-135.

Some early-version units (identified by a yellow colored case) of this model may have displayed
either a lack of sensitivity or what were interpreted as false signals. These conditions were due to
the extreme sensitivity of this unit to proper adjustment by the operator. Consequently, the
manufacturer has redesigned the unit to eliminate this over-sensitivity to adjustment, thereby
enhancing its effectiveness/accuracy. This redesigned unit can be identified by its black colored
case.

Presently, the manufacturer is making a one-time offer to exchange the earlier version units (yellow
colored case) for the later version units (black colored case) at no charge to any Mercedes-Benz
dealer.

NOTE:

This offer is only valid through April 1, 1993.

The extension probe, model HI-135, should he included with the returned leak detector. It will be
tested and returned together with the new version leak detector.

The subject leak detector should be sent prepaid/insured to:

Hitech Instruments 40 McLean Road Brevard, NC 28712-9989

Attn: Customer Service Department

Mercedes-Benz Desk

Please allow three weeks for delivery.


Page 705

Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation

In-Car Temperature Sensor Location

In-Car Temperature Sensor

PURPOSE

The in-car (interior) temperature sensor, which is located in the overhead lamp, sends interior
temperature information to the push-button control unit.

CONSTRUCTION

The in-car temperature sensor is a negative temperature coefficient (NTC) type resistor. As the
surrounding temperature increases the resistance decreases.

OPERATION

When the ignition is switched "ON", a blower aspirator pulls interior air across the surface of the
sensor element. The passing air produces a resistance value in the sensor. The resulting current
flow in the sensor circuit is recognized by the ACC control unit as a measurement of the interior air
temperature. The constant air flow past the sensor, produced by the blower aspirator, increases the
accuracy of the ACC system.
Page 1052
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Page 234

Fuse & Relay Box Layout / Relay Identification


Page 480
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 530
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Locations
Panel Illumination Control Module: Locations
Behind Instrument Cluster
Page 757
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 373
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 648
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Page 1288
FLUID GREASE (NLGI Class 00)
For door lock pin and striker eye

Castrol CLS Grease Castrol, Wayne, NJ / Toronto, Canada

HIGH TEMPERATURE ROLLER BEARING GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For front wheel bearings

MB High Temperature Antifriction Bearing MB part no. 001 989 23 51 10 Grease

CHASSIS GREASE (NLGI Class 01)

For all greasing points except front wheel hubs

Shell Retinax C Shell Oil Co., Houston, TX

LONG TERM LUBRICATING GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For release bearing, release arm and splines for connecting linkage on level control valves

Molykote Longterm 2 Plus Dow Corning

MB Long Term Grease MB part no. 000 989 63 51

MULTI-PURPOSE GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For all greasing points except front wheel

3752 Almagard Vari-Purpose Lubricant Lubrication Engineers Inc., Fort Worth, TX

Castrol LM Grease Castrol, Wayne, NJ / Toronto, Canada

Exxon Multipurpose Grease Exxon Co., Houston, TX

Renolit MP Fuchs Oil Corp., Somerville, NJ

Unocal MP Automotive Grease Union Oil Company of California, Brea, CA

COMPLEX GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For sliding blocks of sliding/pop-up roof

MB Lubrication Paste MB part no. 001 989 46 51

HYDRAULIC OIL

For hydraulic system, Model 600

MB Hydraulic Oil MB part no. 100 890 O0 11

HYDRAULIC OIL

For load leveling system, hydropneumatic suspension, hydraulic soft top, 4MATIC, ASD

MB Hydraulic Oil MB part no. 000 989 91 03 10

HYDRAULIC OIL

For tandem pumps with common oil reservoir for steering and level control in Model 210.

MB Hydraulic Oil MB part no. 000 989 20 03 10


ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

MB Anti-Corrosion/Anti-freeze MB part no. Q 1 03 0002

CAUTION! The use of aluminum components in M-B engines requires that


anti-corrosion/anti-freeze specifically formulated to protect aluminum
Front Power Seat Control Unit
Power Seat Control Module: Locations Front Power Seat Control Unit
Component ID N32/2

Component Name Right front power seat control unit (with memory)

Component Location Below right front seat

Component ID N32/3

Component Name Left front power seat control unit (with memory and steering column adjustment)

Component Location Below left front seat


Page 1446

F. Filling A/C System with R134a Refrigerant

1. Evacuate AC system using air conditioning service equipment.

2. Fill AC compressor with PAG oil, note fill capacity in image.

3. Fill AC system with refrigerant R134a, note fill capacity in image.

4. Run engine at idle speed for approx. 3 minutes.

G. Affixing R134a Fill Label

1. Using a permanent marking pen, note fill capacities of R134a refrigerant and PAG oil in the
appropriate boxes of the R134a Fill Label, along with the conversion date (Figure 8).

2. Affix R134a Fill Capacity Label over the existing label.

H. Performing Final Function Test of A/C System. 1. Perform final function and leak test of the A/C
system to verify proper function of the entire A/C system.
Tools - Oil Evacuation Equipment

Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Tools - Oil Evacuation Equipment

REF. NO. MBNA 00/65, 58/95

TO: ALL MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: July 1997

SUBJECT: ALL MODELS OIL EVACUATION EQUIPMENT

Mercedes-Benz engines are designed to allow engine oil extraction from under the hood via the
dipstick tube. The dipstick tube has an enlarged cross section and a formed extension at the top
end. On the other side it ends a short distance from the oil pan bottom. Engine oil can be extracted
using the dipstick tube.

Note:

Inserting tubular probes through the dipstick tube is NOT recommended.

Engine oil drain plugs will continue for the time being, although access to them may only be
possible with the removal of engine compartment trim or noise encapsulation panels.

A pneumatic oil suction unit, manufactured by Deutsche Tecalemit in Germany, is approved by


DBAG for use with M-B engines. The unit has recently been added to the MBNA Standard
Equipment Program and is available for order in the USA via the sole importer/distributor: AGA,
Inc. of Bettendorf, IA.

This portable unit (Figure 1) utilizes the suction principle via an air-powered piston pump. The
engine oil extraction is accomplished by connecting a specialized Suction Adapter from the unit to
the dipstick tube.
Additionally, a variety of flexible probes and fittings are also supplied for other oil removal
applications e.g. power steering reservoir, rear axle, etc. Waste oil collected in the tank of the unit
can be emptied using the unit's pump.

Features of this unit are as follows:

^ Portable and compact (21"x 40"x 35" W.H.D)

^ Cart mounted on 4 wheels (2 are locking castors).

^ 80 liter (21 gallon) waste oil tank (+ overflow indicator)

^ Adapters and fittings for other oil and non aggressive liquid removal applications.

^ Oil extraction rate @ 1.4 gal/min.

^ Automatic shut-off at the end of extraction cycle.

Note:

- Unit is powered by standard shop air supply. 87 PSI (6 Bar) min. pressure needed.
Electrical - Electrostatic Discharge Damage Prevention
Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Electrostatic
Discharge Damage Prevention
Date: March 23, 2011

Order No: S-B-54.00/238

Group: 54

SUBJECT: MY-All, All Models

Preventing Damage to Electronic Components Due to Electrostatic Discharge

Warning!

Every contact and each physical separation of material or any movement of solid substance, fluids
or particulate loaded gases can generate electrostatic charges. Plastic generally produces the
highest electrostatic charge.

The following electronic components listed as an example can be damaged by ESD:

- Airbag components

- Control units, in particular their bus connections: Control Area Network (data bus/CAN bus)
(CAN), local interconnect network (LIN), etc.

- Sensors

- Antenna amplifier

- Receivers and displays (Radio, TV, GPS, telephone, etc.)

- Multifunction antenna assembly

Safety precautions:

- Avoidance of contact with electrostatic chargeable materials such as PE, PVC, Styrofoam.

- Use only original packaging or specially labeled and defined packaging and transport materials.

- Electronic components which have been removed must be put down on an ESD workplace.
(Example: when swapping the painted cover from one multifunction antenna to another, this must
be performed on an ESD table mat (000 589 52 98 000).

- Touch connectors on electronic components and wiring harness on the housing only. Do not
touch the pins and contacts!

- Electronic components must be installed before they are connected so that potential equalization
with the body can take place.

Returning electronic components in warranty and goodwill cases:

When returning electronic components it is absolutely essential to observe the procedure and
safety precautions listed in WIS doc. AH54.00-P-0001-01A. Electrostatic charge or discharge
means the original fault can be falsified or overlaid. This can lead to distorted faults symptoms in
the case of the fault analysis of the component concerned.
Page 1444
Figures 2 and 3
9. Refill recycled R12 once again into A/C system.

10. Operate A/C system again, as in above steps 7-13 for approx. 10 minutes.

CAUTION:

Should the A/C compressor become noisy, stop engine and continue with "D. Replacing Receiver
Drier.

11. Using air conditioning service equipment, evacuate the R12 at high. and low-pressure sides (A,
Figure 2 and B, Figure 3) of A/C system for 45 minutes.

Note:

A/C service equipment should be able to pull at least 29.2" of vacuum.

CAUTION:

At this point, R12 is not be used in A/C system again.

D. Replacing Receiver/Drier Please see SMS, Repair Instructions, Job No 83-540.

E. Installation of Service Valves

CAUTION:

Prior to the installation of the angled service valve (Figure 6) or adapter hose (4, Figure 7) the
existing Schrader valve core (arrow, Figure 4) located in A/C line must be removed.
Page 1027
Power Window Switch: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Specifications
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Specifications
In-Car Temperature Sensor

TEST DATA: Sensor Temperature [1] .................................................................................................


.............................................................................. Resistance [2]

+10 ......................................................................................................................................................
............................................................ 18.2 to 21.5 +15 .....................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. 15.3 to
17.2 +20 ..............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................... 11.5 to 13.5 +25 .............................................................
....................................................................................................................................................... 9.5
to 10.5 +30 ..........................................................................................................................................
............................................................................ 7.5 to 8.5 +35 .........................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
6.0 to 7.0 +40 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................ 4.5 to 5.5 +45 .....................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
... 3.5 to 4.5

__________________________________ [1]: in °C [2]: in kOhms


Page 187

Audible Warning Device Control Module: Locations Warning Buzzer Contact, Exterior
Lamps/Central Locking System

Component ID

S5/2

Component Name Warning buzzer contact, exterior lamps/central locking system

Component Location part of S2/1, S2/2


Page 585
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Diagram Information and Instructions
Wiper Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 1103
Test Page 3
Page 1162

Spark Plug: Removal and Replacement

Spark View

1. Loosen the spark plug connectors by turning right and left and pull off of the spark plug.

2. Blow the spark plug recesses with compressed air.

3. With an appropriate spark plug socket wrench remove the spark plugs.

4. Reinstall the spark plugs in reverse manner. Torque the spark plugs to 14.5 ft. lbs. (20 Nm).
Locations

Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Locations

"CHECK ENGINE" Light

LOCATION

The check engine light is located in the instrument panel.


MIL ON ON/OFF Ratio Unadjustable After Repair Work
Oxygen Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins MIL ON ON/OFF Ratio Unadjustable After Repair
Work
Page 119
Wheel Speed Sensors
Ohms Measurements

Main Hydraulic Valve

Inlet Solenoid Valves

Outlet Solenoid Valves

ABS Main Relay Coil

ABS Main Relay Coil

Grounds
Page 1528

Fuse & Relay Box Layout / Relay Identification


Page 783
Dome Lamp Switch: Locations Rear Dome Lamp Switch
Component ID S18

Component Name Rear dome lamp switch

Component Location Center console, above radio


Page 860
Oxygen Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins O2 Sensors - Avoiding Bogus Test Results
TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: May 1990

SUBJECT: O2 SENSOR REPLACEMENT ENGINE 103, 116, 117 STARTING MODEL YEAR 1986
ENGINE 102 STARTING MODEL YEAR 1987

REF.NO. MBNA 07.3/11 In a recent test of returned warranty parts, almost 60% of the tested 02
sensors were not defective.

It is therefore important to check the sensor and sensor circuit according to the O2 Sensor Signal
and Heater Test in the Diagnostic Manual.

Additionally, we would like to point out that it is very important to check the following before testing
and/or replacing an O2 Sensor.

1. Before testing the O2 Sensor, make sure that the ground connection is OK. Loosen and
retighten the O2 Sensor. Retighten the exhaust flange and manifold and check and clean, if
necessary, all ground connections between engine and chassis.

2. Do not test O2 sensor after a long engine idle period.

3. Make sure engine is at operating temperature.

To avoid false readouts, a tester with an input impedance of greater than one megaohm must be
used (Sun DMM5, Fluke 23). There are many testers on the market which are not up to this
standard and can cause false readouts and unnecessary replacement of oxygen sensors.
Air Flow Sensor Position Indicator
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Air Flow Sensor Position Indicator
Component ID B2

Component Name Air flow sensor position indicator

Component Location part of B2/1, front of airflow sensor housing (Gasoline)

Component ID B2

Component Name Air flow sensor position indicator


Page 835

6 Remove adjusting pin.

Clamp dial gauge in position with a preload of approx. 5 mm.

Rotate crankshaft and accurately adjust TDC with the dial gauge.

Turn dia gauge scale until the pointer is at 0.


Page 325
Page 917
Component Location Lower right front of engine compartment (Diesel)
Page 398
1 Acceleration sensor 2 High-pass filter 3 Amplifier 4 Limiter 5 Subtractor circuit 6 Integrator 7
Trigger switch 8 Voltage monitoring 9 Switch-on delay 10 Logic circuit 11 Ignition circuit monitoring
12 Fault memory 13 Voltage transformer 14 Reserve power source 15 Reserve power source
monitoring 16 Sequence control system 17 Output stage monitoring 18 Mercury switch 19
Detonators for aibag and belt tensioner generators 20 Output stages 21 Warning lamp 22 Test
switch

Vehicles From 09/87 or 01/88:

12-pin Control Unit, Driver Airbag

As of 09/87 or 01/88, the airbag restraint system has a new control unit with integral reserve power
source and voltage transformer. This means that
Page 1178
Fig. 5 Conversion Table, Meters To Feet
Fig. 2 Conversion Table, Millimeters To Inches
Page 953

6 Remove adjusting pin.

Clamp dial gauge in position with a preload of approx. 5 mm.

Rotate crankshaft and accurately adjust TDC with the dial gauge.

Turn dia gauge scale until the pointer is at 0.


Page 900
EGR Temperature Sensor: Locations EGR Temperature Sensor (Calif. Only)
The EGR temperature sensor is installed in the exhaust gas recirculation line at the rear of the
engine.
Page 667
NOTE: The oil level transmitter (8) is bolted to the oil pump (9). The connection plug (2) of the
connection cable (5) passes through a bore in the crankcase (1) from inside to the outside and is
sealed with a sealing ring (4). On the outside the connection plug is attached with a locking ring (3).

Model 107 Remove oil level transmitter with connection cable and connection plug with oil pan
removed.

Model 126 Remove oil level transmitter with connection cable and connect on plug with oil pan
lower part removed.
Page 806

Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Air Flow Sensor Plate

Airflow Sensor Arrangement

The air flow sensor plate is located within the mixture control unit housing.
Page 621
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Wheels/Tires - Alloy Wheel Radial Crack Information

Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Alloy Wheel Radial Crack Information

Date: March 10, 2009

Order No.: S-B-40.10/69

Group: 40

SUBJECT: MY-All, Models All

Radial Crack in Light Alloy Disk Wheel

Through inspection of returned warranty parts, it has become evident that light alloy disk wheels
are being replaced under warranty for radial cracks. This type of damage is attributable to driving
over obstacles and resulting punctures. The rim flange becomes deformed and a radial crack
occurs immediately or later due to the vehicle's operating load. This type of damage is not covered
under warranty.

Low section tires also significantly contribute to mechanical damage because of their lower side
wall height and the possibility of a crack can be exacerbated by low tire inflation pressure.

For safety reasons, a tire should be replaced after it has been punctured to preclude internal fabric
damage of the tire carcass.
Page 1262
Page 756
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 719

Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair

EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR - REMOVAL, INSTALLATION AND CHECKING

(as of 09/85)

Lower left instrument panel cover -

remove.

Left side trim on center console -

remove.

2-pin plug connection (B 10/6x) -

separate.

Evaporator temperature sensor (B 10/6) -

pull out.

Temperature sensor -

check, replace where necessary.

In reverse sequence -

install.

Cooling capacity -

check.

Test Values:

Sensor temperature in °C Resistance in kOhms.

+10 18.2 to 21.5


+15 15.3 to 17.2

+20 11.5 to 13.6

+25 9.5 to 10.5

+30 7.5 to 8.5

+35 6.0 to 7.0

+40 4.5 to 5.5

+45 3.5 to 4.5

Commercially Available Tester:

Multimeter -

e.g., Sun DMM 5


Page 14
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 1508
Fuse: Locations

Fuse and Relay Block Identification and Location

Left Rear Corner of Engine Compartment

The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.

F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)

The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 149

Symbols Part 1
Power Window Switch
Power Window Switch: Locations Power Window Switch
Component ID S19s1

Component Name Right front power window switch

Component Location Center console

Component ID S19s2

Component Name Right rear power window switch

Component Location Center console

Component ID S20s1

Component Name Left front power window switch

Component Location Center console

Component ID S20s2

Component Name Left rear power window switch

Component Location Center console


Page 1575
Page 254

Component ID R17

Component Name Resistance trimming plug (CIS-E)

Component Location Front passenger footwell, behind right kick panel


Page 1254
For rear axle differential (For limited slip see below), and for refilling 4MATIC front differential.
MB Hypoid Gear Oil MB part no. 000 989 28 03

HYPOID GEAR OIL

For limited slip differential and rear axle with ASD, 4MATIC

MB Limited Slip Differential Oil MB part no. 000 583 09 04

HYPOID GEAR OIL

For initial (new) fill of 4MATIC front differential

MB Life-long hypoid gear oil MB part no. 001 989 05 03

MANUAL TRANSMISSION FLUID

For MB manual transmission

MB Manual Transmission Fluid MB part no. 000 989 26 03

STEERING GEAR LUBRICANT

For power steering

MB Power Steering Fluid MB part no. 000 989 88 33

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

For MB automatic transmission (not including MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6),
transfer case (4MATIC), and MB manual transmission (except GL76/30-5 and GL275E) use:

Castrol Dexron-III/Mercon ATF F-30341 Castrol Transmax M-22257 / 22096 Chevron ATF Dexron
III F-30108 / 30159 Citgo Multi-Purpose ATF D-21571 Exxon Superflo ATF Dexron-III F-30111
Havoline ATF Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Pennzoil, ATF D-21380 Pennzoil, ATF F-30110 Quaker
State Dexron-III/Mercon F-30161 Sunoco ATF Dexron-III/Mercon F-30176 Texaco ATF
Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Unocal Multi-Purpose ATF D-22413 / 22431 Valvoline ATF Type D

Supplier Information: Castrol, Piscataway, NJ / Toronto, Canada Chevron Products Co., San
Francisco CA Citgo Petroleum Corp., Tulsa, OK Exxon Company USA, Houston, TX Texaco
Lubricants Co., Houston, TX Pennzoil Products Co., Houston, TX Quaker State, Seneca, PA Sun
Co., Philadelphia, PA Unocal Science and Technology Div., Brea, CA Valvoline International,
Lexington, KY

For MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6 and Model 163 transfer case use:

MB Automatic Transmission Fluid MB part no. 001 989 21 03 10

SUPERCHARGER OIL

MB Supercharger Oil MB part no. 000 989 6201


Locations

Timing Mark
Engine Oil - Approved Evacuation Equipment
Technical Service Bulletin # S-58_00-118 Date: 010301
Engine Oil - Approved Evacuation Equipment

Date: March 2001

Order No.: S-SI-58.00/118

Supersedes:

Group 58

SUBJECT: ALL ENGINES APPROVED OIL EVACUATION EQUIPMENT

The purpose of this Service Information is to inform dealers that Approved Oil Evacuation
Equipment, which is used to extract used engine oil from the engine via the oil dipstick tube, is now
available for order. Mercedes-Benz engines are designed to allow the extraction of engine oil from
under the hood via the dipstick tube. The engine dipstick tube has an enlarged cross section, plus
a formed extension at the top end where the dipstick is inserted and the approved engine oil
evacuation equipment interfaces. The opposite end of the dipstick ends just short of the oil pan
bottom, thus engine oil can be extracted via the approved oil evacuation equipment by using the
dipstick tube. Additionally, the engine dipstick tube itself is the conduit through which spent engine
oil is moved to the oil evacuation equipment.

In addition, service and repair components for existing approved oil evacuation equipment is also
available.

Note:

Because the engine oil dipstick tube is the conduit through which spent engine oil is extracted,
inserting tubular probes through the dipstick tube is NOT recommended.

Special Note for M-class:

Due to the location of the vehicle frame and suspension components, the draining of engine oil via
the engine crankcase oil drain plug is not recommended, since this can lead to engine oil coming in
contact and subsequently be damaging to the rubber suspension components. Thus, it is strongly
recommended to use the approved oil evacuation equipment contained in the Service Information
for this purpose.

Index

1. FLACO

2. RAASM

3. BDM Engineering

4. Deutsche Tecalemit (DT)

WARNING!

This approved oil evacuation equipment is to be exclusively used for the evacuation of engine oil,
transmission oil, power steering oil, and differential oil only.

^ Do not use this equipment to extract caustic (i.e. battery acid) or flammable liquids (i.e.
gasolines).

^ Do not expose the waste oil reservoir to any source of heat.

^ Do not perform any welding repairs on the oil evacuation equipment.


^ Wear face and hand protection when extracting engine oil of high temperature.

^ Use the oil evacuation equipment only for the extraction of oil.

^ Do not modify any of the equipment component.


Page 25
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 1290
Damages or malfunctions resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives
are not covered by the MERCEDES-BENZ Limited Warranty.
For model year 1986, all gasoline models except 190 E 2.3 require premium unleaded gasoline. As
of model year 1987, all gasoline engines require premium unleaded gasoline

Use only premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 91 min. In the U.S., this octane number is an average of the Research
octane number (R) and the Motor octane number (M): (R + M) / 2. The octane number is also
known as the Anti-Knock Index.

CAUTION! To maintain the engine's durability and performance, only premium unleaded gasoline
is to be used. If premium unleaded is not available and low octane gasoline is used, follow these
precautions:

- Partially fill the fuel tank with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with premium unleaded
gasoline as soon as possible.

- Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration. Do not exceed an engine speed of 2000 rpm if
the vehicle has a light load (two occupants and no luggage for example). Do not exceed 2/3 of
maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous
terrain.

Model years 1975 - 1985 and model year 1986 model 190 E 2.3

Use unleaded regular gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 87 min.

Model years 1972 - 1974

Use leaded or unleaded~gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 87 min. When only unleaded gasoline is being used, check the valve
clearance on engines with mechanically adjustable valves at half the recommended interval.

Pre-model year 1972

Use premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 91 min. Check the valve clearance at half the recommended interval.

2. Diesel Engines

Use only commercially available vehicular diesel fuel number 2 or number 1 (ASTM D975 Number
2-D or Number 1-D).

For information on cold weather operation, refer to the vehicle Owner's Manual or Service
Information MBNA 00/7 (11-82).
Page 112

** If there are only three valves listed it means there isn't a right rear valve and therefore no wire in
Pin 19. If a wire exists in Pin 19 it will mean the system has four solenoid valves.

*** Not all Bosch ABS 2 have a Solenoid valve on the right rear wheel. This does not mean that if a
system has only three solenoid valves that it will only have three wheel speed sensors. These
differences are sorted out in the chart.

**** Not all Bosch ABS 2 have a wheel speed sensor on the right rear wheel. Systems that have
only three wheel speed sensors have the rear sensor mounted in the differential housing. The
easiest way to determine how the wheel speed sensors are wired is to inspect the 35 Pin plug and
see what contacts are used for in system being tested.

Teves - ABS

35 Position ECU Plug

Connector View

System

Teves ABS

Location

Terminal ID

1 - Ground 2 - Ignition Switch 3 - Main Power Relay 4 - Wheel Speed Sensor Right Rear (-) 5 -
Wheel Speed Sensor Left Front (-) 6 - Wheel Speed Sensor Left Rear (-) 7 - Wheel Speed Sensor
Right Front (-) 8 - Main Power Relay Control 9 - Fluid Level Switch
10 - Fluid Pressure Switch 11 - Solenoid Valve Ground 12 - Brake Light (NC Scorpio) 13 - NC 14 -
Pump Relay Monitor (NC Ford, GM) 15 - Inlet Solenoid Valve (Right Front) 16 - Outlet Solenoid
Valve (Left Front) 17 - Inlet Solenoid Valve (Rear) 18 - Main Hydraulic Solenoid Valve 19 - Ignition
Switch (Scorpio only) 20 - Main Power Relay 21 - NC 22 - Wheel Speed Sensor Right Rear (+) 23 -
Wheel Speed Sensor Lett Front (+) 24 - Wheel Speed Sensor Left Rear (+) 25 - Wheel Speed
Sensor Right Front (+) 26 - NC 27 - ABS Warning Light 28 - NC 29 - NC 30 - NC 31 - NC
Page 410
Seat Belt Warning Relay: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Locations
Power Window Relay: Locations

Fuse and Relay Block Identification and Location

Left Rear Corner of Engine Compartment

The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.

F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)

The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 1043
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 1447

Parts Information:

Time Allowance Information: Recommended labor times to convert A/C refrigerant system from
R12 to R134a: 1.

A/C system with R12 refrigerant-Convert to R134a = 1.8 hrs.

2. A/C system with R12 refrigerant-Convert to R134a = 1.2 hrs (with compressor replacement).

In Case of Warranty: Please use damage code and operation number of the damage causing part.
Please refer to the latest Time Guide Edition, starting with edition No. 22 upon release.
Page 918
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Air Flow Sensor With Intake Air Temp Sensor (EDS)
Component ID B2/1

Component Name Air flow sensor with intake air temperature sensor (EDS)

Component Location Top of engine, behind right headlamp


Locations

Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations

Component ID B5

Component Name Oil pressure sensor

Component Location At base of oil filter housing


Page 1529

Fuse Identification
Page 286

Fuse Identification
Page 1265
Page 1227

Oil Filter: Service and Repair

1 Central bolts Tighten, 35 Nm

2 Seal Check, replace if necessary

3 Oil filter cover

4 O-ring Renew

5 Oil filter element Ensure use of correct element

6 Oil filter housing Clean

7 Screw fitting 1) Tighten to 40 Nm


8 Sealing ring 1) Renew

9 Gasket Renew

10 Thermostat with control valve 1) Beginning of control 110 ±4 °C, end of control (fully opened)
125 ±4 °C

11 Compression spring 1)

12 Spring retainer 1)

13 Compression spring

14 Valve cone return flow shut-off valve

15 Valve seat ring return flow shut-off valve Tighten to 40 Nm

16 Electric oil pressure transmitter

17 Sealing ring Renew

18 Spring washer 3 required

19 Hex. head bolt 3 required, tighten to 25 Nm

1) Not required on engines without air oil cooler except for subsequent installation of an oil cooler:

116.963, 117.963/968

NOTE: New oil filters are delivered with initial operation filter elements which are used on new
engines up to inspection at 1000-1500 km.

These filter elements have a limited life and must be replaced with filter elements (see parts
microfilm) if new filters are fitted to engines already run in.

Removal:

1 Remove oil filter cover.

2 On engines 116.961 standard version and 117.961, unscrew both oil cooler lines on oil filter
housing and remove pipe elbow between oil filter and damper.
Locations

Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations

Component ID R25

Component Name Accelerator pedal position sensor

Component Location Top rear center of engine , beneath accelerator linkage


Diagram Information and Instructions
Wiper Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Engine - Cuts Out Intermittently
Page 292
Perform test is describes using a multimeter.
Special Tool Information

Conventional Tools

Parts Information
Specifications
Air/Fuel Mixture: Specifications
AIR/FUEL RATIO

On/Off Ratio [1] ....................................................................................................................................


.................................................. Readout Oscillating

[1] At Diagnostic socket, with on/off ratio tester, and 02 sensor connected. Reading should be
within +10 of the value at 2500 RPM.
Page 937

Throttle Position Switch: Testing and Inspection Throttle Valve Switch Test

Equipment
Multimeter -- e.g. SUN DMM-5

Wiring Diagram, Throttle Valve Switch

N1/2 Electronic ignition control unit N3

CIS-E control unit

N8 Idle speed control unit

S29/2 Throttle valve switch W11 Ground, engine X48

Connector sleeve (solder joint in harness)

X56 Connector, throttle valve switch


Page 1570

Mercedes-Benz clip-on wheel weights cannot be installed on the inside of the original equipment
wheel on model 201.034. Damage to the outer ball joint of the tie rod will result. Use adhesive
balancing weights as listed.

When attaching adhesive balancing weights, make sure the wheel surface is free of dirt and
grease. Adhesive residue from old balancing weights should be removed.
Locations
Relay Box: Locations

Fuse and Relay Block Identification and Location

Left Rear Corner of Engine Compartment

The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.

F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)

The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 138
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Locations

Cruise Control Switch: Locations

Component ID S40

Component Name Cruise control switch V Decelerate/set B Accelerate/set SP Resume A Off

Component Location Left side of steering column


Page 1483

In Case of Warranty, use the tables above.


Page 532
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 347

Fuse Identification
A/C - Fluorescent Dye Leak Testing

Refrigerant: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Fluorescent Dye Leak Testing

Date: September 24, 2007

Order No.: P-B-83.00/97a

Supersedes: P-B-83.00/97 dated May 16, 2007

Group: 83

Revision History

Revision Date Purpose

a 9/24/07 Updated to Include Diagnostic Tree Information

- 5/16/07 Initial issue

SUBJECT: All Passenger Models

Air Conditioning Not Cooling / Leak Test Using Fluorescent Dye

If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the air conditioning not cooling,
temperature fluctuations or noisy compressor operation, the cause could be low refrigerant level.
Refer to the applicable diagnostic tree in the Vehicle Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning (HVAC)
Manual found on STAR TekInfo --> EDAC --> Non EDAC Guides. The refrigeration system should
be checked for leakage using fluorescent dye as per the instructions supplied with the leak
detection equipment. Please refer to the MBUSA Standard Service Equipment Program (SSEP)
catalog (1-888-458-4040).

Note:

In order to ensure compatibility with all components and materials in the AC system the only
approved tracer dye additive to be used is manufactured by Spectronics Corp. /Tracer Products. If
other products are used, warranty submissions could be subject to debit.
Specifications
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications
TORQUE VALVES

Fuel Injector lines [1] ...........................................................................................................................


......................................... 7 - 11 ft. lbs. (10 - 15 Nm) Fuel Pump Check Valve ..................................
......................................................................................................................................... 16 ft. lbs.
(22 Nm) Mixture Control Unit Mounting Nuts
................................................................................................................................................ 6 - 7 ft.
lbs. (9 - 10 Nm) Air Flow Sensor Plate Mounting Screw
...................................................................................................................................... 3.5 - 4 ft. lbs.
(5 - 5.5 Nm)

[1] Injection line connections to the fuel injectors and fuel distributor.
Page 1354

Brake System (Sheet No. 331.0)

MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4 Plus) Part No.000 989 08 07 10 (0.75 Liter Container) Part No. 000 989 08
07 11 (5.0 Liter Container)

Brake Pad Paste (Sheet No. 332)

MB Brake Pad Paste Part No. 001 989 10 51

Central Hydraulic System-Model 600 (Sheet No. 342)

MB Hydraulic Fluid Part No. 100 890 00 11

Hydraulic Oil For Load Leveling System and Hydropneumatic Suspension (Sheet No. 343)

MB Hydraulic Oil Part No. 000 989 91 03 10 all models

NOTE:

Dealer Stock of the previous part no. 000 989 85 03 may be used on vehicles up to M.Y. 1985.

Refrigerants (Sheet 361) Quality R 12

Compressor Oils (Sheet 362)

Windshield Washer Concentrate (Sheet 371)

MB Windshield Washer Concentrate "S"


Part No. 001 986 19 71 11 (40 ml)

Note:

Refer to S.I. MBNA 82/23b, October 1987, for suggested mixing ratios and temperature
recommendations.

Fuel Requirements

1. Gasoline Engines

Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as Ethanol, MTBE, IPA, IDA, and TBA can be used
provided the ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10%. The ratio of
Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.

Using mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol is not allowed. - MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%. Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be used. These
blends must also meet all other fuel requirements such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range,
vapor pressure, etc.

As of model year 1987, all gasoline models require premium unleaded gasoline

As of model year 1986, all gasoline models except 190E 2.3 require premium unleaded gasoline
Page 1203

Drive Belt: Service and Repair Notes Regarding Replacing and Tensioning V-Belts

Checking V-belt condition

Replace belts which are split, scorched or worn.

Checking V-belt tension

See operating instructions and Replacing and tensioning V-belts on how to use instrument.

The adjustment data stated relate to the KG scale of the measuring instrument (arrow).

Used V-belts

Check tension of the V-belts and compare with the figures which are stated in the table for used
belts. Re-tension belt, if necessary.

Fitting on and tensioning new V-belt:

To fit on a V-belt properly. it is necessary to slacken the relevant ancillary or tensioning device of
the belt sufficiently to allow the belt to be fitted on without force In addition, the running surfaces for
the belt must be free of burrs, rust and dirt.

Keep free of oils, greases and chemicals. Do not use belt wax or similar products. Problems such
as belt squeal and short service life will be avoided by now optimally adjusting the belt tension (see
specifications for settings, See: Specifications).

When performing servicing work, fit on V-belt before checking the engine and tension to the figure
stated in the table for new belts.

If belt tension is checked during final inspection or after a road test, the reading obtained in this
case should be compared with the figure stated in the table for used belts. Re-tension V-belt, if
necessary.
Page 544
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 1357

- Standard air coupling connector provided.

Equipment Ordering Information


AGA, Inc. 1041 Carriage Place Drive Bettendorf, IA 52722 USA Phone: 1-888-8AGAINC
(1-888-824-2462) Fax: (319) 332-4793
Page 1277
Damages or malfunctions resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives
are not covered by the MERCEDES-BENZ Limited Warranty.
For model year 1986, all gasoline models except 190 E 2.3 require premium unleaded gasoline. As
of model year 1987, all gasoline engines require premium unleaded gasoline

Use only premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 91 min. In the U.S., this octane number is an average of the Research
octane number (R) and the Motor octane number (M): (R + M) / 2. The octane number is also
known as the Anti-Knock Index.

CAUTION! To maintain the engine's durability and performance, only premium unleaded gasoline
is to be used. If premium unleaded is not available and low octane gasoline is used, follow these
precautions:

- Partially fill the fuel tank with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with premium unleaded
gasoline as soon as possible.

- Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration. Do not exceed an engine speed of 2000 rpm if
the vehicle has a light load (two occupants and no luggage for example). Do not exceed 2/3 of
maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous
terrain.

Model years 1975 - 1985 and model year 1986 model 190 E 2.3

Use unleaded regular gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 87 min.

Model years 1972 - 1974

Use leaded or unleaded~gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 87 min. When only unleaded gasoline is being used, check the valve
clearance on engines with mechanically adjustable valves at half the recommended interval.

Pre-model year 1972

Use premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 91 min. Check the valve clearance at half the recommended interval.

2. Diesel Engines

Use only commercially available vehicular diesel fuel number 2 or number 1 (ASTM D975 Number
2-D or Number 1-D).

For information on cold weather operation, refer to the vehicle Owner's Manual or Service
Information MBNA 00/7 (11-82).
Page 1131

Name Part Number

Crimping pliers 000 589 55 37 00

In Case of Warranty

Time Allowance
Page 504
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Locations
Air Injection Pump Relay: Locations

Fuse and Relay Block Identification and Location

Left Rear Corner of Engine Compartment

The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.

F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)

The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 663

Oil Level Sensor: Testing and Inspection

With complaints such as:

A. Control lamp stays on with running engine and correct oil level.

B. Control lamp does not light up in key position "2".

C. Control lamp fails to light up with running engine, oil temperature > 60 °C and oil level below
"min".

Specifications

Conventional tool

Multimeter e.g. Sun, DMM-5

NOTE: The oil level control lamp lights up with ignition switched on (control function) and goes out
as soon as the engine runs.

During the control function the oil level control lamp lights up dimly and during faults brightly.

Checking:

A. Control lamp stays on with running engine and correct oil level:
Page 1175
Fig. 6 Conversion Table, Cubic Inches To Cubic Centimeters
The conversion formula to go from cubic inches to cubic centimeters (cc) is to take the cubic inches
and multiply by 16.387.

For example: 305 in. X 16.387 = 4998 cc.

Some common conversions can be found in the chart.

Fig. 12 Conversion Table, Fahrenheit To Centigrade

Fig. 4 Conversion Table, Feet To Meters

Foot-Pounds to Newton-Meters
Page 365

In Case of Warranty:

C. Revised SRS Test Card

As a result of the modifications to the SRS covered in this Service Information, the SRS test card
used with tester 126 589 10 21 00 has been revised.

The revised test card (MBNA/MBC 2277 [3/89]) is intended for use on model year 1984 through
1987 vehicles only. Diagnosis of model year 1988 and later vehicles should be made using an
impulse counter and respective diagnostic literature. The card should be kept with the tester and
the previous edition should be discarded.

Additional test cards may be ordered from Service and Parts Literature in the usual manner.
Page 820

Barometric Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation

Fig. 7 Altitude Sensor

In areas of high altitude the air pressure is lower than at sea level. This results in the air being
"thinner" or less dense, which means the engine will have less oxygen to burn. Depending on
altitude, the amount of fuel is changed based on a signal from the altitude correction sensor. With
the ignition switched ON or with the engine running, the altitude correction sensor will receive a
constant voltage signal (approx. 8 volts) from the CIS-E control unit. With increasing altitude
(decreasing air pressure), the air/fuel mixture will be adapted to the altitude by a reduction of
current to the electro-hydraulic actuator. Thus, less fuel is injected at the cylinders. This function is
deleted if the ECU is in "Limp Home" mode.
Driver Seat Contact Switch, Seat Belt Extender
Power Seat Switch: Locations Driver Seat Contact Switch, Seat Belt Extender
Component ID S51/5

Component Name Driver seat contact switch, seat belt extender

Component Location Center console In left front seat


Page 321
Overvoltage Relay/Harness - Update
Overvoltage Protection Relay: Technical Service Bulletins Overvoltage Relay/Harness - Update
REF. NO. 54/45

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: November 1987

SUBJECT: A.

OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION RELAY

B. ENGINE WIRING HARNESS MODELS 107, 124, 126, 201

A. Overvoltage Protection Relay Models 107, 124, 126, 201


Page 1519
Fuse Block: Application and ID

Fuse and Relay Block Identification and Location

Left Rear Corner of Engine Compartment

The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.

F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)

The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 481
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
A/C - R12 to R134a Conversion

Technical Service Bulletin # 83_081A Date: 940801

A/C - R12 to R134a Conversion

REF.NO.: 83/81A

DATE: August 1994

REVISION: The part number for the adapter hose has been changed.

SUBJECT: ALL MODELS USING R12 REFRIGERANT IN VEHICLES USING NIPPONDENSO


10P, 10PA A/C COMPRESSORS, CONVERSION OF R12 TO ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY
R134a

General Information

With the introduction of model 140 in model year 1992. Mercedes-Benz was the first car
manufacturer worldwide to use environmentally friendly refrigerant R134a. Beginning in 1991, all
other models (except 201) were converted to use refrigerant R134a.

Due to the increasingly scarce availability and eventual production phase out (1995) of refrigerant
R12, models using Nippondenso 10P and 10PA A/C compressors may be converted for use with
refrigerant R134a.

In case of a necessary repair under the terms of the Limited New Vehicle Warranty or the Spare
Parts Warranty and if R12 is no longer available, a warranty claim for the conversion can be
submitted. In all other cases any conversion to R134a is the responsibility of the vehicle owner.

In performing this conversion, the following steps must be followed:

A. Preparation/Testing of the A/C system B. Testing A/C System for Refrigerant Leaks C. Removal
of Mineral Oil from A/C System D. Replacing Receiver/Drier E. Installation of Service Valves F.
Filling A/C System with R134a Refrigerant

G. Affixing new R134a Label H. Performing Final; Function Test of A/C System

Conversion Steps A - H

Before proceeding with the conversion to refrigerant R134a, park vehicle inside workshop and
allow vehicle to attain workshop temperature (approx. 70 ° F).
A. Preparation/Testing of the A/C System

B. Testing A/C System for Refrigerant Leaks 1. If A/C system is void of any R12 refrigerant or the
compressor will not engage, check refrigerant compressor for binding by rotating A/C

compressor by hand.
Page 235

Fuse Identification
Page 519
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 1480
Ext. Lamp - MIL ON When Turn Signals are Used
Page 362
Parts Information
As of July 1989, after existing supplies of the previous version control unit have been exhausted,
only the modified version is available as shown.

Note:

When using the modified version SRS unit as a replacement for previous version control units up to
9/87 (production code 749), The energy accumulator and voltage converter installed in the vehicle
are no longer required as these are integrated into the modified version control unit's design.

However, the energy accumulator and voltage converter will continue to be available as separate
units should their replacement become necessary (while retaining the previous version control unit)

Note:

When replacing a SRS control unit manufactured prior to 9/87 (production code 749) with the
modified version, the existing voltage converter as well as the energy accumulator must be
removed from the vehicle and discarded (if installed).

The wire ends should be insulated with electrical tape and secured to the existing harness (2 & 3,
Figure 2).
Page 1350

2. Multi-Viscosity Engine Oils (Sheet No. 226.1)


Page 106
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Page 43
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Spark Plug Gap
Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Gap
Spark Plug

Gap ......................................................................................................................................................
.................................................. 0.8 mm (0.031 in)
Page 1536
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Federal Models
If a fault occurs in the oxygen sensor circuit the "CHECK ENGINE" light will illuminate alerting the
driver of an emission related malfunction and the control module will record the fault. Hard, and
intermittent failures will cause the light to remain on until the malfunction is repaired. Both
conditions will cause a fault code to be stored in the control module memory.
Speed Sensor (Rear Axle)

Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Speed Sensor (Rear Axle)

Component ID L6

Component Name Rear axle speed sensor

Component Location In rear axle center piece


Page 753
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 145

Fuse Identification
Page 1179

Compression Check: Specifications

Minimum Compression Pressure Normal Compression Engine 8.5 bar

Test cylinder for leaks if minimum compression pressure is below

specification. Since July 1987 the engine number is followed by the

compression ratio. It is thus possible to clearly distinguish from the outside

between a normal and a low compression engi

Low Compression Engine 7.5 bar

Permissible Differenece between Individual Cylinders (Max.) 1.5 bar


Page 587
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 804
Component Location Lower right front of engine compartment (Diesel)
Page 334
Test Page 1
Page 1099
Test Page 1

1) At altitudes above 2,000 m, the current draw can fall below 700 mA.
Page 435

Fuse & Relay Box Layout / Relay Identification


Diagram Information and Instructions
Seat Heater Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Warning Buzzer Contact, Exterior Lamps

Audible Warning Device Control Module: Locations Warning Buzzer Contact, Exterior Lamps

Component ID

S8/1

Component Name Warning buzzer contact, exterior lamps

Component Location Part of 52/1, 52/2


Page 107
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Page 938

Test Page
Page 1077

Fig. 40 Fuel Mixture Adjustment Location

5. Push the screwdriver through the recess in the top section of the air filter housing and onto the
adjusting device.

6. Push the adjusting device down with the screwdriver against the spring force, and turn it slightly
until the hex head engages in the air/fuel mixture adjusting screw.

^ Turn the air/fuel mixture adjusting screw counterclockwise for a leaner air/fuel mixture. The on/off
ratio will increase.

^ Turn the air/fuel mixture adjusting screw clockwise for a richer air/fuel mixture. The on/off ratio will
decrease.

7. After each adjustment snap the throttle slightly, then check for the variation between 2500 RPM
and idle speed with the on/off ratio tester. The difference between the two readings should not vary
by more than +10. Adjust as necessary.

8. Switch off the engine.

9. Remove the air filter.

Fig. 71 Tamper Proof Lock

10. Knock in the steel tamper proof lock with an appropriate tool so that the lock is flush with, or
deeper than, the bottom edge of the taper of the adjusting tower.

11. Reconnect the purge line to the purge valve.

12. Reinstall the air filter.

13. Start the engine, turn on accessories, and place the transmission selector in drive.
^ The engine should run smoothly at idle.
Page 40
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Page 1244

Technical Service Bulletin # 00_053 Date: 931001

Maintenance - Factory Approved Service Products

NOTE: Technical Service Bulletin 00_053, dated 10/93 was superseded by the Factory Approved
Service Products Sheet (OE Part Number S-0473-98L) dated 12/98. The information contained
within this bulletin (00_053) reflects the changes made by the 12/98 Factory Approved Service
Products Sheet.

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: October 1993 (supersedes 5.1. MBNA 00/47. Oct. 1992)

REF. NO. MBNA 00/53

Revision: Approved automatic transmission fluids, and R134a part numbers.

General Information

SUBJECT: FACTORY APPROVED SERVICE PRODUCTS

Attached is a current listing (as of Jan. 2000) of factory-approved service products which are
presently available in the U.S.A or Canada. It will be revised periodically to add or delete products
according to the latest information received from the factory.

We recommend that only approved service products be used in Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

Engine Oil

APPROVED ENGINE OILS

IMPORTANT:

Engine oils are labeled on the container with various ACEA (Association des Constructeurs
Europeens d'Automobiles) and/or API (American Petroleum Institute) designations of quality.
Mercedes Benz recommends the use of engine oils which meet ACEA or API classifications. If an
ACEA quality engine oil is not available, then an API quality engine oil should be used. Only engine
oils (including synthetic and/or recycled engine oil) with any of the following classification grade, or
combinations thereof, are approved:
Engine ACEA classification API classification

Gasoline A2 SH

A3 SJ

Diesel B2 CF-4

B3 CG-4

Always refer to the viscosity grade charts in the Owner's Manual or below for the proper viscosity
grade based on ambient temperature.

Note: The chart (see image) supersedes ALL previously published viscosity charts.

Select oil viscocity according to the lowest air temperature expected before the next oil change
using the chart below (image).

Viscosity Grades For Motor Oils

For additional information, please refer to the vehicle Owner's Manual.

Other Lubricants and Fluids

HYPOID GEAR OIL


Page 1093
Connector:
1. Electronic speedometer (A1 p8), road speed signal

2. CIS-E injection system control unit (N3), contact 9, temperature signa/ (TF)

3. A/C compressor control unit (N6), contact 4

4. Throttle valve switch, full load/idle speed detection, contact 1

5. not assigned

6. Idle speed air valve (Y6)

7. Idle speed air valve (Y6)

8. not assigned

9. Overvoltage protection relay (K1, K1/1), contact 2, power Supply terminal 15

10. Electronic ignition EZL control unit (N1/2, N1/S), TP/TN signal

11. Model 126: Engine ground (W10)

12. Starter lockout and backup light switch (S16/1), gear detection.

Symbols For Testers


Page 1247
parts be used. Failure to use MB Anti-corrosion/Anti-freeze may result in a significantly shortened
service life. While there may be a number of products available which will provide the required
protection, all such products have not been tested for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The above product
is suitable for our engines and can be mixed with the original anti-corrosion/anti-freeze filled in at
the factory.

BRAKE FLUID

MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4 Plus) MB part no. 000 989 08 07 10 (0.75 liter container) MB part no. 000
989 08 07 11 (5.0 liter container)

BRAKE PAD PASTE

MB Brake Pad Paste MB part no. 001 989 10 51

REFRIGERANT R 134a

MB refrigerant R134a MB part no. Q 4 83 0190 (30 lb. container) MB part no. Q 4 83 0191 (15 lb.
container)

COMPRESSOR OILS (R134a)

MB compressor oil for R134a ONLY MB part no. 001 989 08 03

WINDSHIELD WASHER CONCENTRATE

MB Summerwash Formula VR9422 MBNA part no. 001 986 44 71 10 (40 ml)

Suggested Mixing Ratio (1:100) of MB Summerwash Formula VR9422

Temperature MB Summerwash + Water Solvent*

Summer use 40 ml + 1.0 gallon --

(above freezing)

Winter use 40 ml + -- 1.0 gallon

(below freezing)

* Pre-mixed windshield washer solvent (commercially available blue concentrate in 1 gallon


container)

1. Gasoline Engines

Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as Ethanol,
TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided that the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10 percent. MTBE may be added up to 15 percent. The
ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional co-solvents.

Mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol must not be used. Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and
90% unleaded gasoline, can also be used. These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.

Gasoline Additives

A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline.


MERCEDES-BENZ recommends to use only quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the
build up of carbon deposits.

After an extended period of using fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can build up,
especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance
problems such as:

- warm-up hesitation,

- unstable idle,

- knocking pinging.

- misfire,

- power loss.

DO NOT blend other fuel additives with the fuel. These additional additives only result in
unnecessary cost and may be harmful to engine operation.
Locations
Fuel Level Sensor: Locations
Component ID B4

Component Name Fuel level sensor

Component Location Top of fuel tank


Page 49

Fuse Identification
Page 221
Interior Lighting Module: Locations D-Pillar Interior Lamp
Component ID E25/3

Component Name Left D-pillar interior lamp

Component Location Left D-pillar

Component ID

E25/4

Component Name Right D-pillar interior lamp

Component Location Right D-pillar


Page 1371

Technical Service Bulletin # 00_053 Date: 931001

Maintenance - Factory Approved Service Products

NOTE: Technical Service Bulletin 00_053, dated 10/93 was superseded by the Factory Approved
Service Products Sheet (OE Part Number S-0473-98L) dated 12/98. The information contained
within this bulletin (00_053) reflects the changes made by the 12/98 Factory Approved Service
Products Sheet.

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: October 1993 (supersedes 5.1. MBNA 00/47. Oct. 1992)

REF. NO. MBNA 00/53

Revision: Approved automatic transmission fluids, and R134a part numbers.

General Information

SUBJECT: FACTORY APPROVED SERVICE PRODUCTS

Attached is a current listing (as of Jan. 2000) of factory-approved service products which are
presently available in the U.S.A or Canada. It will be revised periodically to add or delete products
according to the latest information received from the factory.

We recommend that only approved service products be used in Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

Engine Oil

APPROVED ENGINE OILS

IMPORTANT:

Engine oils are labeled on the container with various ACEA (Association des Constructeurs
Europeens d'Automobiles) and/or API (American Petroleum Institute) designations of quality.
Mercedes Benz recommends the use of engine oils which meet ACEA or API classifications. If an
ACEA quality engine oil is not available, then an API quality engine oil should be used. Only engine
oils (including synthetic and/or recycled engine oil) with any of the following classification grade, or
combinations thereof, are approved:
Engine ACEA classification API classification

Gasoline A2 SH

A3 SJ

Diesel B2 CF-4

B3 CG-4

Always refer to the viscosity grade charts in the Owner's Manual or below for the proper viscosity
grade based on ambient temperature.

Note: The chart (see image) supersedes ALL previously published viscosity charts.

Select oil viscocity according to the lowest air temperature expected before the next oil change
using the chart below (image).

Viscosity Grades For Motor Oils

For additional information, please refer to the vehicle Owner's Manual.

Other Lubricants and Fluids

HYPOID GEAR OIL


A/C - Fluorescent Dye Leak Testing

Refrigerant: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Fluorescent Dye Leak Testing

Date: September 24, 2007

Order No.: P-B-83.00/97a

Supersedes: P-B-83.00/97 dated May 16, 2007

Group: 83

Revision History

Revision Date Purpose

a 9/24/07 Updated to Include Diagnostic Tree Information

- 5/16/07 Initial issue

SUBJECT: All Passenger Models

Air Conditioning Not Cooling / Leak Test Using Fluorescent Dye

If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the air conditioning not cooling,
temperature fluctuations or noisy compressor operation, the cause could be low refrigerant level.
Refer to the applicable diagnostic tree in the Vehicle Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning (HVAC)
Manual found on STAR TekInfo --> EDAC --> Non EDAC Guides. The refrigeration system should
be checked for leakage using fluorescent dye as per the instructions supplied with the leak
detection equipment. Please refer to the MBUSA Standard Service Equipment Program (SSEP)
catalog (1-888-458-4040).

Note:

In order to ensure compatibility with all components and materials in the AC system the only
approved tracer dye additive to be used is manufactured by Spectronics Corp. /Tracer Products. If
other products are used, warranty submissions could be subject to debit.
By Symptom
Idle Speed: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # DD07.3-90101 Date: 910701

Idle Speed Exceeds 1100 RPM at Times

07.3-90101 Idle Speed Intermittently Exceeds 1100 RPM, Engines 104; Revised 7/91 10/90

With Engine at Operating Temperature 116, 117 as of M.Y.'86

A. Engine 104

Cause:

1. Return spring fastened incorrectly to linkage. 2. Idle contact of throttle valve switch (S29/2) not
switched.

Remedy: 1. Fasten return spring correctly to linkage. 2. Check idle contact at throttle valve switch.

B. Engines 116, 117 as of MY. '86

Cause: Idle contact of throttle valve switch (S29/2) not switched.

Remedy: Check idle contact at throttle valve switch, replace throttle valve switch (S29/2) or
complete throttle valve assembly if necessary.

Damage Code: 07311 73

Technical Service Bulletin # DD07.3-90101 Date: 910701

Idle Speed Exceeds 1100 RPM at Times

07.3-90101 Idle Speed Intermittently Exceeds 1100 RPM, Engines 104; Revised 7/91 10/90

With Engine at Operating Temperature 116, 117 as of M.Y.'86

A. Engine 104

Cause:
Page 784
Dome Lamp Switch: Locations Rear Dome Lamp Switch With Illumination
Component ID S18/1

Component Name Rear dome lamp switch with illumination

Component Location Center console, above radio


Page 330

Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation 560 SEL/SEC

Fig. 4 CIS-E System Components

The fuel pump relay controls various functions of the CIS-E system such as fuel pump operation,
maximum engine speed limitation, oxygen sensor heater supply voltage, cold start valve activation,
transmission (automatic) kickdown cutoff, and fuel pump cutoff in the event of an interruption of the
ignition signal (TD) to the fuel pump relay. An input from the ignition control unit provides a TD
signal which energizes the fuel pump relay during starting or with the engine running. The fuel
pump relay is also activated briefly when the ignition is turned to the run (ON) position. If no TD
signal is received or the engine reaches maximum RPM limits the fuel pump relay will then switch
the pumps off. Cold start valve activation depends on coolant temperature and cranking speed
signal. Voltage supply is via the fuel pump relay. The length of time during which the starting valve
injects fuel is dependent on the coolant temperature. If the engine starts before the cold start valve
completes its cycle, cold start injection is cancelled. If the fuel pump relay receives a certain
frequency signal corresponding to the maximum engine RPM, the contact between circuit 30 and
87 is interrupted and the fuel pumps are turned off.
Wheel - Balancer Adapters & Flange Plate

Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheel - Balancer Adapters & Flange Plate

Date: August 1998

Order No.: S-SI-MBNA-40/26A, 58/82A

Supersedes: S-SI-MBNA-40/26, 58/82, July 1995

Group: 40, 58

Revision: Updated to include information for winter steel wheels

SUBJECT: ALL MODELS WITH LIGHT ALLOY WHEELS, STEEL WHEELS FOR WINTER TIRES
CENTERING ADAPTERS FOR WHEEL BALANCERS DUO-EXPERT AND FLANGE PLATE

Suspension systems have become more complex, wheel/tire combinations more unique and
therefore, more sensitive to wheel/tire imbalance. Repeatability in off-vehicle wheel balancing has
always been an important factor. With most any wheel balancer, a technician can mount and
balance a wheel to zero, given weights in 1 gram increments. While a wheel may seem perfectly
balanced, the true test is to rotate the wheel on the balancer shaft 90, 180 and 270 degrees and
have the wheel balance out to zero each time. when this is possible, then perfect balance can be
assured. To accomplish this, accurate centering of the wheel on the balancer shaft is necessary.

For off-vehicle wheel balancing MBNA strongly recommends that all original equipment, light alloy
wheels and steel wheels for winter tires mounted on Mercedes-Benz vehicles, be balanced using
balancing equipment as recommended in the MB Standard Service Equipment Program catalog.
Additionally, it is required that Mercedes-Benz dealers equip balancing equipment with MB special
centering tools, the DUO-EXPERT centering adapter and corresponding flange plate adapter. By
replacing the previously used backcone and pressure cup with these centering tools, an accurate
location of the wheel/tire assembly onto the wheel balancer shaft of the wheel balancer is
consistently assured. This will determine the repeatability and ultimate quality of the balancing
operation. By using the DUO-EXPERT adapter and flange plate adapter as a set, near perfect
repeatability can be achieved.

The DUO-EXPERT adapter (Figure 1, arrow) is a two piece, hub-centric, expanding inner and outer
collet system. The two machined collets are held together with a flat elastic band.

The DUO-EXPERT adapter is first slipped onto the balancer shaft. Then the wheel/tire assembly is
slipped onto the balancer shaft, seating the wheel hub securely against the DUO-EXPERT adapter.
The flange plate adapter along with the wing nut are tightened against the wheel/tire assembly. The
collets of the DUO-EXPERT adapter expand against each other to secure the adapter to the shalt
and the wheel to the adapter.
Page 754
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Page 1455
Damages or malfunctions resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives
are not covered by the MERCEDES-BENZ Limited Warranty.
For model year 1986, all gasoline models except 190 E 2.3 require premium unleaded gasoline. As
of model year 1987, all gasoline engines require premium unleaded gasoline

Use only premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 91 min. In the U.S., this octane number is an average of the Research
octane number (R) and the Motor octane number (M): (R + M) / 2. The octane number is also
known as the Anti-Knock Index.

CAUTION! To maintain the engine's durability and performance, only premium unleaded gasoline
is to be used. If premium unleaded is not available and low octane gasoline is used, follow these
precautions:

- Partially fill the fuel tank with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with premium unleaded
gasoline as soon as possible.

- Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration. Do not exceed an engine speed of 2000 rpm if
the vehicle has a light load (two occupants and no luggage for example). Do not exceed 2/3 of
maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous
terrain.

Model years 1975 - 1985 and model year 1986 model 190 E 2.3

Use unleaded regular gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 87 min.

Model years 1972 - 1974

Use leaded or unleaded~gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 87 min. When only unleaded gasoline is being used, check the valve
clearance on engines with mechanically adjustable valves at half the recommended interval.

Pre-model year 1972

Use premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 91 min. Check the valve clearance at half the recommended interval.

2. Diesel Engines

Use only commercially available vehicular diesel fuel number 2 or number 1 (ASTM D975 Number
2-D or Number 1-D).

For information on cold weather operation, refer to the vehicle Owner's Manual or Service
Information MBNA 00/7 (11-82).
Page 813
Air Flow Sensor Adjusting Pin Location
1. Remove the fuel supply line at the fuel distributor and the sensor plate stop bracket.

2. With an appropriate drift carefully drive the dowel pin (arrow) down until the air-flow sensor plate
upper edge is flush with the upper edge of the cylindrical part of the air funnel. A higher position of
up to 0.008 in. (0.2mm) is permissible.

NOTE: If the dowel pin is driven in too deeply it will be necessary to remove the mixture control unit
to correct the adjustment. Refer to ZERO POINT EXCESSIVELY LOW.

3. Reinstall the fuel supply line and sensor plate stop bracket.

4. Check the idle speed and air/fuel mixture for accuracy.

ZERO POINT EXCESSIVELY LOW

Air Flow Sensor Adjusting Pin Location

1. Remove the mixture control unit and sensor plate stop bracket.

2. 2. With an appropriate drift carefully drive the dowel pin (arrow) down until the the air-flow sensor
plate upper edge is flush with the upper edge of the cylindrical part of the air funnel. A higher
position of up to 0.008 in. (0.2mm) is permissible.

NOTE: Do not drive the pin in too deeply. If the dowel pin is driven in too deeply it will be necessary
to correct the adjustment. Excessive use of the dowel pin adjustment may loosen the dowel pin
seat.

3. Reinstall the mixture control unit.

4. Check the idle speed and air/fuel mixture for accuracy.


Page 1104
Idle Speed: Adjustments
The idle speed is electronically controlled and requires no adjustment.
Page 574
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 627

Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Speed Sensor on Rear Axle

Fig. 4 Rear Wheel Speed Sensor

Removal

1. Remove rear seat or rear storage compartment.

2. With ignition switched off, loosen cable on cable connector and also loosen clamps attached to
the rpm sensor cable.

3. Pull cable in downward direction through rubber grommets in frame floor and axle carrier.

4. Loosen hex. socket screw and remove rpm sensor from rear axle housing.

Installation

1. Replace O-ring on rpm sensor.

2. Insert rpm sensor into rear axle housing, making sure that the O-ring is not damaged and that
the rpm sensor rests with its flange against rear axle housing.

3. Attach rpm sensor with hex. socket screw to rear axle housing. Refer to "Specifications" for
tightening torque.

4. Pull cable in upward direction through rubber grommets in axle carrier and frame floor and
connect to cable connector.

5. Attach cable with clamps

6. Install rear seat or rear storage compartment.

7. Complete test program.


Page 829
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor
Component ID L5

Component Name Crankshaft position sensor

Component Location Top of bell housing


Page 120
Wheel Speed Sensors
Page 1343
^ A pneumatic vacuum pump.
^ A full set of suction probes to extract used oil.

^ A 5 mm air hose (DN 6).

^ A 2mm oil extraction hose DN 16 with M-B adapter.

^ The unit rolls on 2 rigid and 2 swivel steering casters, which are lockable.

Accessories:

^ A large drain pan (accessory Part number 40 403 110), which is telescopically mounted and
includes a removable strainer is available.

Technical Data:

Dimensions:

Width: 24.2 inches (615 mm)

Height: 34.8 inches (885 mm)

Length: 24.8 inches (630 mm)

Weight 132 lbs. (60 kg)

Pump Data:

Type of pump: diaphragm

Material of diaphragm: Buna N

Extraction capacity: max. 10 liters/minute 1)

Max. oil temp.: + 80°C

Max. size of impurities: max. 1.5 mm

1) Note: Max. waste oil extraction rate is 10 liters/minute which depends on type of suction probe
used as well as temperature and viscosity of waste oil being extracted.

Air pressure Data:

Required air pressure: 102 psi

Air press. Connection: type 26 Dia. 7.2 mm

Air consumption: 15 CFM

RAASM (Oil Evacuation Equipment)


Page 1092

Idle Speed, Current At Idle Speed Air Valve

Special Tools

Commercial Testers

Note: Idle speed control is independent of air flow sensor potentiometer. Engine oil temperature
approx. 80 °C, selector lever in position "P" or N", A/C compressor switched off and no leaks in
intake system. Idle contact, coolant temperature sensor and exhaust gas recirculation operating
properly.
At high altitudes (>2000 m) current consumption may drop below 700 mA as the actuator requires
to open a significantly greater cross section at such altitudes to stabilize the engine.

Road speed signal

The test should only be performed if the following complaint is received: "Bucking when car running
with closed throttle valve".

Pin assignment of electronic idle speed control (ELR) unit (N8)


Service and Repair
Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair
1. Disable airbag system, refer to MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES/AIRBAG ARMING &
DISARMING.

2. Pull knob off headlamp switch.

3. Remove switch cover retaining nut and the cover.

4. On some models, remove instrument panel cover from lower left hand side.

5. On all models disconnect electrical connector and remove headlamp switch from instrument
panel.

6. Reverse procedure to install.


Page 1170

- compression recorder for gasoline engines

- recording cards, 3.5 - 17.5 bar

- accessories

Special Tool Information

Note:

The previous version compression recorder for diesel engines (001 589 47 21 00) with screw-on
adapters is still available.
Page 571
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Page 958
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Tools and Equipment
Checking and Correcting Setting of TDC Sensor

Special tools

Measuring pin for TDC and 20° ATDC position of the engine on 1st cylinder

115 589 17 21 00

Locating tool for adjusting slide 102 589 03 21 00

Socket insert 27 mm, 1/2" drive 001 589 65 09 00

1/2" drive insert, 80 mm long, for rotating the engine

617 589 00 16 00
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Window Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Locations
Antenna Switch: Locations
Component ID S61

Component Name Automatic antenna switch

Component Location Center console, above radio


Page 118
* Only if the system does not use an over voltage protection relay.
** Vehicle specific see chart for details.

Teves - ABS

35 Position ECU Plug

For Terminal ID refer to "Brakes and Traction Control : Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction
Control : Electronic Brake Control Module : Diagrams".

Voltage Measurements

Grounds

Ignition Switch

Stop Light Switch

ABS Indicator Lamp


Page 1574
Page 390

Circuit Identification
Page 479
Door Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 111

Electronic Brake Control Module: Connector Views

Bosch - ABS2

35 Position ECU Plug

Connector View

System

Bosch ABS 2

Location

Terminal ID

1 - Power Ignition SW. or over voltage relay* 2 - Solenoid valve (left front) 3 - N/C 4 - Wheel speed
sensor (left front) (-) 5 - Wheel speed sensor (left front) (-)** 6 - Wheel speed sensor (left front)
(+)** 7 - Wheel speed sensor (left rear) (+)** 8 - Wheel speed sensor (left front) (+)** 9 - Wheel
speed sensor (left front) (-)

10 - Ground 11 - Wheel speed sensor (Right front) (+)** 12 - N/C 13 - Lateral accel. switch or
sensor (GM) 14 - Pump motor monitor voltage 15 - Alternator monitor 16 - N/C 17 - Pump &
Solenoid rel. coil feed (GM, Nissan) 18 - Solenoid valve (left rear or rear) 19 - Solenoid valve (right
rear)*** 20 - Solenoid valve ground 21 - Wheel speed sensor (Right front) (-) 22 - Wheel speed
sensor (left front) (+)** 23 - Wheel speed sensor (Right front) (+) 24 - Wheel speed sensor (Right
rear) (+)**** 25 - Brake light switch 26 - Wheel speed sensor (Right rear) (-)**** 27 - Solenoid valve
relay control 28 - Pump motor relay control 29 - ABS Indicator lamp 30 - N/C 31 - N/C 32 - Solenoid
power monitor input 33 - N/C 34 - Solenoid valve ground 35 - Solenoid valve (Right front)

NC = No connection

* Power is furnished either through the ignition switch Pin 15 directly or through an over voltage
protection relay. If a relay is used in the system then Pin 15 will supply the energizing signal to the
relay and the relay contacts closing provides the supply voltage to Pin 1 of the ECU. Usually the
over voltage protection relay is mounted close to the ECU.
Page 248

Engine Control Module: Locations CIS-E Control Unit

Component ID N3

Component Name CIS-E control unit

Component Location Front passenger footwell, behind right kick panel


Speed Sensor on Front Wheel
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Speed Sensor on Front Wheel
Front Wheel Sensor

Fig. 3 Wheel Speed Sensor

Removal

1. Turn ignition switch off.

2. Remove front wheel.

3. Loosen coaxial plug in engine compartment.

4. Remove cable from holder and pull out of wheel housing through rubber grommet in a downward
direction.

5. Loosen cable from cover plate.

6. Loosen hex screw and remove cover plate and pull rpm sensor out of steering knuckle.

7. Loosen hex socket screws and pull rpm sensor out of steering knuckle.

8. Remove cable and rpm sensor.

Installation The rpm sensors are provided with different protective plates at left and right. They are
identified by an L or an R punched into protective plate. Coat rpm sensor and bore in steering
knuckle with Molykote Long-term 2 lubricant.

1. Replace O-ring on rpm sensor, mount rpm sensor on steering knuckle, making sure that the
O-ring is not damaged and that rpm sensor rests with its flange against steering knuckle. Do not
use force.
Page 582

Symbols Part 1
Page 253

Component Locations

The CIS-E control unit is located behind the passenger's right side panel.

Resistance Trimming Plug (CIS-E)


Diagram Information and Instructions
Windshield Washer Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Locations

Engine Speed Sensor: Locations

Component ID L3

Component Name Starter ring gear speed sensor

Component Location Lower left side of bell housing


Electronic Ignition Control Unit (EZL)

Ignition Control Module: Locations Electronic Ignition Control Unit (EZL)

Component ID N1/2

Component Name Electronic ignition control unit (EZL)

Component Location Left side of engine compartment


Specifications

Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Specifications

Resistance at Temperature

8.1 - 9.9 K ohms at 0 deg C

6.3 - 7.7 K ohms at 5 deg C

5.0 - 6.0 K ohms at 10 deg C

4.0 - 4.6 K ohms at 15 deg C

3.1 - 3.9 K ohms at 20 deg C


2.4 - 3.0 K ohms at 25 deg C

1.9 - 2.3 K ohms at 30 deg C

1.6 - 2.0 K ohms at 35 deg C

1.4 - 1.6 K ohms at 40 deg C

1.1 - 1.3 K ohms at 45 deg C


Power Steering - Fluid Filling/Bleeding Precautions

Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Power Steering - Fluid Filling/Bleeding
Precautions

Date: November 26, 2008

Order No.: S-B-46.30/40b

Supersedes: P-B-46.30/40a dated Nov. 27, 2007

Group: 46

Revision History

SUBJECT:

All Passenger and Light Truck Models

Flow Noises from Area of Power Steering Pump and/or Foaming of Power Steering Oil in Reservoir

If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of flow noises from the area of the
power steering pump, and/or foaming of the power steering fluid in the reservoir following work
carried out on the hydraulic steering system; this may be caused by an improper procedure
followed for filling fluid and bleeding of the hydraulic power steering system.

To remedy, it is absolutely necessary to make sure that the procedure described in the WIS
documents is strictly adhered to. In particular, it is necessary to turn the steering to full lock-to-lock
at least 30 times BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE. If this is not done prior to starting engine,
there is a high risk of air entering the steering system, which is subsequently very difficult to
eliminate.

NOTE:

Starting the engine prior to bleeding can cause irreparable damage to the power steering pump
and will cause an air cushion to form in the steering gear which causes noise. Once the air is
ingested, the ingested air will only dissipate after driving the vehicle for more than 30 miles.
ABS - Speed Sensor (Front) Wire Kinked
Wheel Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins ABS - Speed Sensor (Front) Wire Kinked

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR

DATE: May 1990 (supersedes 33/27, April 1990)

SUBJECT: MODIFIED FRONT AXLE SPEED SENSOR MODELS 124, 126 AND 201

REF.NO. 33/27a Note:

This S.I. contains additional parts information and model applicability. Please discard your copy of
S.I. 33/27.

As of November 1989, a speed sensor with a modified wire mounting point is installed on the front
axle.

Effective Serial Number

Model Chassis End Number

124.0/.1/.230 B 119671

124.090/.290 F 128718

126 A 514907

201 F 681905

Figure 1

A fixed sleeve in the area of the clamp-on point prevents the wire from kinking. In addition, a red
arrow on the sensor wire determines the position of the rubber grommet for proper positioning of
the speed sensor cable.

Figure 2
Page 400

In a minor accident, in which the safety belt provides adequate protection, only the belt tensioner is
activated when the first release threshold is passed, provided the belt buckle is fastened.

In a more serious accident, whereby the second threshold is passed, the airbag is also activated.

Release Logic, Driver's and Front Pass. Airbag and Belt Tensioner

Explanation: In a minor accident, in which the safety belt provides adequate protection, only the
belt tensioner is acuvated when the first release threshold is passed, provided the belt buckle is
fastened.

If the belt buckles are not fastened or the second release threshold is passed, the driver's and
passenger's airbags will be activated instead of, or in addition to, the belt tensioners.
Page 724

Heater Core Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation

Heat Exchanger Temperature Sensor

PURPOSE

The heat exchanger temperature sensor sends heating temperature information to the push-button
control unit. This information, along with information provided by the interior temp. sensor, is used
to calculate necessary correction for maintaining interior temperature.

LOCATION

Heat Exchanger Temp. Sensor Location

The heat exchanger temperature sensor is located behind the ACC control unit, at the front of the
heater box.

OPERATION

The temperature of the heating air within the heater box produces a resistance value in the sensor
circuit. The resulting current flow in the sensor circuit is recognized by the ACC control unit as a
measurement of the evaporator temperature. Together with the interior sensor and heater
temperature senor, the potentiometer in the ACC control unit produces a nominal value for
temperature control.
Page 1490
Page 1273

Technical Service Bulletin # 00_053 Date: 931001

Maintenance - Factory Approved Service Products

NOTE: Technical Service Bulletin 00_053, dated 10/93 was superseded by the Factory Approved
Service Products Sheet (OE Part Number S-0473-98L) dated 12/98. The information contained
within this bulletin (00_053) reflects the changes made by the 12/98 Factory Approved Service
Products Sheet.

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: October 1993 (supersedes 5.1. MBNA 00/47. Oct. 1992)

REF. NO. MBNA 00/53

Revision: Approved automatic transmission fluids, and R134a part numbers.

General Information

SUBJECT: FACTORY APPROVED SERVICE PRODUCTS

Attached is a current listing (as of Jan. 2000) of factory-approved service products which are
presently available in the U.S.A or Canada. It will be revised periodically to add or delete products
according to the latest information received from the factory.

We recommend that only approved service products be used in Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

Engine Oil

APPROVED ENGINE OILS

IMPORTANT:

Engine oils are labeled on the container with various ACEA (Association des Constructeurs
Europeens d'Automobiles) and/or API (American Petroleum Institute) designations of quality.
Mercedes Benz recommends the use of engine oils which meet ACEA or API classifications. If an
ACEA quality engine oil is not available, then an API quality engine oil should be used. Only engine
oils (including synthetic and/or recycled engine oil) with any of the following classification grade, or
combinations thereof, are approved:
Engine ACEA classification API classification

Gasoline A2 SH

A3 SJ

Diesel B2 CF-4

B3 CG-4

Always refer to the viscosity grade charts in the Owner's Manual or below for the proper viscosity
grade based on ambient temperature.

Note: The chart (see image) supersedes ALL previously published viscosity charts.

Select oil viscocity according to the lowest air temperature expected before the next oil change
using the chart below (image).

Viscosity Grades For Motor Oils

For additional information, please refer to the vehicle Owner's Manual.

Other Lubricants and Fluids

HYPOID GEAR OIL


A/C - No Or Low A/C Cooling Performance
Refrigerant Oil: Customer Interest A/C - No Or Low A/C Cooling Performance
Date: March 10, 2009

Order No.: S-B-83.55/118

Supersedes:

Group: 83.55

SUBJECT: All Passenger and Light Truck Models

Defective Refrigeration Circuit / Refrigerant Compressor

If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles related to "no or low AC cooling
performance", it may be due to a locked refrigerant compressor, a broken torque limiter on the
refrigerant compressor, the refrigeration circuit blocked or an electrical defect in the refrigerant
compressor. To remedy any of these issues please proceed with the following.

Note:

This document is intended as a supplement to the SDS function test "Refrigerant circuit test". Only
perform repair and replacement work on the refrigerant circuit if the SDS refrigerant circuit test was
unsuccessful and you have received appropriate instructions in the SDS function test.

Prerequisites:

1. Before parts can be replaced, the exact quantity of the refrigerant in the refrigeration circuit must
be determined by evacuating the system. When returning parts be sure to indicate the exact
amount of refrigerant in the circuit and any other findings by the technician. If the filling capacity is
not indicated, warranty claims may be rejected.

2. If the fill level of the refrigerant circuit is too low, parts should only be replaced if the torque
limiter is broken.

3. If the fill level of the refrigerant circuit is too low and the torque limiter is damaged, the leak test
(Test 6 "Leak in refrigeration circuit") must be performed using the "Technology Guide Vehicle
Climate Control" located in SDS SDMedia first and then the system must be refilled and checked. If
the amount of refrigerant in the circuit is less than 80% of the normal level, it is too low. Inadequate
fill levels may be the cause of the air conditioning shutting down or malfunctioning.

Remedy A - Broken Torque Limiter:

1. Ensure the alternator freewheel (when applicable) is not damaged and that the belt pulley of the
refrigerant compressor rotates in the belt drive.

2. If the alternator freewheel is blocked, replace the alternator freewheel. For refrigerant
compressors with a replaceable belt pulley, replace the belt pulley only, otherwise replace the
refrigerant compressor. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.

3. If the alternator freewheel is not blocked and black refrigerant/oil is evacuated from the system,
replace the AC compressor. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.

Remedy B - Blockage in the Refrigeration Circuit

1. Identify through SDS function test "Refrigeration circuit test" that the refrigerant circuit has not
been underfilled or overfilled.

2. Inspect along the AC lines to check for blockage at the points with marked temperature
differences.
3. Identify and replace the blocked components in the refrigeration circuit. Refer to EPCNet for
applicable part number.

Remedy C - Electrical Defect in Refrigerant Compressor

1. Identify through SDS function test "Refrigeration circuit test" that the refrigerant circuit has not
been underfilled or overfilled.

2. After ruling out a short circuit in the actuation and ground wiring, replace the refrigerant
compressor only. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.

Note:

^ Always empty the oil from the new refrigerant compressor before installing.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Radio Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 409
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Page 1112

Fuel Filter: Description and Operation

Fuel Filter View

The fuel filter prevents impurities in the fuel from getting into the primary-pressure regulator, the
fuel distributor, and the injection valves. The fuel filter housing is made of metal. It is fitted into the
fuel circuit after the fuel pump. The filter contains a paper insert with a medium pore size of 4
micrometers, backed up by a fluff strainer which retains any loose paper particles. A support plate
holds the filter in place. Service life depends on the amount of dirt in the fuel and. The directional
arrow indicates proper installation.
Page 729

Heater Core Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair With A/C

Data:

Resistance at °C ambient temperature + 15 °C -

15.7 ± 0.5 kohms

+25 °C -

10.0 ± 0.5 kohms

+35 °C -

6.5 ± 0.5 kohms

+80 °C -

1.5 ± 0.5 kohms

Removal:

1. Remove radio. 2. Remove ashtray.


3. Pull 2-point plug from temperature sensor (6) and then pull temperature sensor out of heater
box.

Installation:

4. Test temperature sensor (6) with ohmmeter. Then slip sensor into heater box and mount 2-point
plug. 5. Install radio. 6. Install ashtray. 7. Check automatic climate control for function.
EGR Temperature Sensor

EGR Temperature Sensor: Locations EGR Temperature Sensor

Component ID B21

Component Name EGR temperature sensor

Component Location Top left rear of engine


Page 1152

Application of spark plug wrenches


Page 231

Fuse & Relay Box Layout / Relay Identification


Page 1200
1 Loosen fastening bolt (9) of tension roller (8).
2 Tension V-belt by swivelling tens;on roller (8). For this purpose, fit an open end wrench (19 mm)
on the flat (10).

3 Tighten mounting bolt (9).

A 1st version B 2nd version

NOTE: Access to the securing bolt (9) has been improved by using a modified bracket (version B.)
Standard as of October 1982.

This bracket is attached with an M 12 x 1.5 x 35 bolt (previously M 12 x 1.5 x 40). When performing
repairs. the tensioning Pulley and the bracket can also be installed on engines manufactured prior
to this date.

As of November 1985 the bracket for the tensioning pulley is attached by a hexagon socket screw.
This screw must be slackened with the 10 mm key 117589030700.

As of June 1987 the bracket for the tensioning Pulley is attached with a hexagon socket screw with
an additional hexagon head, waf 17 mm. This provides better access for servicing work.

V-belt D Air Pump


Page 1267
Coolant: Description and Operation
Coolant/Water Specifications

Water

Use water which is clean and not too hard. Drinking water frequently, but not always, satisfies
requirements. The content of dissolved substances in the water may be of significance for the
occurrence of corrosion. If the water quality is not known, distilled or fully desalinated water should
be used.

Anticorrosion/antifreeze agent

The anticorrosion/antifreeze agent performs the following tasks:

- provides adequate corrosion and cavity protection for all components

- provides antifreeze protection

- Increases boiling point

About 50 % by vol. of anticorrosion/antifreeze agent must be added to the water. This


concentration offers antifreeze protection down to about -37 °C A higher concentration is only
recommended for even lower ambient temperatures. More than 55 % by vol.
anticorrosion/antifreeze agent reduces the antifreeze protection and impairs the dissipation of heat.
An anticorrosion/antifreeze concentration of 55 % by vol. offers antifreeze protection down to about
-45 °C. Anticorrosion/antifreeze agent increases the boiling point, which means that the coolant
does not evaporate as rapidly. The ejection of coolant is avoided at high coolant temperatures. Use
only approved anticorrosion/antifreeze agents.
Page 467
Antenna Switch: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 620
Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 275

Coolant Temperature Sensor

Throttle Switch

** If throttle is opened reading should go to infinity.

Electro-hydraulic Actuator

Air Flow Sensor


*** Disconnect Altitude sensor before making any reading on the Air Flow sensor as the Altitude
sensor will affect the readings.

1. Flap on air flow sensor closed or air flow sensor plate at rest position. Resistance increases as
flap or plate opens.

2. Flap on air flow sensor opened to maximum or air flow plate deflected to maximum.
Oils & Fluids - Factory Approved Products

Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Oils & Fluids - Factory Approved Products

REF. NO. MBNA 00/31a

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: August 1988 (supersedes MBNA 00/31, Dec. 1987)

SUBJECT: FACTORY-APPROVED SERVICE PRODUCTS ALL MODELS

NOTE:

This S.I. contains the updated information which was issued in July 1988.

This is a current listing of factory-approved service products which are presently available in the
U.S.A. it will be revised from time to time to add or delete products according to the latest
information received from the factory. Any product listed in future supplements, to the "M-B
Specifications for Service Products" microfiche that is available, in the U.S.A. is also automatically
approved for use.

We recommend that only approved service products be used in Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

Additional information on the products listed can be found in the "MB Specifications for Service
products" microfiche.

Approved Engine Oils

IMPORTANT:
Engine oils are labeled on the container with various API (American Petroleum Institute)
designations of quality. Only oils from the listings with any of the following combinations are
approved: SE/CC, SE/CD, SF/CC or SF/CD. Always refer to the "Viscosity Grade" charts in the
Owner's Manual in this S.I. for the proper viscosity grade based on ambient temperature.

NOTE:

Multi-viscosity engine oils (sheet no. 226.1) which have an API grading of SF only have not been
released by our factory and should therefore not be used (eg: some 5W30 and some 10W40
viscosity grade).

1. Single-Viscosity Engine Oils (Sheet No. 226.0)


Page 1075

Fig. 68 Diagnostic Socket Location

1. Connect the on/off ratio tester to the diagnostic socket.

2. Disconnect the purge line to the throttle valve assembly at the purge valve and plug it.

3. Start the engine and run at idle speed.

4. Press the IR 100% button on the tester.

5. Run the engine at approximately 2500 RPM and record the average on/off ratio reading.

NOTE: If the On/Off ratio tester has a constant value refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
PROCEDURES in COMPUTERIZED ENGINE CONTROLS.

6. Let the engine return to idle speed and wait a few moments for it to stabilize. Now record the
average on/off ratio reading at idle.

^ The difference between the two readings should not vary by more than +10 on the tester. If the
difference is greater than +10 refer to ADJUSTING THE AIR/FUEL MIXTURE. If the difference is
not greater than +10 the fuel mixture is adjusted correctly.
TDC Sensor
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations TDC Sensor
Component ID L1

Component Name TDC sensor

Component Location Front left of engine


Page 1000
Version Up To 8/85
Version Starting 9/85

Attention! When exchanging a level controller on model 123 (version with pressure line connection
M 12 x 1) transfer connection (31), part No. 123327 0365, of pressure line (B 1), and on model 126
additionally connection (3m), part No.123 327 04 65, of return flow line (C). Also replace copper
sealing ring (3n).

The four bolts for housing halves of level controller should be tightened when level controller is
energized with oil pressure.
Page 1303
Price List
1.0 Orders can be placed via the MBUSA Standard Service Equipment Program (SSEP), by calling
1-888-458-4040

2.0 All equipment is delivered and serviced by:

AGA, Inc. 1041 Carriage Place Drive Bettendorf, IA 52722 Phone Toll-Free: 1-888-824-2462

FLACO (Oil Evacuation Equipment)

The FLACO oil extraction equipment is designed to extract waste oil via the oil dipstick of the
engine, using the special M-B adapter.

^ Suction probes are provided for use to extract waste oil from other components such as the rear
axle assembly.

^ The unit has a 15 gallon reservoir which holds the extracted waste oil, along with an oil level
indicator.

^ With a flip of the control handle, the pump is converted to pump out the used oil into a used oil
holding tank.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Door Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 735

Fresh/Recirculated Air Switch Testing

7. Connect the ohmmeter to terminals 2 and 4.

8. Depress the non-symbol side of the switch ("OFF"). The resistance should be:

Infinite resistance

9. Release switch. The resistance should be:

0 - 1 ohm

If the correct resistance is not obtained, replace the switch.


Page 710
Layout starting 07/81
11 Remove interior lamp at front in roof frame.

12 Unclip cover from in-car temperature sensor.

13 Pull 2-pole coupler from in-car temperature sensor (1).

In-car temperature sensor up to 07/81

14 Pull vent hose from sensor and remove in-car temperature sensor through opening for interior
lamp.

Installation

In-car temperature sensor starting 07/81


Page 93

FIGURE 2

Figure 2 Wiring diagram, sliding/pop-up roof - modified version

M 12 Sliding/pop-up roof drive unit

M 12m1 Sliding/pop-up roof motor

M 12k1 Sliding/pop-up roof relay

M 12s1 Microswitch, "down" position

M 12s2 Microswitch, "closed" position

W 6 Ground, left rear wheelhousing

S 13/2 Sliding/pop-up roof switch

a Connector of electrical equipment, terminal 5 (15R) (models 124, 126)

Electrical center, connector N (15R) (model 201) b

Connector for electrical equipment, terminal 4 (58d) (models 124, 126) Terminal block on heater
box (58d) (model 201)
Page 1304
^ A pneumatic vacuum pump.
^ A full set of suction probes to extract used oil.

^ A 5 mm air hose (DN 6).

^ A 2mm oil extraction hose DN 16 with M-B adapter.

^ The unit rolls on 2 rigid and 2 swivel steering casters, which are lockable.

Accessories:

^ A large drain pan (accessory Part number 40 403 110), which is telescopically mounted and
includes a removable strainer is available.

Technical Data:

Dimensions:

Width: 24.2 inches (615 mm)

Height: 34.8 inches (885 mm)

Length: 24.8 inches (630 mm)

Weight 132 lbs. (60 kg)

Pump Data:

Type of pump: diaphragm

Material of diaphragm: Buna N

Extraction capacity: max. 10 liters/minute 1)

Max. oil temp.: + 80°C

Max. size of impurities: max. 1.5 mm

1) Note: Max. waste oil extraction rate is 10 liters/minute which depends on type of suction probe
used as well as temperature and viscosity of waste oil being extracted.

Air pressure Data:

Required air pressure: 102 psi

Air press. Connection: type 26 Dia. 7.2 mm

Air consumption: 15 CFM

RAASM (Oil Evacuation Equipment)


Specifications
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications
TORQUE VALVES

Fuel Injector lines [1] ...........................................................................................................................


......................................... 7 - 11 ft. lbs. (10 - 15 Nm) Fuel Pump Check Valve ..................................
......................................................................................................................................... 16 ft. lbs.
(22 Nm) Mixture Control Unit Mounting Nuts
................................................................................................................................................ 6 - 7 ft.
lbs. (9 - 10 Nm) Air Flow Sensor Plate Mounting Screw
...................................................................................................................................... 3.5 - 4 ft. lbs.
(5 - 5.5 Nm)

[1] Injection line connections to the fuel injectors and fuel distributor.
Throttle Valve Switch Function Test
Throttle Position Switch: Testing and Inspection Throttle Valve Switch Function Test

Special Tools

Test Page 1
Page 455
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 837
9 Loosen adjusting slide (arrow) and slide until the pin engages in the locating tool.
10 Tighten adjusting slide (arrow) and remove locating fixture.

11 Insert TDC transmitter and secure (arrow).

12 Remove dial gauge.


Page 58
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 1278
Fluid - A/T: Specifications
Use only Mercedes-Benz approved fluids

TYPE................................................................................................................................................AF
(DEXRON-II (R) Automatic Transmission Fluid) CAPACITY, Initial Refill*: 1982-85 190E..................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......5.5 Liters 5.8 Quarts 1982-92 All w/V8 engines.............................................................................
.....................................................................................7.7 Liters 8.1 Quarts 1986-91 190E, 260E,
300E 2.6L.............................................................................................................................................
...........6.0 Liters 6.3 Quarts 1986-91 300 Series 2.6L, except
SL...................................................................................................................................................6.2
Liters 6.6 Quarts 1990-91 300SL.........................................................................................................
...........................................................................6.0 Liters 6.3 Quarts 1992 600SEL...........................
...........................................................................................................................................................7.
7 Liters 8.1 Quarts *Add specified quantity. With engine at operating temperature, shift
transmission through all gears. Check fluid level in PARK, and add fluid as needed
Locations

Fuel Filter: Locations

Fuel Pump/Fuel Accumulator/Fuel Filter Assembly

The fuel filter is located with the fuel pump assembly under the vehicle, near the right axle shaft.
Page 179
Compressor Clutch Relay: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 1388

In Case of Warranty, use the tables above.


Page 273
Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
Voltage Measurements

For ECM connector view and legend refer to "Engine Control Module : Diagrams : Connector
Views. See: Diagrams/Connector Views

1. If Air Flow Sensor plate is deflected the voltage will increase towards 5 volts. 2. Always check
battery voltage and connections.

Grounds

Main Relay Supply

Reference Supply

Coolant Temperature Sensor

- California version uses terminal 7 as of MY 1988 and later when measuring coolant sensor.

Altitude Sensor

Electro-hydraulic Actuator
Page 730
Temperature sensor up to 12/80
Note: With modified temperature sensor (Fig.), starting 01/81 for heat exchanger note that the bent
part is pointing to the right in relation to driving direction.

Temperature sensor starting 01/81


Page 691

Air Conditioning Switch: Service and Repair

SWITCH FOR AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM (STARTING 07/81)

Removal:

1. Unclip springs at bottom and top on switch by means of a flat, wedge shaped tool and pull out
switch. 2. Pull coupling from switch.

Installation:

3. Press coupling on switch and insert switch into cover.


Page 758
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service Precautions
DANGER!

Potential dangers

Risk of explosion, poisoning and injury

Fuels are highly flammable and are poisonous if swallowed. Fuel can cause damage to the skin.
Contact with gasoline fuel, for example, removes the skin's natural oils. Fuel vapors are explosive
and invisible, and spread out along the floor. They are poisonous if inhaled and can cause
unconsciousness in high concentrations.

Protective measures/rules for handling fuels

- Observe local national safety regulations.

- Fire, the creation of sparks, naked lights and smoking forbidden.

- Make sure that the work area is sufficiently well ventilated.

- Never drain or add fuels over workshop pits.

- Always put drained fuel into containers which are suitable and can be properly closed off.

- Immediately remove any fuel which has been spilt.

Working on the vehicle using a naked flame

(e.g. when welding etc.).

- Before carrying out such work, remove the relevant parts of the fuel system and seal off open fuel
lines with plugs.

First aid measures

- Wash any fuel from skin using soap and water.

- Change out of clothing on which fuel has been spilt as soon as possible.

- If fuel is splashed into the eyes, rinse out the eyes immediately with water; consult a doctor if
appropriate.

Possible dangers

Risk of accident

From vehicle starting off during starting operation (e.g. when testing compression pressure) as a
result of gear engaged or when engine running and vehicles with automatic transmission as a
result of selector lever position "P" or "N" not engaged (with the exception of vehicles which do not
have any selector lever position "P").

Risk of injury

Severe injuries may be caused by freely rotating parts in the area of the running engine. The heat
produced by the engine when it is, operating can result in severe burns if contact is made with
individual, unshielded parts.
Page 980

Symbols Part 1
Page 619
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Locations

Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations

Electronic Speedometer

The vehicle speed sensor is located in the instrument cluster.


Page 984
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 1496

Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications

Lubricant

Passenger vehicles and commercial vehicles A/C compressor for R12/R22 air conditioning
systems

Caltex Capella WF 100 Capella WF 100 Shell Clavus Oel G 100 Suniso 5 GS

Refrigerant oil Viscosity

Refrigerant oil Viscosity

Refrigerant Oil Viscosity 500


Page 1408
FLUID GREASE (NLGI Class 00)
For door lock pin and striker eye

Castrol CLS Grease Castrol, Wayne, NJ / Toronto, Canada

HIGH TEMPERATURE ROLLER BEARING GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For front wheel bearings

MB High Temperature Antifriction Bearing MB part no. 001 989 23 51 10 Grease

CHASSIS GREASE (NLGI Class 01)

For all greasing points except front wheel hubs

Shell Retinax C Shell Oil Co., Houston, TX

LONG TERM LUBRICATING GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For release bearing, release arm and splines for connecting linkage on level control valves

Molykote Longterm 2 Plus Dow Corning

MB Long Term Grease MB part no. 000 989 63 51

MULTI-PURPOSE GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For all greasing points except front wheel

3752 Almagard Vari-Purpose Lubricant Lubrication Engineers Inc., Fort Worth, TX

Castrol LM Grease Castrol, Wayne, NJ / Toronto, Canada

Exxon Multipurpose Grease Exxon Co., Houston, TX

Renolit MP Fuchs Oil Corp., Somerville, NJ

Unocal MP Automotive Grease Union Oil Company of California, Brea, CA

COMPLEX GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For sliding blocks of sliding/pop-up roof

MB Lubrication Paste MB part no. 001 989 46 51

HYDRAULIC OIL

For hydraulic system, Model 600

MB Hydraulic Oil MB part no. 100 890 O0 11

HYDRAULIC OIL

For load leveling system, hydropneumatic suspension, hydraulic soft top, 4MATIC, ASD

MB Hydraulic Oil MB part no. 000 989 91 03 10

HYDRAULIC OIL

For tandem pumps with common oil reservoir for steering and level control in Model 210.

MB Hydraulic Oil MB part no. 000 989 20 03 10


ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

MB Anti-Corrosion/Anti-freeze MB part no. Q 1 03 0002

CAUTION! The use of aluminum components in M-B engines requires that


anti-corrosion/anti-freeze specifically formulated to protect aluminum
Locations

Alarm Module: Locations

Component ID N26

Component Name Anti-theft alarm control unit

Component Location Front passenger footwell, behind kick panel


Page 923

Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Air-Flow Position Sensor Indicator

Fig. 5 Air Flow Sensor Position Indicator

The air-flow sensor position indicator is a potentiometer which informs the CIS-E control unit of the
need for extra enrichment during cold-engine part-throttle acceleration. The potentiometer signals
how fast and how far the sensor plate moves as air flow increases. This prevents the familiar "flat
spot" that accompanies an abrupt opening of the throttle valve. The potentiometer operates with a
constant voltage of approx. 8 volts supplied by the ECU. During acceleration, the movement of the
sensor plate produces an output (voltage) signal which is transmitted to the ECU via the
potentiometer contacts. From this input, the ECU calculates the need for enrichment and sends a
compensating voltage to the electro-hydraulic actuator. For approx. 1 second, the current to the
actuator increases which allows more fuel to be injected into the cylinders. The greatest enrichment
takes place when the engine is cold; partial enrichment when the engine is cool and no enrichment
when the engine is above 175°F.
Page 430

Fuse Identification
Page 98
(12 pin) Right front footwell area
X51 Terminal Block, Circuit 87 (1 pin)

Under fuse/relay box


Page 1102
Test Page 2
Fig. 2
Page 998

Ride Height Sensor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Control Unit

R AND R LEVEL CONTROLLER

Tightening Torque

Hex. head and hex. socket screws on level controller: 45 Nm Connection to level controller:

M 14 x 1.5, 25 Nm M 1O x 1, 15 Nm

Cap screws of pressure oil lines:

M 1O x 1, 15 Nm M 12 x 1, 20 Nm
Note

The level controller is provided with a bleed screw as standard equipment since March 1977.
Simultaneously, the distributor with bleed screw installed up to now on model 116 and 123 in oil
line from level controller to lefthand pressure reservoir is no longer installed.

Upon removal of bleed screw, the required checkup can be performed. See: Steering and
Suspension/Suspension/Suspension Control ( Automatic - Electronic )/Testing and Inspection

Removal

1 Drain pressure oil system. See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Suspension Control (


Automatic - Electronic )/Service and Repair
Page 1260
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
BB00.40-P-0325-00A Anticorrosion/Antifreeze Agents (Sheet 325.0 )

BB00.40-P-0325-00A Anticorrosion/antifreeze agents (Sheet 325.0)

Calculation of the antifreeze quantity to be refilled with a concentration that is too low (specified: 50
vol.%)
Page 1582
Diagram Information and Instructions
Alarm Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 1428

^ When completely refilling the system, ensure the quantity of oil and refrigerant is correct (refer to
WIS document BF83.00-Z-9999AZ). Take into consideration whether individual components or the
entire refrigerant circuit are to be replaced.

^ Always perform a leak test on the system after changing the refrigerant circuit but before filling it
with refrigerant.

Note:

The following allowable labor operations should be used when submitting a warranty claim for this
repair. This information has been generated on March 10, 2009. Please refer to Netstar --> Star
TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
Cruise Control Amplifier
Cruise Control Module: Locations Cruise Control Amplifier
Component ID N4

Component Name Cruise control amplifier

Component Location Left of steering column, behind lower dash panel


Page 490
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Page 1526

Fuse Identification
Specifications
Ignition Rotor: Specifications
IGNITION ROTOR

Resistance ...........................................................................................................................................
.................................................. 700-1300 ohms
A/C - Warning Against Refrigerant Alaskankool R176
Refrigerant: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Warning Against Refrigerant Alaskankool R176
REF. NO. MBNA 83/37

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: July 1991

SUBJECT: WARNING AGAINST USE OF "ALASKANKOOL R 176" REFRIGERANT

This service information is to serve as a warning against the use of an air conditioning refrigerant R
12 substitute known as "AlaskanKool R 176".

This product is promoted as being a CFC replacement refrigerant, and is claimed to have superior
qualities as compared to R 12 refrigerant.

Initial findings of the Technical Committee of the Association of International Automobile


Manufacturers indicate that the use of this R 176 refrigerant causes serious damage to air
conditioning systems, including Mercedes-Benz. Therefore, its use in any form in the servicing of
our air conditioning systems is strictly not authorized.

It is requested that you ensure that this refrigerant is not used in any manner in the repair and
servicing of Mercedes-Benz vehicles in your service department.
Page 939

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

S29/2 Throttle valve switch, full load/idle X56

Connector, throttle valve switch

1 Idle contact (LL)


2 Common

3 Full-load Contact (VL)


Page 884

Throttle Position Switch: Adjustments

Throttle Valve Switch

1. Disconnect the throttle valve switch electrical connector S 29/2x1. Connect an ohmmeter
between pin 1 and pin 2 of throttle valve side of the connector. Close the idle valve fully (against
the idle stop).

^ The resistance reading should be 0 ohms.

2. Open the throttle valve slightly and place a .009 in. feeler gauge between the throttle valve lever
and the throttle valve stop. Push the throttle valve lever against the feeler gauge.

^ The resistance reading should be infinite ohms.

3. If the resistance reading is incorrect loosen the throttle switch mounting screws.

4. With the .009 in. feeler gauge in place rotate the throttle switch slowly in a clockwise direction
until the ohmmeter reads infinite resistance. Retighten the mounting screws.
Page 394
Seat Belt Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 1387
Page 1197
1 Lower indicating arm on measuring instrument.
2 Place measuring instrument on V-belt in the center between the pulleys. The stop of the
measuring instrument should rest laterally against the V-belt (arrow).

CAUTION: On double belt drive. make sure that the measuring instrument rests on one V-belt only.

3 Exert even vertical pressure on the top of the V-belt with the push-button until the clicking spring
disengages audibly or noticeably.

NOTE: Following disengagement of click spring, do not continue pushing with measuring
instrument as this will indicate a wrong value.

4 Carefully lift measuring instrument off V-belt. Avoid knocks and do not change position of
indicator arm

5 Read adjusting value on intersection of indicating arm and upper scale (KG scale, arrow). The
specified adjusting values refer to the KG scale of the measuring instrument

Replacement:

Check condition of V-belt. Replace cracked, burnt or worn V-belt.

CAUTION: If on a double belt drive for coolant pump and power steering pump one of the two
V-belts fails due to wear, make sure that both V-belts are replaced together.

Install only V-belts made by one and the same manufacturer. V-belts as spare parts are available
in pairs only.

1 Loosen tension devices or units.

2 Mount V-belt without using force.

3 Tension V-belt.

Tensioning:
Page 637

Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations 50 C Temperature Switch

Component ID S25/5

Component Name 50 °C Temperature switch

Component Location Right front of engine


Page 383

Air Bag Control Module: Removal and Replacement

Special Tools

Special Tool Information

Testing:

After working on the driver's airbag and belt tensioner restraint system, the system must be tested
by means of the pulse display. This test is described at the end of this operation.

Removing:
Page 1145

Ignition Rotor: Service and Repair

Ignition Distributor Assembly

1. Remove the cover (7) from the high voltage distributor. 2. Unscrew the retaining screws and
remove the distributor cap. 3. Lift off the ignition rotor. 4. Replace in reverse manner.
Page 586
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 78
Seat Heater Relay: Locations RH Front Seat Heater Relay
Below RH Front Seat, On Air Duct
Page 1309

Deutsche Tecalemit (DT) oil evacuation unit: Repair and spare parts are available for existing units,
as well as upgrade pump kits to ensure you Deutsche Tecalemit (DT) unit has the latest waste oil
extraction capability.

Please contact: AGA, Inc. Bettendorf, Iowa at 1-888-824-2462


Page 68
Seat Heater Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 54
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Page 805
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Air Flow Sensor With Intake Air Temp Sensor (EDS)
Component ID B2/1

Component Name Air flow sensor with intake air temperature sensor (EDS)

Component Location Top of engine, behind right headlamp


Page 1293
Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications
Use only Mercedes-Benz approved fluids

Standard...............................................................................................................................................
........85W-90,90 GL-5(Gear Oil, API Service GL-5)
Limited-Slip...................................................................................................................................90
GL-5*(Special Lubricant for Limited Differentials) CAPACITY, Refill: Gas engine:

1982-91 All w/V8 engines.....................................................................................................................


............................................1.3 Liters 2.8 Pints 1982-89 190E............................................................
........................................................................................................................0.7 Liters 1.4 Pints
1986-91 300 Series, except SL............................................................................................................
..............................................1.1 Liters 2.3 Pints 1987-90 260E..........................................................
..........................................................................................................................1.1 Liters 2.3 Pints
1990-91 190E.......................................................................................................................................
.............................................1.1 Liters 2.3 Pints 300SL.......................................................................
.........................................................................................................................1.3 Liters 2.8 Pints

LIMITED-SLIP IDENTIFICATION: Metal plate on rear of differential, near fill plug


Page 836

7 Continue rotating the crankshaft in direction of rotation until the dial gauge pointer has moved
back by the value specified in the table.

8 Insert locating tool into adjusting slide. The pin of the vibration damper must engage in the slot of
the locating tool.

Engine Measurement through spark plug bore

116.965 2.99

116.962/963 3.36

117.963 3.58

117.967/968 4.09

Correcting
Page 1366

Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Evacuation Equipment

REF. NO. MBNA 00/65, 58/95

TO: ALL MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: July 1997

SUBJECT: ALL MODELS OIL EVACUATION EQUIPMENT

Mercedes-Benz engines are designed to allow engine oil extraction from under the hood via the
dipstick tube. The dipstick tube has an enlarged cross section and a formed extension at the top
end. On the other side it ends a short distance from the oil pan bottom. Engine oil can be extracted
using the dipstick tube.

Note:

Inserting tubular probes through the dipstick tube is NOT recommended.

Engine oil drain plugs will continue for the time being. although access to them may only be
possible with the removal of engine compartment trim or noise encapsulation panels.

A pneumatic oil suction unit, manufactured by Deutsche Tecalemit in Germany, is approved by


DBAG for use with M-B engines. The unit has recently been added to the MBNA Standard
Equipment Program and is available for order in the USA via the sole importer/distributor: AGA,
Inc. of Bettendorf, IA.

This portable unit (Figure 1) utilizes the suction principle via an air-powered piston pump. The
engine oil extraction is accomplished by connecting a specialized Suction Adapter from the unit to
the dipstick tube.
Additionally, a variety of flexible probes and fittings are also supplied for other oil removal
applications e.g. power steering reservoir, rear axle, etc. Waste oil collected in the tank of the unit
can be emptied using the unit's pump.

Features of this unit are as follows:

^ Portable and compact (21"x 40"x 35" W.H.D)

^ Cart mounted on 4 wheels (2 are locking castors).

^ 80 liter (21 gallon) waste oil tank (+ overflow indicator)

^ Adapters and fittings for other oil and non aggressive liquid removal applications.

^ Oil extraction rate @ 1.4 gal/min.

^ Automatic shut-off at the end of extraction cycle.

Note:

- Unit is powered by standard shop air supply. 87 PSI (6 Bar) min. pressure needed.
Replacement
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Replacement
1 Crankshaft

2 Coolant pump

3 Alternator

4 Refrigerant compressor

5 Tension roller

6 Power steering pump

7 Air pump

NOTE: The measuring instrument ,,Krikit" is recommended for testing V-belt tension.

Use of Measuring Instrument:

To check V-belt tension, the measuring instrument can be held in several ways:

a. With thumb and index finger at rubber loop, with finger tips resting on push-button.
Page 1008

Downshift Switch: Locations Kickdown Valve (Automatic Transmission)

Component ID Y3

Component Name Kickdown valve (automatic transmission)

Component Location Right rear corner of transmission


Page 1588
APPROVED TIRES
MERCEDES-BENZ AND AMG ACCESSORY WHEELS
Page 1144

Ignition Rotor: Testing and Inspection

Ignition Distributor View

1. Remove the distributor cap retaining screws. 2. Remove the rotor. 3. Measure the resistance
across the rotor resistor.

Reading should be 1000 ±300 ohms.

4. Replace as necessary. 5. Carefully inspect the surfaces of the rotor for possible hair line cracks
or signs of burning. Also inspect the distributor rotor shaft for signs of

arching. Replace as necessary.


Page 1356

Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Tools - Oil Evacuation Equipment

REF. NO. MBNA 00/65, 58/95

TO: ALL MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: July 1997

SUBJECT: ALL MODELS OIL EVACUATION EQUIPMENT

Mercedes-Benz engines are designed to allow engine oil extraction from under the hood via the
dipstick tube. The dipstick tube has an enlarged cross section and a formed extension at the top
end. On the other side it ends a short distance from the oil pan bottom. Engine oil can be extracted
using the dipstick tube.

Note:

Inserting tubular probes through the dipstick tube is NOT recommended.

Engine oil drain plugs will continue for the time being, although access to them may only be
possible with the removal of engine compartment trim or noise encapsulation panels.

A pneumatic oil suction unit, manufactured by Deutsche Tecalemit in Germany, is approved by


DBAG for use with M-B engines. The unit has recently been added to the MBNA Standard
Equipment Program and is available for order in the USA via the sole importer/distributor: AGA,
Inc. of Bettendorf, IA.

This portable unit (Figure 1) utilizes the suction principle via an air-powered piston pump. The
engine oil extraction is accomplished by connecting a specialized Suction Adapter from the unit to
the dipstick tube.
Additionally, a variety of flexible probes and fittings are also supplied for other oil removal
applications e.g. power steering reservoir, rear axle, etc. Waste oil collected in the tank of the unit
can be emptied using the unit's pump.

Features of this unit are as follows:

^ Portable and compact (21"x 40"x 35" W.H.D)

^ Cart mounted on 4 wheels (2 are locking castors).

^ 80 liter (21 gallon) waste oil tank (+ overflow indicator)

^ Adapters and fittings for other oil and non aggressive liquid removal applications.

^ Oil extraction rate @ 1.4 gal/min.

^ Automatic shut-off at the end of extraction cycle.

Note:

- Unit is powered by standard shop air supply. 87 PSI (6 Bar) min. pressure needed.
Page 1201
KAT as of 1985 (AUS) (J) (S) (USA) as of 1981 (CH) as of 1983
1 Loosen mounting bolts (1 and 2).

2 Tension V-belt with tension nut (3).

3 Tighten mounting bolts (1 and 2).


Page 911
Page 1285

- Standard air coupling connector provided.

Equipment Ordering Information


AGA, Inc. 1041 Carriage Place Drive Bettendorf, IA 52722 USA Phone: 1-888-8AGAINC
(1-888-824-2462) Fax: (319) 332-4793
Page 647
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Tools and Equipment
Coolant Line/Hose: Tools and Equipment
Special tools

Tester for cooling system 001 589 48 21 00

Radiator cap with hose for tester

605 589 00 25 00

Hose clamp 000 589 40 37 00

Conventional tool

7 mm hex. socket insert on flexible shaft e.g. Hazet, D-5630 Remscheid

for hose clamps with worm drive Order No.426-7


C-Pillar Interior Lamp
Interior Lighting Module: Locations C-Pillar Interior Lamp
Component ID E25/1

Component Name Left C-pillar interior lamp

Component Location Left C-pillar

Component ID

E25/2

Component Name Right C-pillar interior lamp

Component Location Right C-pillar


Page 372
Air Bag Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 540

Symbols Part 1
Page 1402

Parts Information:

Time Allowance Information: Recommended labor times to convert A/C refrigerant system from
R12 to R134a: 1.

A/C system with R12 refrigerant-Convert to R134a = 1.8 hrs.

2. A/C system with R12 refrigerant-Convert to R134a = 1.2 hrs (with compressor replacement).

In Case of Warranty: Please use damage code and operation number of the damage causing part.
Please refer to the latest Time Guide Edition, starting with edition No. 22 upon release.
Page 950

Crankshaft Position Sensor: Adjustments

Checking and Correcting Setting of TDC Sensor:

NOTE: With the crankshaft at 20 ° after TDC, the TDC transmitter must be positioned exactly
above the pin in the vibration damper (arrow).

The adjustment of the TDC transmitter must be checked and corrected

a) when renewing the TDC transmitter adjusting slide b) when renewing the crankshaft with hub
and vibration damper c) when renewing the timing case cover d) when completing partly
assembled engines.

Checking

1 Loosen power steering pump, remove V-belt, swing power steering pump to the inside.

2 On vehicles with air conditioning or automatic climate control, remove refrigerant compressor with
carrier.
Page 492
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 1341
Technical Service Bulletin # S-58_00-118 Date: 010301
Engine Oil - Approved Evacuation Equipment

Date: March 2001

Order No.: S-SI-58.00/118

Supersedes:

Group 58

SUBJECT: ALL ENGINES APPROVED OIL EVACUATION EQUIPMENT

The purpose of this Service Information is to inform dealers that Approved Oil Evacuation
Equipment, which is used to extract used engine oil from the engine via the oil dipstick tube, is now
available for order. Mercedes-Benz engines are designed to allow the extraction of engine oil from
under the hood via the dipstick tube. The engine dipstick tube has an enlarged cross section, plus
a formed extension at the top end where the dipstick is inserted and the approved engine oil
evacuation equipment interfaces. The opposite end of the dipstick ends just short of the oil pan
bottom, thus engine oil can be extracted via the approved oil evacuation equipment by using the
dipstick tube. Additionally, the engine dipstick tube itself is the conduit through which spent engine
oil is moved to the oil evacuation equipment.

In addition, service and repair components for existing approved oil evacuation equipment is also
available.

Note:

Because the engine oil dipstick tube is the conduit through which spent engine oil is extracted,
inserting tubular probes through the dipstick tube is NOT recommended.

Special Note for M-class:

Due to the location of the vehicle frame and suspension components, the draining of engine oil via
the engine crankcase oil drain plug is not recommended, since this can lead to engine oil coming in
contact and subsequently be damaging to the rubber suspension components. Thus, it is strongly
recommended to use the approved oil evacuation equipment contained in the Service Information
for this purpose.

Index

1. FLACO

2. RAASM

3. BDM Engineering

4. Deutsche Tecalemit (DT)

WARNING!

This approved oil evacuation equipment is to be exclusively used for the evacuation of engine oil,
transmission oil, power steering oil, and differential oil only.

^ Do not use this equipment to extract caustic (i.e. battery acid) or flammable liquids (i.e.
gasolines).

^ Do not expose the waste oil reservoir to any source of heat.

^ Do not perform any welding repairs on the oil evacuation equipment.


^ Wear face and hand protection when extracting engine oil of high temperature.

^ Use the oil evacuation equipment only for the extraction of oil.

^ Do not modify any of the equipment component.


Page 1263
Page 880

Test Page 2
Page 189
Audible Warning Device Control Module: Locations Warning Buzzer Switch
Part Of Ignition/Starter Switch
Page 651
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
A/C - No Or Low A/C Cooling Performance
Refrigerant: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - No Or Low A/C Cooling Performance
Date: March 10, 2009

Order No.: S-B-83.55/118

Supersedes:

Group: 83.55

SUBJECT: All Passenger and Light Truck Models

Defective Refrigeration Circuit / Refrigerant Compressor

If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles related to "no or low AC cooling
performance", it may be due to a locked refrigerant compressor, a broken torque limiter on the
refrigerant compressor, the refrigeration circuit blocked or an electrical defect in the refrigerant
compressor. To remedy any of these issues please proceed with the following.

Note:

This document is intended as a supplement to the SDS function test "Refrigerant circuit test". Only
perform repair and replacement work on the refrigerant circuit if the SDS refrigerant circuit test was
unsuccessful and you have received appropriate instructions in the SDS function test.

Prerequisites:

1. Before parts can be replaced, the exact quantity of the refrigerant in the refrigeration circuit must
be determined by evacuating the system. When returning parts be sure to indicate the exact
amount of refrigerant in the circuit and any other findings by the technician. If the filling capacity is
not indicated, warranty claims may be rejected.

2. If the fill level of the refrigerant circuit is too low, parts should only be replaced if the torque
limiter is broken.

3. If the fill level of the refrigerant circuit is too low and the torque limiter is damaged, the leak test
(Test 6 "Leak in refrigeration circuit") must be performed using the "Technology Guide Vehicle
Climate Control" located in SDS SDMedia first and then the system must be refilled and checked. If
the amount of refrigerant in the circuit is less than 80% of the normal level, it is too low. Inadequate
fill levels may be the cause of the air conditioning shutting down or malfunctioning.

Remedy A - Broken Torque Limiter:

1. Ensure the alternator freewheel (when applicable) is not damaged and that the belt pulley of the
refrigerant compressor rotates in the belt drive.

2. If the alternator freewheel is blocked, replace the alternator freewheel. For refrigerant
compressors with a replaceable belt pulley, replace the belt pulley only, otherwise replace the
refrigerant compressor. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.

3. If the alternator freewheel is not blocked and black refrigerant/oil is evacuated from the system,
replace the AC compressor. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.

Remedy B - Blockage in the Refrigeration Circuit

1. Identify through SDS function test "Refrigeration circuit test" that the refrigerant circuit has not
been underfilled or overfilled.

2. Inspect along the AC lines to check for blockage at the points with marked temperature
differences.
3. Identify and replace the blocked components in the refrigeration circuit. Refer to EPCNet for
applicable part number.

Remedy C - Electrical Defect in Refrigerant Compressor

1. Identify through SDS function test "Refrigeration circuit test" that the refrigerant circuit has not
been underfilled or overfilled.

2. After ruling out a short circuit in the actuation and ground wiring, replace the refrigerant
compressor only. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.

Note:

^ Always empty the oil from the new refrigerant compressor before installing.
Page 1143

Ignition Rotor: Description and Operation

Ignition Distributor View

The resistor rotor is mounted on the distributor shaft which rotates at the rpm of the camshaft. The
distributor, cap, and rotor are set so that when an ignition impulse is generated by the coil, the rotor
points to the appropriate terminal of the distributor cap and the ignition energy is directed to the
correct cylinder through the ignition wires. A 1K ohm resistor is molded into the rotor for radio
frequency suppression.
Page 1510

Fuse Identification
Removal and Installation of Control Rod
Ride Height Sensor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Control Rod
R AND R LEVEL CONTROLLER LINK

Note After exchanging connecting rod, readjust vehicle level on rear axle again under load.

Removal

1 Unscrew hex. nuts of connecting rod (7) on lever of level controller and on lever of torsion bar.

If required, hold ball pin joints in plastic bearings with open-end wrench 10 mm or ball pin of steel
joints with an angle screwdriver.

2 Check ball joints of connecting rod for easy operation and wear.
Page 708
In-car temperature sensor up to 06/81
4 Detach in-car temperature sensor lower part down- ward, raising retaining tongues slightly.

5 Remove in-car temperature sensor (1) upward out of instrument panel.

Installation

In-car temperature sensor up to 06/81

6 Test in-car temperature sensor (1 with ohm-meter).


Page 573
Seat Heater Switch: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 11
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Page 872
3. Torque the oxygen sensor to 40ft.lbs.
4. Reconnect the Oxygen Sensor harness.

5. Start the engine and check the operation of the oxygen sensor.
Temperature Sensor (Outside) - Testing

Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Temperature Sensor (Outside) -
Testing

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: April 1990

REF.NO. MBNA 54/33

SUBJECT: UNNECESSARY REPLACEMENT OF OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE SENSOR ALL


MODELS

Recent inspections of outside temperature sensors returned under warranty revealed that 40%
were replaced unnecessarily.

Prior to replacing an outside temperature sensor, perform the following test procedure:

1. Measure resistance of sensor (B14) at connection to temperature gauge (see Data table for
values).

2. If obtained resistance value agrees with specified value, check sensor wire for intermittent faults
(flex the wire to check for faults).

3. If no faults are found, Do Not replace the temperature sensor.

4. Refer to Troubleshooting chart for further diagnosis.

Resistance Data

Sensor Temperature Resistance (Ohms)

32 °F (0 °C) 9800 +/- 100


68 °F (20 °C) 3750 +/- 70

104 °F (40 °C) 1600 +/- 40


Page 539

Circuit Identification
Page 263
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 1337

4. Multi-Viscosity S3 Quality Engine Oils (Sheet No. 227.1)

5. Break-In Oil (Sheet No. 225.3)

Viscosity Grades for Motor Oils

Adhering precisely to the SAE grades in accordance with the ambient temperature would result in
frequent oil changes. Consequently, the temperature ranges shown are merely guidelines, which
can be exceeded in the upper or lower limits for brief periods.

1. Gasoline Engines and 2. Diesel Engines

Diesel Engines 601, 602, 603. Except 601, 602, 603

1. SAE 4O may be used if ambient temperatures instantly exceed 30°C (86°F).

2. Except turbodiesel engine 617.95.


NOTE:

For additional information, please refer to an Owner's Manual or the "MB specifications for Service
Products" microfiche.

Rear Axle Differential (Sheet No. 235) D-A Lubricant Co., Inc.

D-A Gear Guard SAE 90 1340 West 29th Street

Available in either 35, 120 or 400 Indianapolis, IN 46208

pound containers.

MB Hypoid Gear Oil Part No. 000 989 28 03

Limited Slip Differential (Sheet No. 235.3)

MB Limited Slip Differential Oil Part No. 000 583 09 04

Manual Transmission (Sheet No. 236.2)

Fuchs Renofluid TF 10 MBNA Part No. Q2 09 0004

15 gallon containers only

Power Steering (Sheet No. 236.3)

MB Power Steering Fluid Part No. 000 989 88 03


Diagram Information and Instructions
Tow Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 1585
Page 947
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor
Component ID L5

Component Name Crankshaft position sensor

Component Location Top of bell housing


Page 270

Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Ignition (EZL/AKR)

Fig. 55 EZL Control Unit

The EZL ignition control unit contains a microcomputer, pressure sensor and the power output
stage for control of the ignition coil. It is fitted to the left wheelhouse and is installed with heat
conducting paste. The control unit receives information concerning engine speed (crankshaft
position), intake manifold vacuum (load condition), engine temperature (coolant), and full load
(throttle valve switch).
Ignition Map

The EZL control unit compares information from these inputs with ignition maps for typical load and
speed ranges which are stored in the microcomputer. The optimal ignition timing for each operating
condition is instantaneously determined from the stored maps and the power output stage switches
the primary current of the ignition coil between terminals 16 and 31 of the control unit. Furthermore,
a TD (engine speed) signal is provided to the CIS-E control unit, tachometer, fuel pump relay, and
diagnostic socket. During cranking and up to approx. 450 RPM, the ignition timing is controlled via
the segment edges (fixed) of the flywheel. After approx. 460 RPM has been attained a transition
from the fixed ignition timing to dynamic ignition timing (instantaneous, ignition map comparison) is
made. Various ignition characteristic curves are inhibited in the warm-up range depending on the
coolant temperature in order to reach the normal operating temperature as rapidly as possible.
When a full load signal is received from the throttle valve switch the control unit adapts a fixed full
load ignition map characteristic. At temperatures above approx. 203°F the ignition will be retarded
to counter any further rise in temperature.
Page 152
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Specifications
Distributor Cap: Specifications
DISTRIBUTOR CAP

Suppression Resistors .........................................................................................................................


.................................................. 700-1300 ohms
Page 545
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
A/T - Double Engagement When Shifted Into Drive
Vibration or Chatter During Shifting
Fluid Filter - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins Vibration or Chatter During Shifting
Page 601
Braking Sensor/Switch: Adjustments
No adjustments are required for the ABS system or its components.
Specifications
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications
Resistance ...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................ 680 - 1200 Ohms
Page 260
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Page 252

Component location

The EZL ignition control unit is located at the left wheel housing.

Fuel Injection System (CIS-E)


A/C - Bear R12/R134a Leak Detector Modified
Refrigerant: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Bear R12/R134a Leak Detector Modified
REF.NO.: MBNA 58/60, 83/4

DATE: February 1993

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

SUBJECT: BEAR ELECTRONIC REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTOR FOR R12 AND R134a

Via the Mercedes-Benz Standard Equipment Program, Bear Automotive has sold an electronic
refrigerant leak detector which is applicable for use with both R12 and R134a automotive
refrigerant. These units were sold under model number HI-134a, and were sold together with
extension probe model HI-135.

Some early-version units (identified by a yellow colored case) of this model may have displayed
either a lack of sensitivity or what were interpreted as false signals. These conditions were due to
the extreme sensitivity of this unit to proper adjustment by the operator. Consequently, the
manufacturer has redesigned the unit to eliminate this over-sensitivity to adjustment, thereby
enhancing its effectiveness/accuracy. This redesigned unit can be identified by its black colored
case.

Presently, the manufacturer is making a one-time offer to exchange the earlier version units (yellow
colored case) for the later version units (black colored case) at no charge to any Mercedes-Benz
dealer.

NOTE:

This offer is only valid through April 1, 1993.

The extension probe, model HI-135, should he included with the returned leak detector. It will be
tested and returned together with the new version leak detector.

The subject leak detector should be sent prepaid/insured to:

Hitech Instruments 40 McLean Road Brevard, NC 28712-9989

Attn: Customer Service Department

Mercedes-Benz Desk

Please allow three weeks for delivery.


Page 264

Engine Control Module: Connector Views

System

KE - Jetronic (CIS-E)

Location

- Below foot rest passenger side (560SL)

- Kick panel passenger side (420SEL, 560SEL, 560SEC)

Legend

1 - Main relay power (Red/Yel) 2 - GROUND (BRN) 3 - NO CONNECTION 4 - NO CONNECTION


5 - Full load throttle (Gry/Yel) 6 - NO CONNECTION 7 - Shield/coolant sensor ground (Brn/Wht)

- Coolant sensor ground for MY 1988 and later California version

8 - Oxygen sensor input (Grn) 9 - Fuel pump relay A/T (Grn/Blu)

10 - Electro-hydraulic actuator control(Brn/Blk) 11 - Altitude sensor (Blu/Red) 12 - Electro-hydraulic


actuator supply (Brn/Blk) 13 - Closed throttle (Brn/Yel) 14 - Air injection relay control (Brn/Blu) 15 -
Check engine indicator (Red/Grn) 16 - Ignition switch (Vio) 17 - Air flow sensor Input (Blu/Wht) 18 -
Air flow sensor reference (Blu/Grn) 19 - EGR sensor (Grn/Vio) 20 - Ground (Brn/Red) 21 - Coolant
temperature sensor (Grn/Red) 22 - NO CONNECTION 23 - Diagnostic Codes/Check engine light
24 - Speed Signal (Gry/wht) 25 - TD signal (Grn/Yel)
Page 1432

In Case of Warranty, use the tables above.


Page 723

Heater Core Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations

Component Locations

The heater temperature sensor is located in the heater box, behind the ACC control unit.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Tire - Aerosol Inflator/Sealer Flammability Hazard

Spare Tire: Technical Service Bulletins Tire - Aerosol Inflator/Sealer Flammability Hazard

REF. NO. MBNA 40/16

IMPORTANT SAFETY ADVISORY

All appropriate personnel should be informed of this potential hazard and a copy of this Service
Information should be posted near the changing equipment.

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: December 1990 REF. NO. MBNA 40/16

SUBJECT: AEROSOL TIRE INFLATOR/SEALER FLAMMABILITY HAZARD

During dismounting of any tire from a wheel rim we recommend, effectively immediately, that you
take the following precautions:

^ ALL WHEELS SHOULD BE HANDLED AS IF THEY CONTAIN AN EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE


OR EXPLOSIVE GAS USED TO SEAL AND INFLATE THE TIRE AS A TEMPORARY REPAIR
PRODUCT.

^ KEEP SPARKS, FIRE OR OTHER IGNITION SOURCES THAT COULD EXPLODE THE GAS IF
PRESENT, AWAY FROM THE DEFLATION/DIS-MOUNTING AREA.

^ INFLATE AND DEFLATE THE TIRE FOUR (4) TIMES BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO BREAK THE
BEAD.

^ NEVER REPAIR A TIRE OR RIM BEFORE COMPLETELY REMOVING THE TIRE FROM THE
RIM. THIS INCLUDES WELDING, USING A TIRE REAMER, RASP, PLUG OR SIMILAR TOOL.

We are providing this advisory based on information from the U.S. Consumer Product Safety
Commission which has received reports of more than 6 deaths/serious injuries associated with the
explosive ignition of the propellant gas in tires which were being repaired. The injuries have
included brain damage, loss of vision, loss of hearing, and broken bones.

The product involved is an aerosol can holding a liquid (latex) sealer and a propellant of
pressurized gas (propane/butane). The contents of the can is emptied into a flat tire to temporarily
seal/inflate it.

Be aware that millions of cans using flammable gas products are used each year and therefore a
safe course of action is to assume any tire/wheel is inflated with a flammable gas. Recently
marketed products may have a peel-off warning label (such as the ones depicted below) which
consumers are asked to affix to the wheel.

DO NOT RELY ON FINDING A LABEL OR CUSTOMER INFORMATION. TREAT EVERY WHEEL


AS IF AN INFLATOR/SEALER WITH A FLAMMABLE GAS WAS USED!
Page 1347

BDM Stainless Steel Tandem Oil and Coolant Recovery System

Technical Data:

Dimensions:

Width: 9 inches (230 mm)

Height: 24 inches (610 mm)

Weight: 14 lbs.
Air pressure Data:

Required air pressure: 70 psi, regulator supplied

Air press. Connection: Automotive Air Hose connector

Air consumption: 2.0 CFM @ 70 psi

BDM Engineering's Stainless Steel Vacuum Generator:

Vacuum generated: 28 inches of vacuum @ 3.1 CFM

Regulated via: 70 psi regulator

Silenced via: replaceable ABS Plastic silencer with 1/4 inch pipe thread.

Deutsche Tecalemit (DT) (Oil Evacuation Equipment)


Page 274
Throttle Switch
Air Flow Sensor

Start Signal

Oxygen Sensor

Air Pump Control Relay

Ohms Measurements

For ECM connector view and legend refer to "Engine Control Module : Diagrams : Connector
Views. See: Diagrams/Connector Views

CAUTION: When measuring ohms disconnect the ECU from the harness plug and never turn the
ignition key on. It is possible that failure to follow

these steps will result in damage to the ECU.

Grounds
Page 821
Barometric Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Special Tools

Equipment

Multimeter -- e.g. SUN DMM-5

Test Page 1

Fig. 1
Page 759
Rules of conduct/Protective measures
- As a general rule, carry out work on the running engine only if this is absolutely essential.

- Before starting the engine, apply parking brake.

- On models with manual transmission, move gearshift lever into Neutral position.

- On models with automatic transmission, move selector lever into position "P" or "N" (with the
exception of vehicles which do not have any selector lever position "P").

- On models which do not have selector lever position "P", secure selector lever to prevent it being
operated unintentionally.

- Wear closed and close-fitting work clothes.

- Take off any jewelry, such as chains, rings etc.

- If you have long hair, wear a suitable head cover.

- Before commencing work on the running engine, check to obtain a general picture of the
positioning of parts which may be hot.

- When carrying out work when starting the engine or when engine is running, do not touch any hot
and rotating parts.

Fig. A engine 904, 906

Fig. B engine 541, 542

NOTE: Vehicles with Stop switch:

Before commencing work on the running engine, check to obtain a general picture of the
positioning of the Stop switch If a danger exists, switch off engine with the Stop switch (S11). (On
engine 904, 906, 541, 542)

First aid measures in the event of burns

- Do not rub the part of the skin affected, pour plenty of cold water over the burn and cover over
with sterile bandages.

- Contact a doctor immediately.


Wheels - Recommendation Against Chroming Alloy
Wheels
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Recommendation Against Chroming Alloy Wheels
Date: February 2008

Order No.: S-B-40.10/18a

Supersedes: MBNA 40/18 dated April, 1991

Group: 40

Revision History

Revision Date Purpose

a 02/2008 Updated to include current models

- 04/1991 Initial issue

SUBJECT: All Models

Chrome Plating of Mercedes-Benz Light Alloy Wheels

Warning!

Chrome plating of Mercedes-Benz light alloy wheels is not recommended.

The reason that we do not recommend chrome plating is as follows:

When chrome plating an Mercedes-Benz light alloy wheel, the wheel must first be anodized
(copper plated).

The difference in EMF (Electro-Motive Force) values between copper and aluminum results in
electrolytic corrosion with aluminum being the sacrificial metal. This will result in weakening of the
base metal as well as poor adhesion of the subsequent plating, and thereby premature flaking of
the chrome finish.

Wheels of cast light alloy, with their porous surface, are even more susceptible to this condition
than those of forged light alloys.
Page 1097

A 1st version B 2nd version

Hose connections on left and right lengthened Size C = 53 mm (previously 42 mm)


Page 1024

Symbols Part 1
Page 956
13 Briefly turn crankshaft in direction of rotation, then unscrew the adapter from the spark plug
bore.
Page 982
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Page 1355

Use only premium, leaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number (posted at
the pump) must be at least 91 min. It is an average of both the research (R) octane number and the
Motor (M) octane number: (R+M)/2. This is also known as, the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.

CAUTION!:

To maintain the engine's durability and performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If
premium unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used, follow these precautions:

^ Have the fuel tank filled only partially with unleaded regular and fill up with premium unleaded as
soon as possible.

^ Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration.

^ Do not exceed an engine speed of 2,000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a light load, such as two
persons and no luggage.

^ Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded, towing a
trailer or operating in mountainous terrain.

Model years 1975-1985 and M.Y. 1986 model 190E 2.3

Use regular unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number (posted at the
pump) must be at least 87 min (premium unleaded may also be used).

Model years 1972-1974

Use leaded or unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number (posted at
the pump) must be at least 87 min. When only unleaded gasoline is being used, check valve
clearance at half the recommended interval.

Pre-model year 1972

Use premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number (posted at the
pump) must be at least 91 min. Check valve clearance at half the recommended interval.

2. Diesel Engines
Use only commercially available vehicular diesel fuels No. 2 or No. 1 (ASTM D975 No. 2-D or No.
1-D).

For information on cold weather operation, refer to the respective Owner's Manual or Service
Information MBNA 00/07, November 1982.

3. Approved Additives - For Diesel Fuel

CAUTION!:

If non-approved fuel additives are used in vehicles with a Trap Oxidizer, the Trap Oxidizer could be
damaged, resulting in severe engine power loss and expensive repairs not covered under the new
vehicle warranty.
Page 709
7 Insert in-car temperature sensor (1) from above in instrument panel and secure with lower Part.
8 Connect 2-pole coupling and push vent hose onto in-car temperature sensor lower part. ensuring
it is laid free of kinks.

9 Install glove box

10 Check function of automatic heating system.

B. Starting 07/81

Removal
Page 247

Engine Control Module: Locations Reference Resistor (EZL)

Component ID R16/1

Component Name Reference resistor (EZL)

Component Location Left side of component compartment, next to fuse/relay box


Locations
Head Restraint Relay: Locations
Component ID K11/1

Component Name Left head restraint adjustment relay

Component Location Under left front seat

Component ID K11/2

Component Name

Right head restraint adjustment relay

Component Location Under right front seat


Page 406

Circuit Identification
Page 1268
Coolant: Service and Repair
AH20.00-N-2080-01A Notes on coolant

Coolant composition

passenger car and commercial vehicle engines (normally)

50 water in % by volume and 50 corrosion/antifreeze agent in % by volume.

Observe different coolant composition for CV engines.

Tasks of corrosion and frost protection

^ Corrosion and cavitation protection of all components in cooling system

^ Antifreeze protection (frost protection)

^ Increase the boiling point so that coolant does not evaporate so rapidly. Avoiding ejection of
coolant at high coolant temperatures.

Antifreeze protection

50% by volume of anticorrosion/ antifreeze agent offers antifreeze protection down to approx.
-37°C A higher concentration is only necessary if the ambient temperatures are even lower. 55 %
by volume of anticorrosion/antifreeze agent offers antifreeze protection down to approx. -45°C.

A concentration of more than 55 % by volume of anticorrosion/ antifreeze agent should not be used
as the maximum antifreeze protection is already reached. An even higher concentration once
reduces antifreeze protection and impairs heat dissipation. Reduced heat dissipation can lead to
damage to components in the cooling system or damage to the engine.

Water

Use water which is clean and not too hard. Drinking water often satisfies requirements, but not
always the contents of dissolved substances in the water may be of significance for the occurrence
of corrosion. If in doubt, analyze the water.

Period of use

The maximum permissible period of use of the coolant can be taken from the maintenance booklet.

Before pouring in fresh coolant, flush the used coolant out of the cooling system. In the event of
high pollution or oil fouling levels, clean the cooling system, otherwise damage can occur to the
components of the cooling system.

Disposing of coolants

Pay attention to legal provisions and local wastewater regulations.


Page 1214
Testing and Inspection
Acceleration Enrichment Module: Testing and Inspection
Special Tools

Special Tools

Equipment

- Multimeter -- e.g. SUN DMM-5

Test Page 1

Test Page 2
Page 393
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Specifications

Test Values
Page 130

Component ID K1/2

Component Name Overvoltage protection relay, 87E/87L30a (9-pole)

Component Location Right side of component compartment


Page 346

Fuse & Relay Box Layout / Relay Identification


Brakes - Parts List of Calipers, Pads, & Wear Indicators
Technical Service Bulletin # 42_008 Date: 910101
Brakes - Parts List of Calipers, Pads, & Wear Indicators

REF. NO. MBNA 42/8

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: January 1991 (supersedes 42/107 and 42/116a)

SUBJECT: A. REAR WHEEL BRAKE CALIPERS MODEL 201 B.

BRAKE PAD APPLICABILITY MODELS 107,123, 124, 126,129 AND 201 AS OF MODEL YEAR
1981

A.Rear Wheel Brake Calipers

MODEL 201

As of March 1990, the same type of rear wheel brake calipers as used on Model 124 are installed
in Model 201. The Textar 421 brake pads of Model 201, part no. 001 420 01 20, continue to be
used. These brake calipers can also be installed (in sets only) in earlier production vehicles.

Note: Brake pads Textar 460 or Textar 401 (Model 124) as well as the anti-squeak brake pads, part
no. 001 420 01 20 05, must not be used in vehicles with the superseding brake caliper.

Effective Serial Number

Model As of Chassis End Number

201 F727908

Parts Information

Part Name Part Number

Brake caliper, left wheel 201 420 02 83

Brake caliper, right wheel 201 420 03 83

B.Brake Pad Applicability

MODELS 107,123, 124,126 AND 201 AS OF MODEL YEAR 1981

This service information lists the correct front and rear brake pads for each model as of M.Y. 1981.
Also included are the current part numbers and material composition for the brake pads.

As of January 1988, only asbestos-free pads and brake linings are used for production and
replacement parts (except Jurid 226 and Textar 269).

Prior to installing brake pads, observe the following:

The brake pad wear sensors need only be replaced when the insulation has been worn through by
the brake rotor, or when one of the sensor components, including the wire insulation, is damaged.
In most instances, the wear sensor can be used again.

Note: The front and rear brake friction materials have been selected to provide equal and optimal
wear characteristics.

Front Brake Pads

Model Part Number Material Comments


107.048 001 420 08 20 Jurid 226 not asbestos free

124 (except .051) 001 420 07 20 Pagid 525 Production pad

201.034 000 420 99 20 Textar 298 Replacement pad for brake squealing complaints

126 (except .043/044) 000 420 94 20 05 Textar 269 not asbestos free

107.025/045 optional with


Page 513

Circuit Identification
Page 1479

^ When completely refilling the system, ensure the quantity of oil and refrigerant is correct (refer to
WIS document BF83.00-Z-9999AZ). Take into consideration whether individual components or the
entire refrigerant circuit are to be replaced.

^ Always perform a leak test on the system after changing the refrigerant circuit but before filling it
with refrigerant.

Note:

The following allowable labor operations should be used when submitting a warranty claim for this
repair. This information has been generated on March 10, 2009. Please refer to Netstar --> Star
TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
Specifications

Air Door Position Sensor / Switch: Specifications

Air Flow Distribution Chart


FLAP POSITION/TEMPERATURE RELATIONSHIP

Recirculated Air Flap Control

RECIRCULATED AIR/TEMPERATURE RELATIONSHIP


Combination Relay
Combination Switch: Locations Combination Relay
Component ID N10

Component Name Combination relay (turn/hazard signal, heated rear window, wiper motor)

Component Location Rear of fuse/relay box, position B


Page 936

Test Page 2
Page 1384

^ When completely refilling the system, ensure the quantity of oil and refrigerant is correct (refer to
WIS document BF83.00-Z-9999AZ). Take into consideration whether individual components or the
entire refrigerant circuit are to be replaced.

^ Always perform a leak test on the system after changing the refrigerant circuit but before filling it
with refrigerant.

Note:

The following allowable labor operations should be used when submitting a warranty claim for this
repair. This information has been generated on March 10, 2009. Please refer to Netstar --> Star
TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
Wheels - Don't Crome Plate Light Alloys
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Don't Crome Plate Light Alloys
TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: April 1991

REF. NO. MBNA 40/18

SUBJECT: ALL MODELS CHROME PLATING OF MB LIGHT ALLOY WHEELS

Chrome plating of MB light alloy wheels is not recommended.

The reason that we do not recommend chrome plating is as follows:

When chrome plating an MB light alloy wheel, the wheel must first be anodized (copper plated).
The difference in EMF (Electro-Motive Force) values between copper and aluminum results in
electrolytic corrosion with aluminum being the sacrificial metal. This will result in weakening of the
base metal as well as poor adhesion of the subsequent plating, and thereby premature flaking of
the chrome finsh. Wheels of cast light alloy, with their porous surface, are even more susceptible to
this condition than those of forged light alloys.
Page 9

Circuit Identification
Page 1049

Circuit Identification
Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
System Pressures:

Cold or Warm ......................................................................................................................................


................................. 6.2 - 6.4 bar (90 - 93 psi.) Residual Pressure, after 30 Min.
....................................................................................................................................................... 2.8
bar (40.5 psi.)

Lower Chamber Pressures:

Presure specifications given are in bar (psi) below previously measured system pressure. Normal
Operating Temp. ..................................................................................................................................
.................................. 0.4 bar (5.8 psi.) Idling 68°F (20°C) ..................................................................
............................................................................................................ 0.5 bar (7.3 psi.)

Enrichment Pressures:

Measured at lower chamber port. Acceleration Enrichment 20°C (68°F)


......................................................................................................................................... min. 3.8 bar
(55 psi.)

Deceleration Pressure:

Measured at lower chamber port. Decel Pressure ..............................................................................


.................................................................................... Must equal system pressure
Page 154
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 1368

Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Power Steering Fluid Level Indicator - Modified

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

Date: October 1991

Ref. No. 46/75

Subject: ALL MODELS MODIFIED POWER STEERING PUMP FLUID LEVEL INDICATION

As of the production phase-in dates below, the fluid level indicator in the power steering pump (30c,
Figure 1) was modified to make checking the fluid level easier.

With the fluid temperature at 200 C, the reservoir is correctly filled when the fluid level is between
the MIN and MAX marks (Figure 1).

In cases of repair, the new fluid level indicator (30c, Figure 1) may be installed in all previous
versions of the power steering pump.

PRODUCTION PHASE-IN

Manufacturer As of

ZF October 1990

Vickers February 1991

PARTS INFORMATION

Part Name Part Number

Fluid level indicator 000 466 10 53


Page 674

Circuit Identification
Page 1339

Brake System (Sheet No. 331.0)

MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4 Plus) Part No.000 989 08 07 10 (0.75 Liter Container) Part No. 000 989 08
07 11 (5.0 Liter Container)

Brake Pad Paste (Sheet No. 332)

MB Brake Pad Paste Part No. 001 989 10 51

Central Hydraulic System-Model 600 (Sheet No. 342)

MB Hydraulic Fluid Part No. 100 890 00 11

Hydraulic Oil For Load Leveling System and Hydropneumatic Suspension (Sheet No. 343)

MB Hydraulic Oil Part No. 000 989 91 03 10 all models

NOTE:

Dealer Stock of the previous part no. 000 989 85 03 may be used on vehicles up to M.Y. 1985.

Refrigerants (Sheet 361) Quality R 12

Compressor Oils (Sheet 362)

Windshield Washer Concentrate (Sheet 371)

MB Windshield Washer Concentrate "S"


Part No. 001 986 19 71 11 (40 ml)

Note:

Refer to S.I. MBNA 82/23b, October 1987, for suggested mixing ratios and temperature
recommendations.

Fuel Requirements

1. Gasoline Engines

Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as Ethanol, MTBE, IPA, IDA, and TBA can be used
provided the ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10%. The ratio of
Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.

Using mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol is not allowed. - MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%. Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be used. These
blends must also meet all other fuel requirements such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range,
vapor pressure, etc.

As of model year 1987, all gasoline models require premium unleaded gasoline

As of model year 1986, all gasoline models except 190E 2.3 require premium unleaded gasoline
Page 42
Power Seat Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Locations
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations

Fuse and Relay Block Identification and Location

Left Rear Corner of Engine Compartment

The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.

F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)

The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Maintenance - Factory Approved Service Products

Technical Service Bulletin # 00_053 Date: 931001

Maintenance - Factory Approved Service Products

NOTE: Technical Service Bulletin 00_053, dated 10/93 was superseded by the Factory Approved
Service Products Sheet (OE Part Number S-0473-98L) dated 12/98. The information contained
within this bulletin (00_053) reflects the changes made by the 12/98 Factory Approved Service
Products Sheet.

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: October 1993 (supersedes 5.1. MBNA 00/47. Oct. 1992)

REF. NO. MBNA 00/53

Revision: Approved automatic transmission fluids, and R134a part numbers.

General Information

SUBJECT: FACTORY APPROVED SERVICE PRODUCTS

Attached is a current listing (as of Jan. 2000) of factory-approved service products which are
presently available in the U.S.A or Canada. It will be revised periodically to add or delete products
according to the latest information received from the factory.

We recommend that only approved service products be used in Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

Engine Oil

APPROVED ENGINE OILS

IMPORTANT:

Engine oils are labeled on the container with various ACEA (Association des Constructeurs
Europeens d'Automobiles) and/or API (American Petroleum Institute) designations of quality.
Mercedes Benz recommends the use of engine oils which meet ACEA or API classifications. If an
ACEA quality engine oil is not available, then an API quality engine oil should be used. Only engine
oils (including synthetic and/or recycled engine oil) with any of the following classification grade, or
combinations thereof, are approved:
Engine ACEA classification API classification

Gasoline A2 SH

A3 SJ

Diesel B2 CF-4

B3 CG-4

Always refer to the viscosity grade charts in the Owner's Manual or below for the proper viscosity
grade based on ambient temperature.

Note: The chart (see image) supersedes ALL previously published viscosity charts.

Select oil viscocity according to the lowest air temperature expected before the next oil change
using the chart below (image).

Viscosity Grades For Motor Oils

For additional information, please refer to the vehicle Owner's Manual.

Other Lubricants and Fluids

HYPOID GEAR OIL


Diagram Information and Instructions
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 269

and from the information generates a control signal for the electro-hydraulic actuator. The
electro-hydraulic actuator regulates pressure in the lower chambers of the CIS-E fuel distributor
which provides for the optimal fuel quantity required by the engine. Furthermore, the CIS-E control
unit provides an output signal for operation of the fuel pump relay, air injection relay, diagnostic
socket (air/fuel mixture information, and fault diagnosis), and the "CHECK ENGINE" light operation.

Fig. 72 Bosch On/Off Ratio Tester

Malfunctions resulting from open or short circuits or failure of the oxygen sensor will be indicated by
the "CHECK ENGINE" light at the instrument cluster. Because the CIS-E control unit does not have
memory capabilities, intermittent failures may cause the "CHECK ENGINE" light to flicker or go out
when the fault is not present. Fault diagnosis is accomplished by the use of the Bosch on/off ratio
tester ((Bosch KDJE-P 600, lambda tester) via the diagnostic socket.
Instruments - (Oil Level Indicator) Testing & Function

Oil Level Warning Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - (Oil Level Indicator) Testing &
Function

REF. NO. 18/41

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: June 1991

SUBJECT: MODELS 107, 124, 126, 129 AND 201 (201 ENGINES WITH SINGLE DRIVE BELT
ONLY) A.

FUNCTION/TESTING OF THE LOW OIL LEVEL INDICATOR

B. INFORMATION CONCERNING LOW OIL LEVEL INDICATOR LAMP/OIL CHANGE

Examination of returned oil level sensors often indicates no faults in the component. To avoid
unnecessary removal, this S.I. explains the operation and testing of the oil level indicator.

A. Function/Testing of the Low Oil Level Indicator

1. Function The low oil level indicator monitors the oil level in the oil pan when the engine is
running and when the oil temperature is over 60~ C (under 60~ C there is no low oil level
indication). The indicator lamp comes on when the ignition is turned on, and goes out as soon as
the engine is running.

Components

A1 Instrument cluster
S2/1 Ignition/start switch (with gasoline engines only)

S2/2 Preglow/start switch (with diesel engines only)

S43 Low oil level indicator switch (oil level sensor with float and reed contact)

a Electronics

F1 Fuse and relay box

e12 Low oil level indicator lamp


Page 1142

Ignition Rotor: Locations

Ignition Distributor Assembly

The ignition rotor is located within the high voltage distributor.


Page 337

Fig. 4

Fig. 5
Page 1053
Wiper Switch: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 1430
A/C - R12 to R134a Conversion

Technical Service Bulletin # 83_081A Date: 940801

A/C - R12 to R134a Conversion

REF.NO.: 83/81A

DATE: August 1994

REVISION: The part number for the adapter hose has been changed.

SUBJECT: ALL MODELS USING R12 REFRIGERANT IN VEHICLES USING NIPPONDENSO


10P, 10PA A/C COMPRESSORS, CONVERSION OF R12 TO ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY
R134a

General Information

With the introduction of model 140 in model year 1992. Mercedes-Benz was the first car
manufacturer worldwide to use environmentally friendly refrigerant R134a. Beginning in 1991, all
other models (except 201) were converted to use refrigerant R134a.

Due to the increasingly scarce availability and eventual production phase out (1995) of refrigerant
R12, models using Nippondenso 10P and 10PA A/C compressors may be converted for use with
refrigerant R134a.

In case of a necessary repair under the terms of the Limited New Vehicle Warranty or the Spare
Parts Warranty and if R12 is no longer available, a warranty claim for the conversion can be
submitted. In all other cases any conversion to R134a is the responsibility of the vehicle owner.

In performing this conversion, the following steps must be followed:

A. Preparation/Testing of the A/C system B. Testing A/C System for Refrigerant Leaks C. Removal
of Mineral Oil from A/C System D. Replacing Receiver/Drier E. Installation of Service Valves F.
Filling A/C System with R134a Refrigerant

G. Affixing new R134a Label H. Performing Final; Function Test of A/C System

Conversion Steps A - H

Before proceeding with the conversion to refrigerant R134a, park vehicle inside workshop and
allow vehicle to attain workshop temperature (approx. 70 ° F).
A. Preparation/Testing of the A/C System

B. Testing A/C System for Refrigerant Leaks 1. If A/C system is void of any R12 refrigerant or the
compressor will not engage, check refrigerant compressor for binding by rotating A/C

compressor by hand.
Locations

Washer Fluid Level Switch: Locations

Component ID S42

Component Name Washer fluid level switch

Component Location Top of windshield washer fluid reservoir


Page 1307

The BDM oil extraction equipment is designed to extract waste oil via the oil dipstick of the engine,
BDM's MB adapter (Pat. Pending) with collet lock for 8 mm (5/16") adapter hoses.

^ The unit consists of BDM Engineering's Stainless Steel Oil Recovery Unit of five gallon capacity.

^ Several adaptor hoses are included.

^ Fluid level indicator.

^ The unit can extract 4 to 11 quarts of warm waste oil in two to five minutes.

^ All replacement parts are sold separately with the exception of the Vacuum Generator. BDM
offers a tandem unit: oil-coolant.

Accessories:
Maintenance - Factory Approved Service Products

Technical Service Bulletin # 00_053 Date: 931001

Maintenance - Factory Approved Service Products

NOTE: Technical Service Bulletin 00_053, dated 10/93 was superseded by the Factory Approved
Service Products Sheet (OE Part Number S-0473-98L) dated 12/98. The information contained
within this bulletin (00_053) reflects the changes made by the 12/98 Factory Approved Service
Products Sheet.

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: October 1993 (supersedes 5.1. MBNA 00/47. Oct. 1992)

REF. NO. MBNA 00/53

Revision: Approved automatic transmission fluids, and R134a part numbers.

General Information

SUBJECT: FACTORY APPROVED SERVICE PRODUCTS

Attached is a current listing (as of Jan. 2000) of factory-approved service products which are
presently available in the U.S.A or Canada. It will be revised periodically to add or delete products
according to the latest information received from the factory.

We recommend that only approved service products be used in Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

Engine Oil

APPROVED ENGINE OILS

IMPORTANT:

Engine oils are labeled on the container with various ACEA (Association des Constructeurs
Europeens d'Automobiles) and/or API (American Petroleum Institute) designations of quality.
Mercedes Benz recommends the use of engine oils which meet ACEA or API classifications. If an
ACEA quality engine oil is not available, then an API quality engine oil should be used. Only engine
oils (including synthetic and/or recycled engine oil) with any of the following classification grade, or
combinations thereof, are approved:
Engine ACEA classification API classification

Gasoline A2 SH

A3 SJ

Diesel B2 CF-4

B3 CG-4

Always refer to the viscosity grade charts in the Owner's Manual or below for the proper viscosity
grade based on ambient temperature.

Note: The chart (see image) supersedes ALL previously published viscosity charts.

Select oil viscocity according to the lowest air temperature expected before the next oil change
using the chart below (image).

Viscosity Grades For Motor Oils

For additional information, please refer to the vehicle Owner's Manual.

Other Lubricants and Fluids

HYPOID GEAR OIL


Page 493
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 833
3 Unscrew hex, head nut (arrow) and pull out TDC transmitter.
4 Screw adapter into the spark plug bore of No. 1 cylinder.

Insert adjusting pin (1) into the adapter and push down fully.
Service and Repair

Air Filter Element: Service and Repair

Air Cleaner Assembly

1. Remove the mounting nuts (5).

2. Disconnect the shaped hoses for crankcase ventilation and air injection system.

3. Remove the air cleaner assembly.

4. With the sealing ring in place reinstall the air cleaner assembly in reverse manner.
Page 1399
Figures 2 and 3
9. Refill recycled R12 once again into A/C system.

10. Operate A/C system again, as in above steps 7-13 for approx. 10 minutes.

CAUTION:

Should the A/C compressor become noisy, stop engine and continue with "D. Replacing Receiver
Drier.

11. Using air conditioning service equipment, evacuate the R12 at high. and low-pressure sides (A,
Figure 2 and B, Figure 3) of A/C system for 45 minutes.

Note:

A/C service equipment should be able to pull at least 29.2" of vacuum.

CAUTION:

At this point, R12 is not be used in A/C system again.

D. Replacing Receiver/Drier Please see SMS, Repair Instructions, Job No 83-540.

E. Installation of Service Valves

CAUTION:

Prior to the installation of the angled service valve (Figure 6) or adapter hose (4, Figure 7) the
existing Schrader valve core (arrow, Figure 4) located in A/C line must be removed.
Page 1199
1 Slightly loosen fastening bolt (1) and nuts (2 and 3) on alternator bracket.
2 Tension V-belt with tension screw (4).

3 Tighten fastening bolt (1) and nuts (2 and 3).

V-belt C Refrigerant Compressor


Page 933

Throttle Position Switch: Description and Operation

Fig. 20 Throttle Valve Switch

The throttle valve switch communicates the "idle" and "full load" throttle positions to the CIS-E
control unit. The throttle valve switch is mounted on the throttle body and actuated by the throttle
valve shaft. A separate contact is closed for each of the throttle valve end positions, i.e. idle and full
load.
Fuel Injection (CIS-E)
Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Fuel Injection (CIS-E)

California Models

Fig. 56 CIS-E I/O Diagram

The CIS-E control unit evaluates information provided by various sensors concerning the engine
operating conditions,
Page 57
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 1060
-10 mm -2°15'±30'
-20 mm -2°45'±30'
Sunroof - Modifed Drive Unit and Relay

Sunroof / Moonroof Relay: Technical Service Bulletins Sunroof - Modifed Drive Unit and Relay

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: November 1988

SUBJECT: MODIFIED SLIDING/POP-UP ROOF DRIVE UNIT AND RELAY MODELS 124, 126,
201

REF. NO. 77/16, 82/50 As of March 1988, a modified sliding/pop-up roof drive unit and a 6-pole
relay (previously 8-pole) have been installed in these vehicles. These parts can also be installed in
models prior to prior to production phase-in. The respective part numbers remain unchanged.

Modifications

Part name Previous version Modified version

Drive unit 3 wires 2 wires

Relay 8-pole 6-pole

Microswitch 3 (colorless) 2 (red & yellow)

speed stages 2 stages 1 stage

Suppressor

resistors in relay - 2
The drive units and relays of the previous and modified versions are interchangeable, whereby the
drive unit will operate at one speed only.

FIGURE 1

Figure 1 Wiring diagram, sliding/pop-up roof - previous version

M 12 Sliding/pop-up roof drive unit

M 12m1 Sliding/pop-up roof motor M 12k1

Sliding/pop-up roof relay

M 12s1 Microswitch, "down" position M 12s2 Microswitch, "closed" position M 12s3 Microswitch,
2nd speed W 6

Ground, left rear wheelhousing

S 13/2 Sliding/pop-up roof switch

a Connector of electrical equipment, terminal 5 (15R) (models 124, 126) Electrical center,
connector N (15R) (model 201)

b Connector for electrical equipment, terminal 4 (58d) (models 124, 126) Terminal block on beater
box (58d) (model 201)
Page 233
Relay Box: Application and ID

Fuse and Relay Block Identification and Location

Left Rear Corner of Engine Compartment

The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.

F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)

The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 1401

F. Filling A/C System with R134a Refrigerant

1. Evacuate AC system using air conditioning service equipment.

2. Fill AC compressor with PAG oil, note fill capacity in image.

3. Fill AC system with refrigerant R134a, note fill capacity in image.

4. Run engine at idle speed for approx. 3 minutes.

G. Affixing R134a Fill Label

1. Using a permanent marking pen, note fill capacities of R134a refrigerant and PAG oil in the
appropriate boxes of the R134a Fill Label, along with the conversion date (Figure 8).

2. Affix R134a Fill Capacity Label over the existing label.

H. Performing Final Function Test of A/C System. 1. Perform final function and leak test of the A/C
system to verify proper function of the entire A/C system.
Locations
Power Window Safety Switch: Locations
Component ID S21/7

Component Name Safety switch, rear power windows

Component Location Center console


Locations
Hazard Flasher Relay: Locations

Fuse and Relay Block Identification and Location

Left Rear Corner of Engine Compartment

The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.

F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)

The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 1171
Compression Check: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Special Tool, Compression Recorder
REF. NO. 01/10, 58/47

To: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: June 1987

SUBJECT: COMPRESSION RECORDERS WITH QUICK-RELEASE CONNECTIONS ALL


MODELS

New compression recorders with quick-release connections are now available for checking the
compression pressure of all gasoline and diesel engines. They replace the previous compression
recorders with screw-on adapters.

Both recorders (gasoline and diesel) are now available, together, in one plastic case.

The following sets are available:

Special Tool 001 589 76 21 00 (Figure 1)

- compression recorder for gasoline engines

- recording cards, 3.5 - 17.5 bar (001 589 76 21 13)

- compression recorder for diesel engines

- recording cards, 10 - 40 bar (001 589 76 21 21)

- adapters (3) for diesel engines (001 589 76 21 23)

- assorted accessories (extansion leads, etc.)

Special Tool 001 589 77 21 00 (Figure 2)


Page 464

Symbols Part 1
Page 1039

Symbols Part 1
Page 331
Activation for the A/T kickdown solenoid valve is routed via the fuel pump relay. The circuit to the
kickdown solenoid valve is interrupted approx. 200 RPM prior to maximum engine RPM cut-out and
the transmission shifts to the next gear. This will assure that shifting occurs prior to maximum
engine RPM cutout.
Page 1176

The conversion formula to convert foot-pounds (ft/lbs) to newton-meters (Nm) is to take the
foot-pounds and multiply by 1.35.

For example: 47 ft/lbs X 1.35 = 63.45 Nm

Some of the more common conversions are found below.

Pound-foot Newton-meter

1..................1.35 5..................6.75 10.................13.50 15.................20.25 20.................27.00


25.................33.75 30.................40.50 35.................47.25 40.................54.00 45.................60.75
50.................67.50

Fig. 10 Conversion Table, Imperial Gallons To Liters

Fig. 8 Conversion Table, U.S. Gallons To Liters


Page 706

Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection

In-Car Temperature Sensor

Dome lamp -

Pull out sideways towards the left.

2-pole coupling (1) and ventilation hose (2) -

Pull off.

In-car temperature sensor (B 10/4) -

Press off.

Install -

In the reverse sequence.

Automatic climate control -

Test.

Test Data:

Sensor temperature in °C, Resistance in kohms + 10 -

18.2 to 21.5

+ 15 -

15.3 to 17.2

+20 -

11.5 to 13.5
+ 25 -

9.5 to 10.5

+30 -

7.5 to 8.5

+35 -

6.0 to 7.0

+40 -

4.5 to 5.5

+45 -

3.5 to 4.5

Commercially Available Tester:

Multimeter e.g. SUN, DMM 5


Page 1287
For rear axle differential (For limited slip see below), and for refilling 4MATIC front differential.
MB Hypoid Gear Oil MB part no. 000 989 28 03

HYPOID GEAR OIL

For limited slip differential and rear axle with ASD, 4MATIC

MB Limited Slip Differential Oil MB part no. 000 583 09 04

HYPOID GEAR OIL

For initial (new) fill of 4MATIC front differential

MB Life-long hypoid gear oil MB part no. 001 989 05 03

MANUAL TRANSMISSION FLUID

For MB manual transmission

MB Manual Transmission Fluid MB part no. 000 989 26 03

STEERING GEAR LUBRICANT

For power steering

MB Power Steering Fluid MB part no. 000 989 88 33

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

For MB automatic transmission (not including MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6),
transfer case (4MATIC), and MB manual transmission (except GL76/30-5 and GL275E) use:

Castrol Dexron-III/Mercon ATF F-30341 Castrol Transmax M-22257 / 22096 Chevron ATF Dexron
III F-30108 / 30159 Citgo Multi-Purpose ATF D-21571 Exxon Superflo ATF Dexron-III F-30111
Havoline ATF Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Pennzoil, ATF D-21380 Pennzoil, ATF F-30110 Quaker
State Dexron-III/Mercon F-30161 Sunoco ATF Dexron-III/Mercon F-30176 Texaco ATF
Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Unocal Multi-Purpose ATF D-22413 / 22431 Valvoline ATF Type D

Supplier Information: Castrol, Piscataway, NJ / Toronto, Canada Chevron Products Co., San
Francisco CA Citgo Petroleum Corp., Tulsa, OK Exxon Company USA, Houston, TX Texaco
Lubricants Co., Houston, TX Pennzoil Products Co., Houston, TX Quaker State, Seneca, PA Sun
Co., Philadelphia, PA Unocal Science and Technology Div., Brea, CA Valvoline International,
Lexington, KY

For MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6 and Model 163 transfer case use:

MB Automatic Transmission Fluid MB part no. 001 989 21 03 10

SUPERCHARGER OIL

MB Supercharger Oil MB part no. 000 989 6201


Page 133

Circuit Identification
Page 446

Fuse Identification
Antitheft - Anti-Towing Sensor Deletion

Tow Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft - Anti-Towing Sensor Deletion

REF. NO. MBNA 82/27

To: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: August 1987

SUBJECT: ANTI-TOWING SENSOR REPLACEMENT

As of June 1986 production, the anti-towing sensor was deleted from production.

Effective Serial Number

In case of customer complaints regarding the anti-towing sensor not operating properly, simply
disconnect the anti-towing sensor and insulate the harness connector.

Do not replace the anti-towing sensor unless there is a customer request.

In cases where the customer reguests renewal of the sensor, inform that the sensor was
discontinued on later models and that replacement thereof may lead to similar anti-theft alarm
system malfunctions.
Page 533
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Specifications
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Specifications
COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (B11/9 or B11/10) RESISTANCE

At -20 °C ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................... 15.7 kOhm

At -10 °C ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................... 10.0 kOhm

At 0 °C .................................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 5.9 kOhm

At 10 °C ...............................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 3.7 kOhm

At 20 °C ...............................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 2.5 kOhm

At 30 °C ...............................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 1.7 kOhm

At 40 °C ...............................................................................................................................................
....................................................... 1.17 kOhm

At 50 °C ...............................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 830 Ohm

At 60 °C ...............................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 600 Ohm

At 70 °C ...............................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 435 Ohm

At 80 °C ...............................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 325 Ohm

At 90 °C ...............................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 245 Ohm

At 100 °C .............................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 185 Ohm

Tolerance .............................................................................................................................................
................................................................ ± 5%
Page 1518

Fuse Identification
Page 85
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Fuse 5 Blows & ACC System Cannot be Shut Off
Page 949

Fig. 25 Crankshaft Position Sensor Signal

t1 = First Segment t2 = Second Segment t3 = Third Segment t4 = Fourth Segment d = Period for
one crankshaft rotation

The crankshaft position is recognized from the voltage signals which are produced. The segment
front edge generates a negative voltage signal. The segment rear edge generates a positive
voltage signal. Engine speed is determined by measuring the period (d) which is equal to one
crankshaft revolution.
Page 469
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 1587
Page 153
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Diagram Information and Instructions
Seat Heater Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 1284

Fluid - Differential: Technical Service Bulletins Tools - Oil Evacuation Equipment

REF. NO. MBNA 00/65, 58/95

TO: ALL MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: July 1997

SUBJECT: ALL MODELS OIL EVACUATION EQUIPMENT

Mercedes-Benz engines are designed to allow engine oil extraction from under the hood via the
dipstick tube. The dipstick tube has an enlarged cross section and a formed extension at the top
end. On the other side it ends a short distance from the oil pan bottom. Engine oil can be extracted
using the dipstick tube.

Note:

Inserting tubular probes through the dipstick tube is NOT recommended.

Engine oil drain plugs will continue for the time being, although access to them may only be
possible with the removal of engine compartment trim or noise encapsulation panels.

A pneumatic oil suction unit, manufactured by Deutsche Tecalemit in Germany, is approved by


DBAG for use with M-B engines. The unit has recently been added to the MBNA Standard
Equipment Program and is available for order in the USA via the sole importer/distributor: AGA,
Inc. of Bettendorf, IA.

This portable unit (Figure 1) utilizes the suction principle via an air-powered piston pump. The
engine oil extraction is accomplished by connecting a specialized Suction Adapter from the unit to
the dipstick tube.
Additionally, a variety of flexible probes and fittings are also supplied for other oil removal
applications e.g. power steering reservoir, rear axle, etc. Waste oil collected in the tank of the unit
can be emptied using the unit's pump.

Features of this unit are as follows:

^ Portable and compact (21"x 40"x 35" W.H.D)

^ Cart mounted on 4 wheels (2 are locking castors).

^ 80 liter (21 gallon) waste oil tank (+ overflow indicator)

^ Adapters and fittings for other oil and non aggressive liquid removal applications.

^ Oil extraction rate @ 1.4 gal/min.

^ Automatic shut-off at the end of extraction cycle.

Note:

- Unit is powered by standard shop air supply. 87 PSI (6 Bar) min. pressure needed.
Page 104

Circuit Identification
Page 1275
FLUID GREASE (NLGI Class 00)
For door lock pin and striker eye

Castrol CLS Grease Castrol, Wayne, NJ / Toronto, Canada

HIGH TEMPERATURE ROLLER BEARING GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For front wheel bearings

MB High Temperature Antifriction Bearing MB part no. 001 989 23 51 10 Grease

CHASSIS GREASE (NLGI Class 01)

For all greasing points except front wheel hubs

Shell Retinax C Shell Oil Co., Houston, TX

LONG TERM LUBRICATING GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For release bearing, release arm and splines for connecting linkage on level control valves

Molykote Longterm 2 Plus Dow Corning

MB Long Term Grease MB part no. 000 989 63 51

MULTI-PURPOSE GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For all greasing points except front wheel

3752 Almagard Vari-Purpose Lubricant Lubrication Engineers Inc., Fort Worth, TX

Castrol LM Grease Castrol, Wayne, NJ / Toronto, Canada

Exxon Multipurpose Grease Exxon Co., Houston, TX

Renolit MP Fuchs Oil Corp., Somerville, NJ

Unocal MP Automotive Grease Union Oil Company of California, Brea, CA

COMPLEX GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For sliding blocks of sliding/pop-up roof

MB Lubrication Paste MB part no. 001 989 46 51

HYDRAULIC OIL

For hydraulic system, Model 600

MB Hydraulic Oil MB part no. 100 890 O0 11

HYDRAULIC OIL

For load leveling system, hydropneumatic suspension, hydraulic soft top, 4MATIC, ASD

MB Hydraulic Oil MB part no. 000 989 91 03 10

HYDRAULIC OIL

For tandem pumps with common oil reservoir for steering and level control in Model 210.

MB Hydraulic Oil MB part no. 000 989 20 03 10


ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

MB Anti-Corrosion/Anti-freeze MB part no. Q 1 03 0002

CAUTION! The use of aluminum components in M-B engines requires that


anti-corrosion/anti-freeze specifically formulated to protect aluminum
Locations

Coolant Level Sensor: Locations

Component Location

Component ID S41

Component Name Coolant level switch

Location Right side of engine compartment, lower front of coolant reservoir


Page 1353

Automatic Transmission Fluid (Sheet No. 236.4, 236.6 & 236.7)

High Temperature Roller Bearing Grease (Sheet No. 265.1). (NLGI Class 2) for Front Wheel
Bearings

MB High Temperature Antifriction Bearing Grease

Part No. 000 989 49 51

Shell Retinax AX Shell Oil Company, NY, NY

Multi-purpose Greases (Sheet No. 267)

Product Name Supplier

3752 Almagard Vari-Purpose Lubrication Engineers, Inc. Fort Worth, TX.

Lubricant

Castrol MP Grease Castrol, Hackensack, NJ

Chevron Dura-Lith Grease EP2 Chevron USA, Inc. San Francisco, Ca


Mobilgrease MP Mobil Oil Corp., New York, NY

Renolit MP Fuchs oil Corporation, Somerville, NJ

Union MP Automotive Grease Union Oil Company of California, Brea CA

Valvoline Mehrzweck Fett Valvoline International, Lexington, KY

(Multipurpose Grease)

Engine Cooling System (Sheet No. 325.1)

MB Anticorrosion/Antifreeze MBNA Part no. Q1 03 0001

CAUTION!:

The use of aluminum components in M-B engines requires that the Anticorrosion/Antifreeze used
be specifically formulated to protect the aluminum parts. Failure to use MB Anticorrosion
/Antifreeze may result in a significantly shortened service life. While there may be a number of
products available which will provide the required protection, all such products have not been
tested for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The above new product is suitable for our engines and can be
mixed with the original Anticorrosion/Antifreeze filled in at the factory.
Page 1429
Page 117
Solenoid Valve Relay
Brake Switch

ABS Indicator Lamp

Wheel Speed Sensors

Ohms Measurements

Grounds

Wheel Speed Sensors

Solenoid Valves
Page 190

Audible Warning Device Control Module: Locations Warning Module (Seat Belts, Keys, Lights)

Component ID N2/4

Component Name Warning module (seat belts, keys, lights)

Component Location Left of steering column, behind lower dash panel


Locations
Speedometer Module: Locations
Component ID A1p8

Component Name Electronic speedometer with top speed limiter

Component Location Part of instrument cluster


Page 881

Throttle Position Switch: Testing and Inspection Throttle Valve Switch Test

Equipment
Multimeter -- e.g. SUN DMM-5

Wiring Diagram, Throttle Valve Switch

N1/2 Electronic ignition control unit N3

CIS-E control unit

N8 Idle speed control unit

S29/2 Throttle valve switch W11 Ground, engine X48

Connector sleeve (solder joint in harness)

X56 Connector, throttle valve switch


Page 551
Power Seat Switch: Locations Power Seat Switch
Component ID S22

Component Name Left front power seat switch

Component Location Left front door

Component ID S23

Component Name Right front power seat switch

Component Location Right front door


Page 487

Circuit Identification
Page 1094

Test Steps 1.0 - 3.3


Page 869

Oxygen Sensor Voltage

A rich mixture will produce a high voltage (up to 1.0V) and a lean mixture will produce a lower
voltage.
Page 22
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Page 1020
Power Window Switch: Locations Power Window Switch (Front Console)
Component ID S21/1

Component Name Left Rear power window switch (front console)

Component Location Center console

Component ID S21/2

Component Name Right rear power window switch (front console)

Component Location Center console


Page 113
32 - Pump Pwr. Rel. Contacts (NC Ford, GM) 33 - Outlet Solenoid Valve (Rear) 34 - Outlet
Solenoid Valve (Right Front) 35 - Inlet Solenoid Valve (Left Front)
NC = No connection
Page 664

B. Control lamp does not light up in key position "2" (control function):
Page 901
EGR Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
The temperature of the recirculated exhaust gases is sensed by the EGR temperature sensor. The
sensor is located in the exhaust gas recirculation line and sends a signal to the CIS-E control unit
in the form of a resistance value. Under certain operating conditions, if the exhaust gas
temperature decreases to less than approx. 290°F while driving, the CIS-E control unit will
recognize this as a fault (no exhaust gas recirculation). The "Check Engine" light will illuminate and
a fault code will be stored in the ECU memory.
Page 751

Circuit Identification
Page 926
Air Flow Sensor Adjusting Pin Location
1. Remove the fuel supply line at the fuel distributor and the sensor plate stop bracket.

2. With an appropriate drift carefully drive the dowel pin (arrow) down until the air-flow sensor plate
upper edge is flush with the upper edge of the cylindrical part of the air funnel. A higher position of
up to 0.008 in. (0.2mm) is permissible.

NOTE: If the dowel pin is driven in too deeply it will be necessary to remove the mixture control unit
to correct the adjustment. Refer to ZERO POINT EXCESSIVELY LOW.

3. Reinstall the fuel supply line and sensor plate stop bracket.

4. Check the idle speed and air/fuel mixture for accuracy.

ZERO POINT EXCESSIVELY LOW

Air Flow Sensor Adjusting Pin Location

1. Remove the mixture control unit and sensor plate stop bracket.

2. 2. With an appropriate drift carefully drive the dowel pin (arrow) down until the the air-flow sensor
plate upper edge is flush with the upper edge of the cylindrical part of the air funnel. A higher
position of up to 0.008 in. (0.2mm) is permissible.

NOTE: Do not drive the pin in too deeply. If the dowel pin is driven in too deeply it will be necessary
to correct the adjustment. Excessive use of the dowel pin adjustment may loosen the dowel pin
seat.

3. Reinstall the mixture control unit.

4. Check the idle speed and air/fuel mixture for accuracy.


Page 53

Symbols Part 1
Locations
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations
Component ID S13/2

Component Name Sliding/pop-up roof switch

Component Location Center of windshield header, part of E1512


Page 1370

- Standard air coupling connector provided.

Equipment Ordering Information


AGA, Inc. 1041 Carriage Place Drive Bettendorf, IA 52722 USA Phone: 1-888-8AGAINC
(1-888-824-2462) Fax: (319) 332-4793
Page 583
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Page 87
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 1308

BDM Stainless Steel Tandem Oil and Coolant Recovery System

Technical Data:

Dimensions:

Width: 9 inches (230 mm)

Height: 24 inches (610 mm)

Weight: 14 lbs.
Air pressure Data:

Required air pressure: 70 psi, regulator supplied

Air press. Connection: Automotive Air Hose connector

Air consumption: 2.0 CFM @ 70 psi

BDM Engineering's Stainless Steel Vacuum Generator:

Vacuum generated: 28 inches of vacuum @ 3.1 CFM

Regulated via: 70 psi regulator

Silenced via: replaceable ABS Plastic silencer with 1/4 inch pipe thread.

Deutsche Tecalemit (DT) (Oil Evacuation Equipment)


Page 1130

Ignition Cable: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition System - Wires with Crimp-On terminals

DATE: March 1990

REF.NO. 15/42

SUBJECT: IGNITION WIRES WITH CRIMP-ON TERMINALS ALL MODELS WITH GASOLINE
ENGINES
Ignition wires are now available from your Parts Distribution Center only on a per meter basis.
Therefore, the ignition wires must be provided with terminals prior to installation. This requires the
use of a crimping tool which is to be used as follows:

1. Using the old ignition wire as a guide, cut the new ignition wire to length.

2. Strip 6.8 mm (max.) of insulation from both wire ends. Use the guide imprinted on the crimping
tool.

3. Twist the wire end tightly, and slip the terminal onto the bare end of ignition wire with a twisting
motion. Position the jaws of the crimping tool close to the open end of the terminal. Crimp sleeve
onto insulation. See Figure:

4. Then crimp terminal onto ignition wire core by positioning crimping tool as far from the screw
threads as possible. See Figure:

5. Slip ignition wire identification band over cable, if applicable.

6. Screw spark plug connector and right-angle connector onto ignition wire.

Parts Information

Part Name Part Number

Ignition wire (running meter) 110 159 18 18

Sleeve with M3-terminal 000 159 14 33

Special Tools
Page 1335

2. Multi-Viscosity Engine Oils (Sheet No. 226.1)


Page 1204
Drive Belt: Tools and Equipment
Special tools

Measuring instrument (Krikit) for measuring belt tension ....................................................................


...................................................................................................... 001 589 69 21 00

10 mm screwdriver for hexagon socket screw of tensioning pulley of AC compressor V-belt ............
..............................................................................................................................................................
. 117 589 03 07 00
Page 276

Engine Control Module: Service and Repair

Fig. 4 CIS-E System Components

1. Check for possible stored fault codes.


2. Remove the passenger side kick panel.
Page 529
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Page 440

Fuse & Relay Box Layout / Relay Identification


Locations

ABS Main Relay: Locations

ABS System Components

Wiring Component Location

Diagram Reference

F1 Fuse/Relay Box Left side of components compartment

G1 Battery Right side of components compartment

G2 Alternator Lower right front of engine

K1 Overvoltage Protection relay In components compartment right side

L6 Rear Axle Speed Sensor (ABS) In rear differential, underside of car

L6/1 Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor Mounted in left steering knuckle

L6/2 Right Front Wheel Speed Sensor Mounted in right steering knuckle
M1 Starter Lower right rear of engine

N16/4 Fuel Pump Relay In components compartment, right of brake fluid reservoir

N26 Anti-Theft Alarm Control Unit Below right front footrest

N30 ABS Control Unit Center of components compartment

N31 ABS Hydraulic Unit Left front corner of engine compartment

S2/1 Ignition/Starter Switch In dash panel, right of steering column

S9 Stop Lamp Switch Top of brake pedal, on bracket

W6 Ground Left rear wheel well, in trunk

W10 Ground, Battery Right side of components compartment

W11 Ground, Engine At ABS hydraulic unit

X(L6) 2 pin Below right side of rear seat

X(L6/1) 2 pin Left rear corner of engine compartment, above shock tower

X26 Connector, Interior/Engine Wiring Harness (12 pin)

Rear of fuse/relay box

X35 Terminal Block, Circuits 30/61 (battery)(2 pin)

Right rear of engine compartment

X42 Connector, Front/Rear Harness


Engine - Break-In Oil New and Rebuilt

Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Break-In Oil New and Rebuilt

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS DATE: June 1990 REF. NO. 00/81

SUBJECT: BREAK-IN OIL

All new and rebuilt engines are distributed from the factory filled with break-in oil.

The rebuilt engines are tagged with a label (Figure 1) indicating this.

To prevent possible engine damage, check oil level and add break-in oil if necessary, before
starting-up these engines.
Page 10

Symbols Part 1
Page 1055
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 531
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 999

2 Loosen line connections (B1, B2 and C), using open box wrenches.

Attention! On level controller, never loosen clamping screw for fastening lever on control shaft

A subsequent location of lever in relation to control shaft is not possible.

3 Unscrew connecting rod (7) on lever (3a) of level controller.

Attention! To loosen connecting rod, unscrew hex. nut on lever (3a) of level controller. If required,
hold ball pin of plastics-mounted ball joints with open-end wrench 10 mm or hold ball pin of
steel-supported ball joints with an angular screwdriver.

On plastics-mounted ball joints never pull ball pin out of ball socket

4 Loosen both hex. screws for attaching level controller to bracket (8) and remove controller.

Note: In the event of leaks, mount new 0-ring, part No.006 997 69 45 on parting surfaces of both
housings.

Installation
Engine - Idle Speed Too HIgh
Page 700

Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection

Outside Temperature Sensor

Outside Temperature Sensor Location

1. Remove the temperature sensor from the windshield wiper bracket.

2. Place the sensor next to an accurate temperature gauge (thermometer) and allow enough time
for the sensor and the gauge to adjust to the ambient temperature.

3. With a suitable ohmmeter, check the resistance of the sensor.

4. Compare the readings with the temperature chart. See: Specifications

If the resistance is not within the specified range, replace the outside temperature sensor.
Page 323
Idle Speed Exceeds 1100 RPM at Times

Idle Speed: All Technical Service Bulletins Idle Speed Exceeds 1100 RPM at Times

07.3-90101 Idle Speed Intermittently Exceeds 1100 RPM, Engines 104; Revised 7/91 10/90

With Engine at Operating Temperature 116, 117 as of M.Y.'86

A. Engine 104

Cause:

1. Return spring fastened incorrectly to linkage. 2. Idle contact of throttle valve switch (S29/2) not
switched.

Remedy: 1. Fasten return spring correctly to linkage. 2. Check idle contact at throttle valve switch.

B. Engines 116, 117 as of MY. '86

Cause: Idle contact of throttle valve switch (S29/2) not switched.

Remedy: Check idle contact at throttle valve switch, replace throttle valve switch (S29/2) or
complete throttle valve assembly if necessary.

Damage Code: 07311 73


Maintenance - Factory Approved Service Products

Technical Service Bulletin # 00_053 Date: 931001

Maintenance - Factory Approved Service Products

NOTE: Technical Service Bulletin 00_053, dated 10/93 was superseded by the Factory Approved
Service Products Sheet (OE Part Number S-0473-98L) dated 12/98. The information contained
within this bulletin (00_053) reflects the changes made by the 12/98 Factory Approved Service
Products Sheet.

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: October 1993 (supersedes 5.1. MBNA 00/47. Oct. 1992)

REF. NO. MBNA 00/53

Revision: Approved automatic transmission fluids, and R134a part numbers.

General Information

SUBJECT: FACTORY APPROVED SERVICE PRODUCTS

Attached is a current listing (as of Jan. 2000) of factory-approved service products which are
presently available in the U.S.A or Canada. It will be revised periodically to add or delete products
according to the latest information received from the factory.

We recommend that only approved service products be used in Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

Engine Oil

APPROVED ENGINE OILS

IMPORTANT:

Engine oils are labeled on the container with various ACEA (Association des Constructeurs
Europeens d'Automobiles) and/or API (American Petroleum Institute) designations of quality.
Mercedes Benz recommends the use of engine oils which meet ACEA or API classifications. If an
ACEA quality engine oil is not available, then an API quality engine oil should be used. Only engine
oils (including synthetic and/or recycled engine oil) with any of the following classification grade, or
combinations thereof, are approved:
Engine ACEA classification API classification

Gasoline A2 SH

A3 SJ

Diesel B2 CF-4

B3 CG-4

Always refer to the viscosity grade charts in the Owner's Manual or below for the proper viscosity
grade based on ambient temperature.

Note: The chart (see image) supersedes ALL previously published viscosity charts.

Select oil viscocity according to the lowest air temperature expected before the next oil change
using the chart below (image).

Viscosity Grades For Motor Oils

For additional information, please refer to the vehicle Owner's Manual.

Other Lubricants and Fluids

HYPOID GEAR OIL


Page 453
Wiper Relay: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 831

Fig. 25 Crankshaft Position Sensor Signal

t1 = First Segment t2 = Second Segment t3 = Third Segment t4 = Fourth Segment d = Period for
one crankshaft rotation

The crankshaft position is recognized from the voltage signals which are produced. The segment
front edge generates a negative voltage signal. The segment rear edge generates a positive
voltage signal. Engine speed is determined by measuring the period (d) which is equal to one
crankshaft revolution.
Page 391

Symbols Part 1
Page 650
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 807

Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Mixture Control Unit

Component Locations

The mixture control unit is fitted to the intake manifold inlet via the throttle valve housing.
Page 35
Power Seat Control Module: Locations Left Front Memory Seat Control Unit
Underside Of LH Front Seat
Service and Repair

Air Filter Element: Service and Repair

Air Cleaner Assembly

1. Remove the mounting nuts (5).

2. Disconnect the shaped hoses for crankcase ventilation and air injection system.

3. Remove the air cleaner assembly.

4. With the sealing ring in place reinstall the air cleaner assembly in reverse manner.
Page 728
4 Remove temperature sensor (6 or 7) from heater unit.
Installation

5 Test temperature sensor (6 or 7) with ohmmeter.

6 Insert temperature sensor (6 or 7) in heater unit and connect 2-pole coupling.

7 Install radio.

8 Install ashtray.

9 Check function of automatic heating system


Page 15
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 838
13 Briefly turn crankshaft in direction of rotation, then unscrew the adapter from the spark plug
bore.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 374
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Electronic Idle Speed Control Test

Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Electronic Idle Speed Control Test

Testing Electronic Idle Speed Control

Testers connect: ..................................................................................................................................


....................................... Telethermometer (018) 124 589 07 21 00, ..................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
Trigger clamp (011), ............................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Engine tester (026), ............................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..... Multimeter (003), ...........................................................................................................................
........................................................ Test cable (034) 102 589 04 63 00.
Extraction device (014)
.......................................................................................................................................................
position at exhaust tail pipe. Engine oil temperature ...........................................................................
................................................................................................... approx. 80° C. Electronic idle speed
control
.............................................................................................................................................................
test (refer to table). Operation of idle speed air valve
....................................................................................................................... test by briefly applying
battery voltage. Power supply .............................................................................................................
................................................... test according to wiring diagram. Engine running
..........................................................................................................................................................
test by switching on all ancillaries.
Page 1511
Fuse: Application and ID

Fuse and Relay Block Identification and Location

Left Rear Corner of Engine Compartment

The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.

F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)

The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 1578
Locations
Heated Glass Element Switch: Locations
Component ID S14

Component Name Heated rear window switch

Component Location Center console, above radio


Engine - Oil Evacuation Equipment

Fluid - Differential: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Evacuation Equipment

REF. NO. MBNA 00/65, 58/95

TO: ALL MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: July 1997

SUBJECT: ALL MODELS OIL EVACUATION EQUIPMENT

Mercedes-Benz engines are designed to allow engine oil extraction from under the hood via the
dipstick tube. The dipstick tube has an enlarged cross section and a formed extension at the top
end. On the other side it ends a short distance from the oil pan bottom. Engine oil can be extracted
using the dipstick tube.

Note:

Inserting tubular probes through the dipstick tube is NOT recommended.

Engine oil drain plugs will continue for the time being. although access to them may only be
possible with the removal of engine compartment trim or noise encapsulation panels.

A pneumatic oil suction unit, manufactured by Deutsche Tecalemit in Germany, is approved by


DBAG for use with M-B engines. The unit has recently been added to the MBNA Standard
Equipment Program and is available for order in the USA via the sole importer/distributor: AGA,
Inc. of Bettendorf, IA.

This portable unit (Figure 1) utilizes the suction principle via an air-powered piston pump. The
engine oil extraction is accomplished by connecting a specialized Suction Adapter from the unit to
the dipstick tube.
Additionally, a variety of flexible probes and fittings are also supplied for other oil removal
applications e.g. power steering reservoir, rear axle, etc. Waste oil collected in the tank of the unit
can be emptied using the unit's pump.

Features of this unit are as follows:

^ Portable and compact (21"x 40"x 35" W.H.D)

^ Cart mounted on 4 wheels (2 are locking castors).

^ 80 liter (21 gallon) waste oil tank (+ overflow indicator)

^ Adapters and fittings for other oil and non aggressive liquid removal applications.

^ Oil extraction rate @ 1.4 gal/min.

^ Automatic shut-off at the end of extraction cycle.

Note:

- Unit is powered by standard shop air supply. 87 PSI (6 Bar) min. pressure needed.
Page 277

CIS-E Control Unit Location

3. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, disconnect the control unit harness connector.

4. Remove the control unit mounting screws and remove the control unit.

5. Replace in reverse manner.


Page 968
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch (Seat Belt Extender)
Component ID S68/2

Component Name Front passenger seat belt buckle switch (seat belt extender)

Component Location Right front seat belt buckle (coupe')

Component ID S68/1

Component Name Driver seat belt buckle switch (seat belt warning buzzer)

Component Location Left front seat belt buckle (coupe


Page 1041
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent
Page 981
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Page 666
Oil Level Sensor: Service and Repair
Page 569

Circuit Identification
Locations
Headlamp Washer Motor Relay: Locations

Fuse and Relay Block Identification and Location

Left Rear Corner of Engine Compartment

The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.

F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)

The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 698

Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations

Outside Temperature Sensor

Component ID B10/5

Component Name Outside temperature sensor

Component Location Rear of engine compartment, next to wiper motor


Page 675

Symbols Part 1
Page 638

Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations 105/115 C Temp Switch Aux Fan
High Speed/Emergency Cut-Out

Component ID S25/5

Component Name 105/115 °C Temperature switch auxiliary fan high speed/emergency cut-out

Component Location

Top front of engine


Page 1184

Compression Check: Tools and Equipment


Page 285

Fuse & Relay Box Layout / Relay Identification


Kickdown Switch

Downshift Switch: Locations Kickdown Switch

Component ID S16/6

Component Name Kickdown switch

Component Location Under top of accelerator pedal


Page 505
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 1372
For rear axle differential (For limited slip see below), and for refilling 4MATIC front differential.
MB Hypoid Gear Oil MB part no. 000 989 28 03

HYPOID GEAR OIL

For limited slip differential and rear axle with ASD, 4MATIC

MB Limited Slip Differential Oil MB part no. 000 583 09 04

HYPOID GEAR OIL

For initial (new) fill of 4MATIC front differential

MB Life-long hypoid gear oil MB part no. 001 989 05 03

MANUAL TRANSMISSION FLUID

For MB manual transmission

MB Manual Transmission Fluid MB part no. 000 989 26 03

STEERING GEAR LUBRICANT

For power steering

MB Power Steering Fluid MB part no. 000 989 88 33

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

For MB automatic transmission (not including MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6),
transfer case (4MATIC), and MB manual transmission (except GL76/30-5 and GL275E) use:

Castrol Dexron-III/Mercon ATF F-30341 Castrol Transmax M-22257 / 22096 Chevron ATF Dexron
III F-30108 / 30159 Citgo Multi-Purpose ATF D-21571 Exxon Superflo ATF Dexron-III F-30111
Havoline ATF Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Pennzoil, ATF D-21380 Pennzoil, ATF F-30110 Quaker
State Dexron-III/Mercon F-30161 Sunoco ATF Dexron-III/Mercon F-30176 Texaco ATF
Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Unocal Multi-Purpose ATF D-22413 / 22431 Valvoline ATF Type D

Supplier Information: Castrol, Piscataway, NJ / Toronto, Canada Chevron Products Co., San
Francisco CA Citgo Petroleum Corp., Tulsa, OK Exxon Company USA, Houston, TX Texaco
Lubricants Co., Houston, TX Pennzoil Products Co., Houston, TX Quaker State, Seneca, PA Sun
Co., Philadelphia, PA Unocal Science and Technology Div., Brea, CA Valvoline International,
Lexington, KY

For MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6 and Model 163 transfer case use:

MB Automatic Transmission Fluid MB part no. 001 989 21 03 10

SUPERCHARGER OIL

MB Supercharger Oil MB part no. 000 989 6201


Seat Belt Buckle Switch (Airbag/ETR)
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch (Airbag/ETR)
Component ID S68/4

Component Name Front passenger seat belt buckle switch (airbag/ETR)

Component Location Right front seat belt buckle

Component ID S68/3

Component Name Driver seat belt buckle switch (airbag/ETR)

Component Location Left front seat belt buckle


Diagram Information and Instructions
Air Bag Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 952

NOTE: With the cylinder head removed, attach a dial gauge holder to the crankcase and position
dial gauge pin on the piston crown.

5 Turn crankshaft with the tool combination until the adjusting pin has reached its highest position.

The piston is then at TDC.


Without A/C

Heater Core Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Without A/C

Data

Resistance at room temperature 15 °C 15.7 kOhms ± 0.5 kOhms

25 °C 10 kOhms ± 0.5 kOhms

35 °C 6.5 kOhms ± 0.5 kOhms

operating temperature 80 °C 1.5 kOhms ± 0.5 kOhms

Removal

1 Remove radio.

2 Remove ashtray.

3 Disconnect 2-pole coupling from temperature sensor (6 or 1).


Page 662

Oil Level Sensor: Diagrams

1 Crankcase

2 Connection plug

3 Locking ring

4 Sealing ring

5 Connection cable

6 Oil dipstick guide tube

7 Oil dipstick

8 Oil level transmitter

9 Oil pump
10 Oil pan

11 Oil pan gasket

12 Timing case cover


Locations
Power Seat Relay: Locations

Fuse and Relay Block Identification and Location

Left Rear Corner of Engine Compartment

The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.

F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)

The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 338
Test Page 3
Page 13
Alarm Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 570

Symbols Part 1
Page 83

Symbols Part 1
Auxiliary Fan Temperature Switch

Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Auxiliary Fan Temperature Switch
36 Temperature switch - Switches second stage supplementary fan on vehicles with air conditioner
or automatic climate control
Page 559
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 318
Page 1398
Steps 1 - 8
Page 1156
Page 652

Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation

Coolant Temperature Sensor Location

PURPOSE

The coolant temperature gauge sensor is a multi-function sensor. Along with providing the ground
circuit for the temperature gauge, it influences the speed of the blower motor via the ACC control
unit.

LOCATION

The coolant temperature sensor is located at the left rear of cylinder head. OPERATION

For detailed operation of the coolant temperature gauge sensor, refer to CONTROL VOLTAGE AT
VARIOUS SELECTIONS OF THE BLOWER SWITCH.
Locations
Fuse Block: Locations

Fuse and Relay Block Identification and Location

Left Rear Corner of Engine Compartment

The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.

F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)

The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Locations
Power Mirror Switch: Locations
Component ID S50

Component Name Outside mirror control switch

Component Location Center console


Page 382

Airbag Control Unit N2/2

1 Web

There is a web (1) on the top face of these airbag or belt tensioner control units. When the control
unit is installed in the vehicle, this web is accessible from outside (with the ashtray, radio or
right-hand tunnel panelling removed) and indicates that the previous mercury switch has been
replaced by a reed contact.

Control units with web need no longer be separately disposed of but may remain in the vehicle for
scrapping, be disposed of as industrial waste or passed on to the usual scrap disposal companies.
Page 777
Combination Switch: Locations Combination Switch
Component ID S4

Component Name Combination switch

Component Location Left side of steering column


Locations

Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations

Component ID S11

Component Name Brake fluid level switch

Component Location Left side of component compartment, top of brake fluid reservoir
Page 1098

Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Idle Speed Air Valve

Test Data

Special Tools

Equipment

- Multimeter -- e.g. SUN DMM-5

- Engine analyzer -- SUN EMT-1019/Master 3 or MCM-2110, All-Test 3610-MB

NOTE: The idle speed control is independent of the air flow sensor position indicator. Run engine
at operating temperature, selector lever in position "P" or "N", A/C compressor turned off and air
intake system tight. Idle speed contact, coolant temperature sensor and EGR system is functioning
properly.
Page 1196
b. With index finger from above in rubber loop.
C. With index finger laterally between rubber loop and push-button.

Checkup:
Page 175

Circuit Identification
Wheels - Approved Alloy Wheel Cleaning Product
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Approved Alloy Wheel Cleaning Product
Date: February 5, 2009

Order No.: S-B-40.10/66

Group: 40

SUBJECT: MY-All, Models All

Approved Alkaline MB Wheel Cleaner for Light Alloy Disk Wheel


Page 441

Fuse Identification
Page 1177
Fig. 3 Conversion Table, Inches To Millimeters
Fig. 11 Conversion Table, Liters To Imperial Gallons

Fig. 9 Conversion Table, Liters To U.S. Gallons


Page 384

- Switch ignition (1) off.

- Disconnect and cover battery negative terminal.


- Remove foot mat in passenger's footwell.

- Unscrew plastic nut on foot rest (2), wrench size 8.

- Disconnect red 10-pin plug connection airbag (X29/9).

- Remove ash tray.

- Unscrew 2 phillips screws (4) on ash tray housing.

- Remove ashtray housing and storage tray (6).

- Remove radio (5).

- Pull off plug connection on control unit.

- Unscrew 2 screws (7) on control unit.

- Remove control unit.

- Install in reverse order noting the following.

Installation Note: Arrow on control unit must point in driving direction. Install in reverse sequence.

Testing After Renewing the Control Unit:


Page 56
Power Seat Relay: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Air Flow Sensor

Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Air Flow Sensor

Airflow Sensor Arrangement

The air flow sensor is mounted in the intake air stream between the air cleaner and throttle plate
valve. The unit consists of an air flow sensor plate, venturi funnel, and a sensor plate position
sensor. The air flow sensor plate is mechanically connected to the control plunger in the fuel
distributor, causing the plunger to rise and fall in direct relation to the amount of air entering the
engine.

Air Flow Funnel Principle

Air/fuel mixtures are also tailored to engine operating conditions by the venturi shape of the cone in
which the air flow sensor plate operates. At idle, when air flow volume is relatively low, the cone
shape increases pressure above the sensor plate, providing additional force to richen air/fuel
mixtures. At part throttle the cone design causes the sensor plate to float higher than air flow
through a straight sided cone would dictate, providing leaner mixtures for improved economy.
During full throttle operation the venturi shape increases air velocity, providing additional force on
the sensor plate and richer air/fuel mixtures for maximum power output.
Page 1088
Idle Speed: Specifications
Idle Speed [1].......................................................................................................................................
..............................................................550 ±50 RPM

[1] Automatic Transmission in Drive


Page 450

Symbols Part 1
Diagram Information and Instructions
Seat Heater Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Oil Filter - Modified Wrench

Oil Filter: Technical Service Bulletins Oil Filter - Modified Wrench

REF. NO. 18/39

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: OCTOBER 1989

SUBJECT: MODIFIED OIL FILTER WRENCH

The previously used oil filter wrench for removing and installing spin-on filters could slip when
attempting to loosen extremely tight oil filter cartridges. To aid in removal, the side area of the
modified socket is provided with threaded bores for two hex. head screws which may be tightened
against the oil filter cartridge. The socket is thereby clamped against the cartridge preventing any
slippage, allowing even the tightest cartridge to be removed.

The top of the socket is provided with 2 additional bores for storing the hex. head screws when not
being used.
Special Tools
Brakes - Parts List of Calipers, Pads, & Wear Indicators
Technical Service Bulletin # 42_008 Date: 910101
Brakes - Parts List of Calipers, Pads, & Wear Indicators

REF. NO. MBNA 42/8

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: January 1991 (supersedes 42/107 and 42/116a)

SUBJECT: A. REAR WHEEL BRAKE CALIPERS MODEL 201 B.

BRAKE PAD APPLICABILITY MODELS 107,123, 124, 126,129 AND 201 AS OF MODEL YEAR
1981

A.Rear Wheel Brake Calipers

MODEL 201

As of March 1990, the same type of rear wheel brake calipers as used on Model 124 are installed
in Model 201. The Textar 421 brake pads of Model 201, part no. 001 420 01 20, continue to be
used. These brake calipers can also be installed (in sets only) in earlier production vehicles.

Note: Brake pads Textar 460 or Textar 401 (Model 124) as well as the anti-squeak brake pads, part
no. 001 420 01 20 05, must not be used in vehicles with the superseding brake caliper.

Effective Serial Number

Model As of Chassis End Number

201 F727908

Parts Information

Part Name Part Number

Brake caliper, left wheel 201 420 02 83

Brake caliper, right wheel 201 420 03 83

B.Brake Pad Applicability

MODELS 107,123, 124,126 AND 201 AS OF MODEL YEAR 1981

This service information lists the correct front and rear brake pads for each model as of M.Y. 1981.
Also included are the current part numbers and material composition for the brake pads.

As of January 1988, only asbestos-free pads and brake linings are used for production and
replacement parts (except Jurid 226 and Textar 269).

Prior to installing brake pads, observe the following:

The brake pad wear sensors need only be replaced when the insulation has been worn through by
the brake rotor, or when one of the sensor components, including the wire insulation, is damaged.
In most instances, the wear sensor can be used again.

Note: The front and rear brake friction materials have been selected to provide equal and optimal
wear characteristics.

Front Brake Pads

Model Part Number Material Comments


107.048 001 420 08 20 Jurid 226 not asbestos free

124 (except .051) 001 420 07 20 Pagid 525 Production pad

201.034 000 420 99 20 Textar 298 Replacement pad for brake squealing complaints

126 (except .043/044) 000 420 94 20 05 Textar 269 not asbestos free

107.025/045 optional with


Locations
Relay Box: Locations

Fuse and Relay Block Identification and Location

Left Rear Corner of Engine Compartment

The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.

F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)

The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Electrical - Electrostatic Discharge Damage Prevention
Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical -
Electrostatic Discharge Damage Prevention
Date: March 23, 2011

Order No: S-B-54.00/238

Group: 54

SUBJECT: MY-All, All Models

Preventing Damage to Electronic Components Due to Electrostatic Discharge

Warning!

Every contact and each physical separation of material or any movement of solid substance, fluids
or particulate loaded gases can generate electrostatic charges. Plastic generally produces the
highest electrostatic charge.

The following electronic components listed as an example can be damaged by ESD:

- Airbag components

- Control units, in particular their bus connections: Control Area Network (data bus/CAN bus)
(CAN), local interconnect network (LIN), etc.

- Sensors

- Antenna amplifier

- Receivers and displays (Radio, TV, GPS, telephone, etc.)

- Multifunction antenna assembly

Safety precautions:

- Avoidance of contact with electrostatic chargeable materials such as PE, PVC, Styrofoam.

- Use only original packaging or specially labeled and defined packaging and transport materials.

- Electronic components which have been removed must be put down on an ESD workplace.
(Example: when swapping the painted cover from one multifunction antenna to another, this must
be performed on an ESD table mat (000 589 52 98 000).

- Touch connectors on electronic components and wiring harness on the housing only. Do not
touch the pins and contacts!

- Electronic components must be installed before they are connected so that potential equalization
with the body can take place.

Returning electronic components in warranty and goodwill cases:

When returning electronic components it is absolutely essential to observe the procedure and
safety precautions listed in WIS doc. AH54.00-P-0001-01A. Electrostatic charge or discharge
means the original fault can be falsified or overlaid. This can lead to distorted faults symptoms in
the case of the fault analysis of the component concerned.
Page 65

Symbols Part 1
Page 1348

Deutsche Tecalemit (DT) oil evacuation unit: Repair and spare parts are available for existing units,
as well as upgrade pump kits to ensure you Deutsche Tecalemit (DT) unit has the latest waste oil
extraction capability.

Please contact: AGA, Inc. Bettendorf, Iowa at 1-888-824-2462


Page 1172

- compression recorder for gasoline engines

- recording cards, 3.5 - 17.5 bar

- accessories

Special Tool Information

Note:

The previous version compression recorder for diesel engines (001 589 47 21 00) with screw-on
adapters is still available.
Page 1226

Oil Filter: Specifications

Oil Filter Cap Central Bolt Model 126 25 Nm

Securing Bolt for Bottom of Oil Filter Model 107 35 Nm


Page 251

Component ID N16

Component Name Engine systems control unit (MAS)

Component Location Right side of component compartment, right of brake fluid reservoir
Idle Speed

Fig. 4 CIS-E System Components

The idle speed control unit is located behind the passenger's floor panel.

Ignition System (EZL)


Page 882

Test Page
Page 883

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

S29/2 Throttle valve switch, full load/idle X56

Connector, throttle valve switch

1 Idle contact (LL)


2 Common

3 Full-load Contact (VL)


Page 678
Oil Pressure Sender: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Locations
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Locations
Component ID S88/2

Component Name Trunk lid lock switch (convenience)

Component Location Part of trunk lock


Page 363

In addition to the installation of the modified control unit, part no. 004 820 11 10, either harness "A"
or "B" (Figure 3) must be used depending on which control unit was installed in the vehicle (see
"Cross Reference: Control unit/harness").

Cross Reference: Control Unit/Harness


A reminder that the modified version of the SRS control unit has been installed, and that a revised
diagnostic test must be performed, is imprinted on the top of the test connector (as "Airbag 1/3,
modified test"). The modified SRS control unit made a revision to the diagnostic procedure
necessary. The revised diagnostic test card should be kept with the tester. All previous versions of
the card are invalid and should be destroyed.

Installation of the modified SRS control unit, part no. 004 820 11 10, will cause the SRS warning
lamp to go out 4 seconds after turning the key to steering lock position 1 or 2 (10 seconds with
previous version control unit).
Page 121
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
Replace Note: Remove and install ECU only with ignition switched off.

1. Loosen fastening screw on support bracket and remove support bracket.

2. Loosen screw and clamp.

3. Remove electronic control unit from support bracket.

4. Actuate lock and pull plug from electronic control unit.

5. Reverse procedure to install and complete test program.


Page 954

7 Continue rotating the crankshaft in direction of rotation until the dial gauge pointer has moved
back by the value specified in the table.

8 Insert locating tool into adjusting slide. The pin of the vibration damper must engage in the slot of
the locating tool.

Engine Measurement through spark plug bore

116.965 2.99

116.962/963 3.36

117.963 3.58

117.967/968 4.09

Correcting
Page 378

In order to detect whether the buckle latches are inserted in the belt buckles or not, new belt
buckles with separate switches and resistors were necessary. This results in the triggering logic
listed below.

Release Logic, Driver's Airbag and Belt Tensioner


Explanation: In a minor accident, in which the safety belt provides adequate protection, only the
belt tensioner is activated when the first release threshold is passed, provided the belt buckle is
fastened.

In a more serious accident, whereby the second threshold is passed, the airbag is also activated.

Release Logic, Driver's and Front Pass. Airbag and Belt Tensioner

Explanation: In a minor accident, in which the safety belt provides adequate protection, only the
belt tensioner is acuvated when the first release threshold is passed, provided the belt buckle is
fastened.

If the belt buckles are not fastened or the second release threshold is passed, the driver's and
passenger's airbags will be activated instead of, or in addition to, the belt tensioners.
Page 64

Circuit Identification
Page 1228

3 Pull single-plug connection of electric line for oil pressure indication in instrument cluster from oil
pressure transmitter.

4 Unscrew fastening screws for oil filter and remove oil filter.

5 Remove remains of gasket from flange surface on crankcase. First close openings (arrows) so
that no remains of gasket can enter the oil ducts in the crankcase.

Installation:

6 Position the oil filter with new gasket and tighten fastening screws to 25 Nm.

7 Plug single-plug connection of electric line for oil pressure indication in instrument cluster onto oil
pressure transmitter.

8 On engines 116.961 standard version and 117.961/968 and special protection vehicles, connect
oil cooler lines to oil filter housing and tighten coupling nuts to 25 Nm. Install pipe elbow between
oil filter and damper.

9 If necessary, replace seal of central bolt and oil filter element. Fit on oil filter cap with new O-ring
and tighten central bolt to 35 Nm.
10 Run engine and check for leaks.

11 Check oil level and correct if required.


Page 177
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Page 108
Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 1134
Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection
1. Carefully remove the ignition wire assembly from the distributor cap.

2. Remove the spark plug connectors from the spark plugs. Check for cracks or burns on the
ignition wire assembly.

NOTE: All ignition wires are identified by reference numbers printed near the distributor cap.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to disconnect the ignition wires from the spark plug connectors.

Ignition Wire Test

3. With an ohmmeter measure the resistance of each ignition wire including connectors.

^ Resistance of each ignition wire including the suppression spark plug connector should be
approx. 1 K ohms (±20%).

^ If the readings are not within specifications replace as necessary.

NOTE: Check with your parts supplier on the availability of individual wires or sets.
Page 1063
Alignment: Service and Repair Checking and Adjusting Rear Toe Angle
Fig. 3 Decreasing Toe-in. 300SEL, 350SD & SDL, 420SEL & 560SEC, SEL & SL & 1989-91 300SE

Fig. 4 Increasing Toe-in. 300SEL, 350SD & SDL, 420SEL & 560SEC, SEL & SL & 1989-91 300SE

Toe angle of the rear wheels results from the location of the rear axle carrier and the semi-trailing
arms. Toe-in value depends within certain limits on the semi-trailing arm position of the rear axle.
Toe angle can be corrected by the installation of eccentric rubber mounts in the semi-trailing arms.
Semi-trailing arm eccentric rubber mount part No. 1233520765 is available to correct toe-in. To
reduce toe-in, install outer rubber mount (A) with arrow pointing toward the rear as shown, Fig. 3,
and inner rubber mount (1) pointing toward the front. To increase toe-in, install outer rubber mount
(A) with arrow pointing toward the front as shown in Fig. 4 and inner rubber mount (1), pointing
toward the rear.
Page 306

Air Injection Pump Relay: Description and Operation

Fig. 20 Air Injection System Pump Relay Location

Air Injection takes place only when the coolant temperature is between 17°C (63°F) and 70°C
(158°F), the engine speed is less than 2500 RPM, the full load contact is not closed, and the
oxygen sensor is not in closed loop operation. Under these conditions the electromagnetic clutch of
the air pump is switched on by the CIS-E control unit via the air injection relay. The injection relay
simultaneously powers the change-over valve which provides vacuum to the air shut-off valve in
the pump circuit. Air is then pumped through the check valve and into the exhaust ports of the
cylinder heads.
Page 1369

Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Tools - Oil Evacuation Equipment

REF. NO. MBNA 00/65, 58/95

TO: ALL MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: July 1997

SUBJECT: ALL MODELS OIL EVACUATION EQUIPMENT

Mercedes-Benz engines are designed to allow engine oil extraction from under the hood via the
dipstick tube. The dipstick tube has an enlarged cross section and a formed extension at the top
end. On the other side it ends a short distance from the oil pan bottom. Engine oil can be extracted
using the dipstick tube.

Note:

Inserting tubular probes through the dipstick tube is NOT recommended.

Engine oil drain plugs will continue for the time being, although access to them may only be
possible with the removal of engine compartment trim or noise encapsulation panels.

A pneumatic oil suction unit, manufactured by Deutsche Tecalemit in Germany, is approved by


DBAG for use with M-B engines. The unit has recently been added to the MBNA Standard
Equipment Program and is available for order in the USA via the sole importer/distributor: AGA,
Inc. of Bettendorf, IA.

This portable unit (Figure 1) utilizes the suction principle via an air-powered piston pump. The
engine oil extraction is accomplished by connecting a specialized Suction Adapter from the unit to
the dipstick tube.
Additionally, a variety of flexible probes and fittings are also supplied for other oil removal
applications e.g. power steering reservoir, rear axle, etc. Waste oil collected in the tank of the unit
can be emptied using the unit's pump.

Features of this unit are as follows:

^ Portable and compact (21"x 40"x 35" W.H.D)

^ Cart mounted on 4 wheels (2 are locking castors).

^ 80 liter (21 gallon) waste oil tank (+ overflow indicator)

^ Adapters and fittings for other oil and non aggressive liquid removal applications.

^ Oil extraction rate @ 1.4 gal/min.

^ Automatic shut-off at the end of extraction cycle.

Note:

- Unit is powered by standard shop air supply. 87 PSI (6 Bar) min. pressure needed.
Wheels - 15 Inch Steel, New Covers

Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - 15 Inch Steel, New Covers

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

Date: October 1993

Ref. No. 40/127

Subject: ALL MODELS WITH 15 INCH WHEELS - 6-HOLE WHEEL COVERS

New style 6-hole wheel covers with a chrome trim ring (arrow, Figure 1) are now available which
can be installed on all 15" M-B steel wheels.

Parts Information

Part Name Part Number

Wheel cover with chrome trim ring 124 400 23 25


Page 1520

Fuse & Relay Box Layout / Relay Identification


Page 1266
Coolant: Service Precautions
AH20.00-N-2080-01A Notes On Coolant

Coolant composition Passenger car and commercial vehicle engines (normally): 50% water by
volume and 50% anticorrosion/antifreeze agent by volume.

Different coolant composition for CV engines, refer to MB Specifications for Operating Fluids.

Tasks of anticorrosion/antifreeze agent

- Corrosion and cavitation protection for all components in cooling system.

- Antifreeze protection (frost protection).

- Increase the boiling point so that coolant does not evaporate so rapidly. Avoiding ejection of
coolant at high coolant temperatures.

Water Use water which is clean and not too hard. Drinking water often satisfies requirements, but
not always. The amount of dissolved substances in the water may be of significance for the
occurrence of corrosion. If in doubt, analyze the water. For fresh water specifications refer to MB
Specifications for Operating Fluids.

Period of use The maximum permissible period of use of the coolant is given in the maintenance
booklet, the applicable "Service/Maintenance Sheet" or the MB-Specifications for Operating Fluids.

For the period of use for a varying coolant composition for CV engines, refer to MB Specifications
for Operating Fluids.

Before pouring in fresh coolant, flush the used coolant out of the cooling system. In the case of
severe fouling by dirt or oil, clean the cooling system otherwise components of the cooling system
can be damaged.

Antifreeze protection 50% anticorrosion/antifreeze agent by volume provides antifreeze protection


down to approx. -37 °C. A higher concentration is only necessary if the ambient temperatures are
even lower. 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze agent by volume provides antifreeze protection down to
approx. -45 °C.

A concentration of more than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze agent by volume should not be used as
the maximum antifreeze protection is already reached at this concentration. An even higher
concentration once reduces antifreeze protection and impairs heat dissipation. Reduced heat
dissipation can result in damage to components of the cooling system and to the engine.

Disposing of coolants Observe the legal provisions and local waste water regulations.
Page 736

Ventilation Switch: Testing and Inspection With A/C

TESTING OF SWITCH FOR FRESH AIR-RECIRCULATING AIR (STARTING 07/81)

- Connect ohmmeter to terminal 3 and 4.

Switch 26 Nominal value

Push symbol (arrow, top) ON = 0 to 1 Ohm

Push without symbol (arrow. bottom) OFF

= Infinite Ohms
Page 176

Symbols Part 1
Page 1324
FLUID GREASE (NLGI Class 00)
For door lock pin and striker eye

Castrol CLS Grease Castrol, Wayne, NJ / Toronto, Canada

HIGH TEMPERATURE ROLLER BEARING GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For front wheel bearings

MB High Temperature Antifriction Bearing MB part no. 001 989 23 51 10 Grease

CHASSIS GREASE (NLGI Class 01)

For all greasing points except front wheel hubs

Shell Retinax C Shell Oil Co., Houston, TX

LONG TERM LUBRICATING GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For release bearing, release arm and splines for connecting linkage on level control valves

Molykote Longterm 2 Plus Dow Corning

MB Long Term Grease MB part no. 000 989 63 51

MULTI-PURPOSE GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For all greasing points except front wheel

3752 Almagard Vari-Purpose Lubricant Lubrication Engineers Inc., Fort Worth, TX

Castrol LM Grease Castrol, Wayne, NJ / Toronto, Canada

Exxon Multipurpose Grease Exxon Co., Houston, TX

Renolit MP Fuchs Oil Corp., Somerville, NJ

Unocal MP Automotive Grease Union Oil Company of California, Brea, CA

COMPLEX GREASE (NLGI Class 2)

For sliding blocks of sliding/pop-up roof

MB Lubrication Paste MB part no. 001 989 46 51

HYDRAULIC OIL

For hydraulic system, Model 600

MB Hydraulic Oil MB part no. 100 890 O0 11

HYDRAULIC OIL

For load leveling system, hydropneumatic suspension, hydraulic soft top, 4MATIC, ASD

MB Hydraulic Oil MB part no. 000 989 91 03 10

HYDRAULIC OIL

For tandem pumps with common oil reservoir for steering and level control in Model 210.

MB Hydraulic Oil MB part no. 000 989 20 03 10


ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

MB Anti-Corrosion/Anti-freeze MB part no. Q 1 03 0002

CAUTION! The use of aluminum components in M-B engines requires that


anti-corrosion/anti-freeze specifically formulated to protect aluminum
Page 1129

Ignition Cable: Technical Service Bulletins Spark Plug Connector - Special Tool

REF. No. 15/43, 58/78

To: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: June 1990

SUBJECT: SPARK PLUG CONNECTOR REMOVAL PLIERS ALL GASOLINE MODELS

A special pair of pliers for removing the straight-type spark plug connectors from the spark plugs is
available as a special tool (Figure 1). The use of this tool will prevent damage to the spark plug
connectors and ignition cables when removing the spark plugs. The spark plug connectors on
4-valve engines (104, 119) with 90° offset can easily be removed by hand and therefore do not
require the use of this tool.

Special Tool Information


Page 322
A/C - No Or Low A/C Cooling Performance
Refrigerant Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - No Or Low A/C Cooling Performance
Date: March 10, 2009

Order No.: S-B-83.55/118

Supersedes:

Group: 83.55

SUBJECT: All Passenger and Light Truck Models

Defective Refrigeration Circuit / Refrigerant Compressor

If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles related to "no or low AC cooling
performance", it may be due to a locked refrigerant compressor, a broken torque limiter on the
refrigerant compressor, the refrigeration circuit blocked or an electrical defect in the refrigerant
compressor. To remedy any of these issues please proceed with the following.

Note:

This document is intended as a supplement to the SDS function test "Refrigerant circuit test". Only
perform repair and replacement work on the refrigerant circuit if the SDS refrigerant circuit test was
unsuccessful and you have received appropriate instructions in the SDS function test.

Prerequisites:

1. Before parts can be replaced, the exact quantity of the refrigerant in the refrigeration circuit must
be determined by evacuating the system. When returning parts be sure to indicate the exact
amount of refrigerant in the circuit and any other findings by the technician. If the filling capacity is
not indicated, warranty claims may be rejected.

2. If the fill level of the refrigerant circuit is too low, parts should only be replaced if the torque
limiter is broken.

3. If the fill level of the refrigerant circuit is too low and the torque limiter is damaged, the leak test
(Test 6 "Leak in refrigeration circuit") must be performed using the "Technology Guide Vehicle
Climate Control" located in SDS SDMedia first and then the system must be refilled and checked. If
the amount of refrigerant in the circuit is less than 80% of the normal level, it is too low. Inadequate
fill levels may be the cause of the air conditioning shutting down or malfunctioning.

Remedy A - Broken Torque Limiter:

1. Ensure the alternator freewheel (when applicable) is not damaged and that the belt pulley of the
refrigerant compressor rotates in the belt drive.

2. If the alternator freewheel is blocked, replace the alternator freewheel. For refrigerant
compressors with a replaceable belt pulley, replace the belt pulley only, otherwise replace the
refrigerant compressor. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.

3. If the alternator freewheel is not blocked and black refrigerant/oil is evacuated from the system,
replace the AC compressor. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.

Remedy B - Blockage in the Refrigeration Circuit

1. Identify through SDS function test "Refrigeration circuit test" that the refrigerant circuit has not
been underfilled or overfilled.

2. Inspect along the AC lines to check for blockage at the points with marked temperature
differences.
3. Identify and replace the blocked components in the refrigeration circuit. Refer to EPCNet for
applicable part number.

Remedy C - Electrical Defect in Refrigerant Compressor

1. Identify through SDS function test "Refrigeration circuit test" that the refrigerant circuit has not
been underfilled or overfilled.

2. After ruling out a short circuit in the actuation and ground wiring, replace the refrigerant
compressor only. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.

Note:

^ Always empty the oil from the new refrigerant compressor before installing.
Page 1165

Spark Plug: Tools and Equipment Spark Plug Boot Pliers - AST Tool # H 1849-2

Spark Plug Boot Pliers

AST tool# H 1849-2

Used for the R and R of the spark plug terminals and are applicable to Mercedes.

- 295mm Long

- Used for the R and R of Spark Plug Terminals

- Steel Construction and Easy-Grip Handle

Contact AST for pricing.

Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1-800-525-2943


Page 755
Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Electrical - Electrostatic Discharge Damage Prevention
Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical -
Electrostatic Discharge Damage Prevention
Date: March 23, 2011

Order No: S-B-54.00/238

Group: 54

SUBJECT: MY-All, All Models

Preventing Damage to Electronic Components Due to Electrostatic Discharge

Warning!

Every contact and each physical separation of material or any movement of solid substance, fluids
or particulate loaded gases can generate electrostatic charges. Plastic generally produces the
highest electrostatic charge.

The following electronic components listed as an example can be damaged by ESD:

- Airbag components

- Control units, in particular their bus connections: Control Area Network (data bus/CAN bus)
(CAN), local interconnect network (LIN), etc.

- Sensors

- Antenna amplifier

- Receivers and displays (Radio, TV, GPS, telephone, etc.)

- Multifunction antenna assembly

Safety precautions:

- Avoidance of contact with electrostatic chargeable materials such as PE, PVC, Styrofoam.

- Use only original packaging or specially labeled and defined packaging and transport materials.

- Electronic components which have been removed must be put down on an ESD workplace.
(Example: when swapping the painted cover from one multifunction antenna to another, this must
be performed on an ESD table mat (000 589 52 98 000).

- Touch connectors on electronic components and wiring harness on the housing only. Do not
touch the pins and contacts!

- Electronic components must be installed before they are connected so that potential equalization
with the body can take place.

Returning electronic components in warranty and goodwill cases:

When returning electronic components it is absolutely essential to observe the procedure and
safety precautions listed in WIS doc. AH54.00-P-0001-01A. Electrostatic charge or discharge
means the original fault can be falsified or overlaid. This can lead to distorted faults symptoms in
the case of the fault analysis of the component concerned.
Engine - Compression Recorder Tool
Compression Check: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Compression Recorder Tool
REF. NO. 01/10, 58/47

To: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

DATE: June 1987

SUBJECT: COMPRESSION RECORDERS WITH QUICK-RELEASE CONNECTIONS ALL


MODELS

New compression recorders with quick-release connections are now available for checking the
compression pressure of all gasoline and diesel engines. They replace the previous compression
recorders with screw-on adapters.

Both recorders (gasoline and diesel) are now available, together, in one plastic case.

The following sets are available:

Special Tool 001 589 76 21 00 (Figure 1)

- compression recorder for gasoline engines

- recording cards, 3.5 - 17.5 bar (001 589 76 21 13)

- compression recorder for diesel engines

- recording cards, 10 - 40 bar (001 589 76 21 21)

- adapters (3) for diesel engines (001 589 76 21 23)

- assorted accessories (extansion leads, etc.)

Special Tool 001 589 77 21 00 (Figure 2)


Page 1095

Test Steps 4.0 - 5.2


Page 215

Fuse & Relay Box Layout / Relay Identification


Page 79
Seat Heater Relay: Locations RH Rear Seat Heater Relay
Behind RH Side Of Rear Seat
Uneven Idle Speed With Transmission in Gear

Accelerator Pedal Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Uneven Idle Speed With Transmission in
Gear
Specifications

Firing Order and Cylinder Numbering


Page 1157

Spark Plug: Description and Operation

Spark Plug View

The spark plugs provide the gap across which the high tension voltage jumps, to create the spark
that ignites the compressed air-fuel mixture. The center electrode is insulated from the spark plug
shell by means of a porcelain insulator. The side electrode protrudes from the bottom edge of the
spark plug shell. It is positioned so that there is a gap between it and the center electrode.
Page 1220

Fuel Filter: Service and Repair

REPLACING FUEL FILTER

- Remove protective cover by removing mounting bolts (arrows).

- Disconnect fuel line and fuel hose.

- Loosen mounting screws (arrow) pivot holder down and remove filter.

- Install new fuel filter and plastic sleeve in flow direction.


- Sleeve should project on both sides of the holder since contact corrosion may occur if there is
direct contact with the holder.

- Replace plastic sleeve, if necessary.

- Reinstall protective cover.


Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
CAPACITY, Refill* ...............................................................................................................................
............................................ 8.0 liters (8.5 quarts)

* Capacity shown includes filter. On models with oil cooler, additional oil may be needed when
cooler is drained.
Page 1351
2. Multi-Viscosity Engine oils (Sheet No 226.1) (Continued)
3. Single-Viscosity S3 Quality Engine Oils (Sheet No. 227.0)
Page 39

Symbols Part 1
Locations

Throttle Position Switch: Locations

Fig. 20 Throttle Valve Switch

The throttle valve switch is installed on the throttle valve housing.


Page 262
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Locations

Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations

Component ID S62

Component Name Hood switch (ATA)

Component Location Right side of component compartment, left of battery


Page 596
123 (as of M.Y. 1981) 000 420 95 20 05 Jurid 226 not asbestos free
126.043/044 001 420 80 20 Textar 424

129 001 420 98 20 Jurid 524

124.051

201 (except .034) 002 420 02 20 Pagid 525 Replacement pad for 001 420 81 20 05 Production pad
as of 2/90

Rear Brake Pads

Model Part Number Material Comments

107 001 420 06 20 Textar 422

126 optional with

123 (as of M.Y. 1981) 001 420 93 20 Jurid 525

124.026/030/050 000 420 98 20 Textar 460

124.128/133/230 201.034

124.051/090/193/290 001 420 95 20 Textar 401

129

201 (except .034) 001 420 01 20 Textar 421 Production pad

001 420 01 20 05 Textar 421 (40T) Replacement pad (up to 2/90 production) for "Brake squealing
while backing up" complaints

ONLY.

Rear Brake Pads (ASR)

Model Part Number Material Comments

124.0 002 420 01 20 Textar 460

126.0 001 420 73 20 Textar 422

201.029 002 420 00 20 Textar 421

Brake Shoes, Parking Brake

Model Part Number

107,123,126 126 420 01 20

124,129,201 124 420 05 20


Page 216

Fuse Identification
Page 257

Circuit Identification
Locations
Voltage Protection Relay: Locations
Component ID K1

Component Name Overvoltage protection relay (5-pole)

Component Location Right side of component compartment

Component ID K1/1

Component Name Overvoltage protection relay, 87E (7-pole)

Component Location Right side of component compartment


Page 77
Seat Heater Relay: Locations LH Rear Seat Heater Relay
Behind LH Side Of Rear Seat
TDC Sensor
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations TDC Sensor
Component ID L1

Component Name TDC sensor

Component Location Front left of engine


Tires/Snow Chains - Factory Approved Specifications

Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Snow Chains - Factory Approved Specifications

Date: September, 2000

Order No.: P-SI-40.10/20P

Supersedes: P-SI-MBNA-40.10/20N

Group: 40

Revision: Updated approved tire list for all Model Years through 1999

SUBJECT: ALL MODELS, MODEL YEARS 1986-1999 FACTORY-APPROVED


SUMMER/ALL-SEASON/WINTER TIRES, FACTORY-APPROVED SUMMER TIRES FOR
ACCESSORY WHEELS

AND STEEL WHEELS FOR WINTER TIRES

This following is a list of summer/winter tires, steel wheels and snow chains currently approved by
DaimlerChysler AG for all Mercedes-Benz models sold in the USA/Canada by MBUSA/MBC
starting 1986 through 1999. A chart showing the maximum speed ratings is also included.

We recommend that only DaimlerChrysler AG approved tires be used on any Mercedes-Benz


vehicle.

Note:

Some of the approved tires listed may not be factory installed on USA or Canadian Mercedes-Benz
passenger cars and may not be available in the USA or Canada, or their production may be
discontinued by the manufacturer. If the original tire is no longer available for replacement
purposes, a replacement tire from the same manufacturer with the same size, speed and load
rating but with a different sidewall and/or tread pattern may be substituted.

For those models where the Operator's Manual indicates there is sufficient clearance for snow
chains, approved snow chains can be purchased directly from:

RUD Chain Inc. P.O. Box 8145 Cedar Rapids, IA 52408 Phone: (319) 390~040
The approved snow chain model is the Euromatic S.

^ Speed and load ratings for the previous VR tires can be confirmed by the individual tire
manufacturer.

^ The tire speed rating symbol "W" has been added to the familiar speed symbols
"Q/R/S/T/H/V/VR/ZR". This new symbol is used to designate tires approved for a top speed of 162
mph. When installing new tires, these tires can be used to replace VR and ZR tires, because the
affected vehicles have a limited top speed of 150 mph.

Tire Speed Rating


Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Seat Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams

How to Read Schematic Diagrams:

Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).

The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.

Component and Wire Representation:

All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.

Circuits Which Share Power and/or Grounds:

Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)

The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.

Component Identification:

Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Locations
Brake Light Switch: Locations
Component ID S9

Component Name Stop lamp switch

Component Location Top of brake pedal, mounted to bracket

Component ID S9/1

Component Name Stop lamp switch (ASD)

Component Location Top of brake pedal, mounted to bracket


A/C - Updated Leak Detector for R12 and R134a
Refrigerant: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Updated Leak Detector for R12 and R134a
REF.NO.: MBNA 58/60, 83/4

DATE: February 1993

TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS

SUBJECT: BEAR ELECTRONIC REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTOR FOR R12 AND R134a

Via the Mercedes-Benz Standard Equipment Program, Bear Automotive has sold an electronic
refrigerant leak detector which is applicable for use with both R12 and R134a automotive
refrigerant. These units were sold under model number HI-134a, and were sold together with
extension probe model HI-135.

Some early-version units (identified by a yellow colored case) of this model may have displayed
either a lack of sensitivity or what were interpreted as false signals. These conditions were due to
the extreme sensitivity of this unit to proper adjustment by the operator. Consequently, the
manufacturer has redesigned the unit to eliminate this over-sensitivity to adjustment, thereby
enhancing its effectiveness/accuracy. This redesigned unit can be identified by its black colored
case.

Presently, the manufacturer is making a one-time offer to exchange the earlier version units (yellow
colored case) for the later version units (black colored case) at no charge to any Mercedes-Benz
dealer.

NOTE:

This offer is only valid through April 1, 1993.

The extension probe, model HI-135, should he included with the returned leak detector. It will be
tested and returned together with the new version leak detector.

The subject leak detector should be sent prepaid/insured to:

Hitech Instruments 40 McLean Road Brevard, NC 28712-9989

Attn: Customer Service Department

Mercedes-Benz Desk

Please allow three weeks for delivery.


Page 1375
Damages or malfunctions resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives
are not covered by the MERCEDES-BENZ Limited Warranty.
For model year 1986, all gasoline models except 190 E 2.3 require premium unleaded gasoline. As
of model year 1987, all gasoline engines require premium unleaded gasoline

Use only premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 91 min. In the U.S., this octane number is an average of the Research
octane number (R) and the Motor octane number (M): (R + M) / 2. The octane number is also
known as the Anti-Knock Index.

CAUTION! To maintain the engine's durability and performance, only premium unleaded gasoline
is to be used. If premium unleaded is not available and low octane gasoline is used, follow these
precautions:

- Partially fill the fuel tank with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with premium unleaded
gasoline as soon as possible.

- Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration. Do not exceed an engine speed of 2000 rpm if
the vehicle has a light load (two occupants and no luggage for example). Do not exceed 2/3 of
maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous
terrain.

Model years 1975 - 1985 and model year 1986 model 190 E 2.3

Use unleaded regular gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 87 min.

Model years 1972 - 1974

Use leaded or unleaded~gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 87 min. When only unleaded gasoline is being used, check the valve
clearance on engines with mechanically adjustable valves at half the recommended interval.

Pre-model year 1972

Use premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 91 min. Check the valve clearance at half the recommended interval.

2. Diesel Engines

Use only commercially available vehicular diesel fuel number 2 or number 1 (ASTM D975 Number
2-D or Number 1-D).

For information on cold weather operation, refer to the vehicle Owner's Manual or Service
Information MBNA 00/7 (11-82).
Page 259
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3

Wiring

CODE COLOR
Page 857
Page 1323
For rear axle differential (For limited slip see below), and for refilling 4MATIC front differential.
MB Hypoid Gear Oil MB part no. 000 989 28 03

HYPOID GEAR OIL

For limited slip differential and rear axle with ASD, 4MATIC

MB Limited Slip Differential Oil MB part no. 000 583 09 04

HYPOID GEAR OIL

For initial (new) fill of 4MATIC front differential

MB Life-long hypoid gear oil MB part no. 001 989 05 03

MANUAL TRANSMISSION FLUID

For MB manual transmission

MB Manual Transmission Fluid MB part no. 000 989 26 03

STEERING GEAR LUBRICANT

For power steering

MB Power Steering Fluid MB part no. 000 989 88 33

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

For MB automatic transmission (not including MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6),
transfer case (4MATIC), and MB manual transmission (except GL76/30-5 and GL275E) use:

Castrol Dexron-III/Mercon ATF F-30341 Castrol Transmax M-22257 / 22096 Chevron ATF Dexron
III F-30108 / 30159 Citgo Multi-Purpose ATF D-21571 Exxon Superflo ATF Dexron-III F-30111
Havoline ATF Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Pennzoil, ATF D-21380 Pennzoil, ATF F-30110 Quaker
State Dexron-III/Mercon F-30161 Sunoco ATF Dexron-III/Mercon F-30176 Texaco ATF
Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Unocal Multi-Purpose ATF D-22413 / 22431 Valvoline ATF Type D

Supplier Information: Castrol, Piscataway, NJ / Toronto, Canada Chevron Products Co., San
Francisco CA Citgo Petroleum Corp., Tulsa, OK Exxon Company USA, Houston, TX Texaco
Lubricants Co., Houston, TX Pennzoil Products Co., Houston, TX Quaker State, Seneca, PA Sun
Co., Philadelphia, PA Unocal Science and Technology Div., Brea, CA Valvoline International,
Lexington, KY

For MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6 and Model 163 transfer case use:

MB Automatic Transmission Fluid MB part no. 001 989 21 03 10

SUPERCHARGER OIL

MB Supercharger Oil MB part no. 000 989 6201


Page 1577
Page 502
BK black
BR brown

BU blue

IV ivory

GN green

GY grey

TR neutral/transparent

OR orange

PK pink

RD red

VI purple

WT white

YL yellow

Vacuum

CODE COLOR

gn = green

bl = blue

hbl = light blue

drt = dark red

ge = yellow

mgn = medium green

gr = gray

rt = red

ws = white

sw = black

dgn = dark green

tr = transparent

You might also like